Home

CrossWorks for ARM User Guide

Contents

1. global interrupts are now enabled so another interrupt can be handled ctl_global_interrupts_un_re_enable_from_isr 230 Chapter 23 Global interrupts control Timer support The current time is held as a 32 bit value in the ctl_current_time variable This variable is incremented by a periodic interrupt that is started using the ctl_start_timer function When you start the timer you must pass it a function to call when the periodic interrupt occurs The interrupt function can be a user defined function that calls ctl_increment_tick_from_isr void myfn void ctl_increment_tick_from_isr i void main ctl_start_timer myfn Alternatively you can pass the ctl_increment_tick_from_isr function as the parameter void main ctl_start_timer ctl_increment_tick_from_isr You can atomically read ctl_current_time using the ctl_get_current_time function on systems whose word size is not 32 bit You can find out the resolution of the timer using the ctl_get_ticks_per_secondfunction You can suspend execution of a task for a fixed period using the ctl_timeout_wait function Note that this function takes the timeout not the duration as a parameter so you should always call this function with ctl_get_current_time duration ctl_timeout_wait ctl_get_current_time 100 This example suspends execution of the calling task for 100 increments of the ctl_current_time variable 232 Chapter 24
2. New menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description New File Creates a new file using the New File dialog New Blank File Ctrl K Ctrl N Creates a new unnamed document New Project Creates a new project using the New Project dialog New Blank Ctrl K Creat new solit taini oct Solution Ctrl Shift N eates a new solution containing no projects Chapter 16 New menu 175 176 Menu command Keystroke Description New aes Ctrl T F Creates a new file comparison window Comparison Creates a new folder underneath the currently selected item in the New Folder Project Explorer Edit menu The Edit menu provides commands to edit files The Edit menu K9 Undo Ctrl z Ca Redo Ctrl Cut Ctrl x Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl y X Delete Del Clipboard Clipboard Ring Select All Ctrl a Insert File Ctrl K Ctrl I 4 Expand Template Ctrl J Editing Macros Selection Bookmarks Format gt Advanced Edit menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description Undo Ctrl Z or Undoes the last editing action Alt Backspace Redo Ctrl Y or Alt Shift Backs pace Redoes the last undone editing action Cut Ctrl X or Shift Delete Cuts the selected text to the clipboard If no text is selected cuts the current line to the clipboard Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary Menu command Keystroke Description cane C
3. The Debug menu Debug Windows Breakpoints Control gt l Start Debugging z Ctri Alt F5 i Ctr T H H Debugging Ctrl F5 Z Yerif Ctrl T y Go FS m Break Ctri m Stop Shift F5 RE Restart Ctrl Shift F5 SE Step Into Fil step Over F10 G Step Out Shift F 11 42 Run To Cursor Ctrl F10 E Auto Step Alt F11 Z Set Next Statement Shift F10 DE Show Next Statement Alt Locate Ed Quick Watch Shift F9 Ba Add to Watch Ctrl T Ctrl w ar Remove from Watch Edit Search Paths Exceptions Ctrl Shift E The Debug toolbar 2 oe wt E C3 Gz als A gt SGOEPaa ss Debug commands Menu command Keystroke Description Debug Windows Displays the Debug Windows menu See Debug Windows menu page 196 Breakpoints Displays the Breakpoints menu See Breakpoint menu page 195 Conal Displays the Debug Control menu See Debug Control menu page 194 192 Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary Menu command Keystroke Description Downloads the program to the selected target interface and starts D Pe running the program under control of the debugger Reset and Debug Ctrl Alt F5 Resets the selected target interface without downloading the project and starts running the program Attach Debugger Ctrl T H Attaches the debugger to the program running on the selected target interface Start Without Downloads the program to the selected target interfa
4. The register state of the currently selected thread using the the Threads window The register state that you have supplied using the Debug gt Locate operation To display a group of CPU registers do the following On the Registers window tool bar click the Groups button a From the dropdown menu check the register groups to display and uncheck the ones to hide You can uncheck all CPU register groups to allow more space in the display for special function or peripheral registers So for instance you can have one register window showing the CPU registers and other register windows showing different peripheral registers Displaying special function or peripheral registers The registers window shows the set of register groups that have been defined in the memory map file that the application was built with If there is no memory map file associated with a project the Registers window will show only the CPU registers To display a special function or peripheral register do the following Chapter 12 Register windows 119 120 On the Registers window tool bar click the Groups button b From the dropdown menu check the register groups to display and uncheck the ones to hide Changing display format When you select a register in the main part of the display the display format button highlighted on the Registers window tool bar changes to show the item s display format To change the display f
5. include lt math h gt float fmaxf float x float y fmaxf determines the minimum of x and y fmaxf NaWN y is y fmaxf x NaN is x fmaxf conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double fmin double x double y fmin determines the minimum of x and y fmin NaN y is y fmin x NaN is x fmin conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float fminf float x float y fminf determines the minimum of x and y fminf NaN y is y fminf x NaN is x fminf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference fmod Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability fmod t Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability frexp Synopsis Description include lt math h gt double fmod double x double y fmod computes the floating point remainder of x divided by y fmod returns the value x ny for some integer n such that if y is nonzero the result has the same sign as x and magnitude less than the magnitude of y If y 0 fmod returns zero and errno is set to EDOM fmod 0 y is 0 for y not zero fmod Infinity y is NaN and raises the invalid floating point exception fmod x 0 is NaN and raises the invalid floating point exception fmod x Infinity is x for x not infinite fmod conforms to ISO
6. ARM microcontrollers ARM technical reference manuals specifications user guides and white papers for can be found at http www arm com Documentation Chapter 1 What we don t tell you GNU compiler collection The latest GCC documentation news and downloads can be be found at http gcc gnu org Activating your product Each copy of CrossWorks must be licensed and registered before it can be used Each time you purchase a CrossWorks license you as a single user can use CrossWorks on the computers you need to develop and deploy your application This covers the usual scenario of using both a laptop and desktop and optionally a laboratory computer Evaluating CrossWorks If you are evaluating CrossWorks on your computer you must activate it To activate your software for evaluation follow these instructions Install CrossWorks on your computer using the CrossWorks installer and accept the license agreement Run the CrossStudio application From the Tools menu click License Manager If you have a default mailer click the By Mail button underneath the text If you wish to evaluate CrossWorks Using e mail send the registration key to the e mail address license rowley co uk If you do have a default mailer click the Manually button underneath the text If you wish to evaluate CrossWorks CrossStudio copies a registration key onto the clipboard Send the registration key to the e mail address license ro
7. Alternatives are separated by vertical bars Optional sequences are enclosed in square brackets and Chapter1 Introduction Sequences which may be repeated zero or more times are enclosed in braces and Each phrase definition is built up using an equals sign to separate the two sides and a semicolon to terminate the right hand side Requesting support and reporting problems With software as complex as CrossWorks it s it s almost inevitable that you ll need assistance at some point Here are some pointers on what to do when you think you ve found a problem Requesting help If you need some help working with CrossWorks please contact our support department by e mail support rowley co uk Reporting a bug Should you have a problem with this product which you consider a bug please report it by e mail to our support department bugs rowley co uk Support and suggestions If you have any comments or suggestions regarding the software or documentation please send these in an e mail to support rowley co uk or in writing to CrossWorks Customer Support Rowley Associates Limited Suite 4B 4C Drake House Drake Lane Dursley Gloucestershire GL11 4HS UNITED KINGDOM Tel 44 1453 549536 Fax 44 1453 544068 Chapter 1 Requesting support and reporting problems 10 Chapter 1 Introduction Part Il CrossStudio Reference This section is a reference to the CrossS
8. Bit Length A decimal value that defines the number of bits in the field The editor has many of the attributes of the text editor and the same key bindings for example cut copy and paste are all accessible from the Edit menu In addition to the standard editor capabilities the memory map editor supports the movement up and down of nodes within a hierarchy This enables the sequencing of program sections to be achieved Chapter9 Code templates 91 92 Chapter9 Memory map editor 10 Package management CrossWorks can have additional target support functionality installed and removed using packages Packages are similar to libraries files containing other files and have CrossWorks specific functionality to support package browsing and new project creation Installing packages The package you wish to install should be saved in the StudioDir packages directory From the Tools menu click Install Package Select the package file from the file chooser dialog Ifyou are updating an existing installed package that has files that have been modified then you will be prompted before these files are updated When the installation is complete the installed packages page will be displayed You should leave the package in the StudioDir packages directory in case you wish to reinstall or remove the package Removing installed packages The package you wish to remove should be in the StudioDir packages directo
9. ctl_task_init amp mainTask 255 main This function must be called before any other CrossWorks tasking library calls are made The priority second parameter must be between 0 the lowest priority and 255 the highest priority It is advisable to create the first task with the highest priority which enables the main task to create other tasks without being descheduled The name should point to a zero terminated ASCII string for debug purposes When this function has been called global interrupts will be enabled so you must ensure that any interrupt sources are disabled before calling this function You can create other tasks using the function ct 1_task_run which initialises a task structure and may cause a context switch You supply the same arguments as task_init together with the function that the task will run and the memory that the task will use as its stack The function that a task will run should takea void parameter and not return any value void task1Fn void parameter 210 task code goes in here The parameter value is supplied to the function by the ct1_task_run call Note when a task function returns the ctl_task_die function is called which terminates the task You have to allocate the stack for the task as an C array of unsigned unsigned task1Stack 64 The size of the stack you need depends on the CPU type the number of registers that have to be saved the function calls that the task w
10. Ensure that the filter on the symbol browser tool bar is empty Click on the Size field in the header to sort by data size Read off the the sizes of variables under the Variable group and functions under the Functions group What s the overall size of my application Show the symbol browser by selecting Symbol Browser from the Tools menu Group symbols by section by choosing Symbol Browser gt Group By Section from the Tools menu Make sure that the Range and Size fields are checked in Symbol Browser gt Fields on the Tools menu Read off the section sizes and ranges of each section in the application Targets window The targets window and associated menu displays the set of target interfaces that you can connect to in order to download and debug your programs Using the targets window in conjunction with the properties window enables you to define new targets based on the specific target types supported by the particular CrossStudio release Chapter 12 Targets window 139 140 You can connect disconnect and reconnect to a target system You can also reset and load programs using the target window If you load a program using the target window and you need to debug it then you will have to use the Debug gt Attach Debugger operation Targets window layout Targets tool bar Button Description Connects the selected target interface Disconnects the connected target interface Reconnects t
11. Portability ULONG_MAX Synopsis Description Portability USHRT_MAX Synopsis Description Portability include lt limits h gt define UINT_MAX processor dependent value UINT_MAX is the maximum value for an object of type unsigned int For processors where an unsigned integer is held in 16 bits UINT_MAX is 65535 and for processors where an unsigned integer is held in 32 bits UINT_MAX is 4294967295 UINT_MAX conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define ULLONG_MAX 18446744073709551615 ULLONG_MAX is the maximum value for an object of type unsigned long long int ULLONG_MAxX conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define ULONG_MAX 2147483647 ULONG_MAX is the maximum value for an object of type unsigned long int ULONG_MAX conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define USHRT_MAX 65535 USHRT_MAX is the maximum value for an object of type unsigned short int USHRT_MAX conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 lt math h gt Mathematics 252 The header file lt math h gt defines a number of types macros and mathematical functions Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Classification functions isfinite Is floating value finite isinf Is floating value an infinity isnan Is floating value a NaN Trigonometri
12. ian C yele Restarts the cycle counter after it has been paused Counter Pause Cycle Pauses the cycle counter so that it does not incremement and count Counter cycles even though code executes Keset e yolg Resets the cycle counter to zero Counter Breakpoint menu The Breakpoint menu provides commands to create modifiy and remove breakpoints The Breakpoint menu is a submenu of the Debug menu The Breakpoint menu i New Breakpoint Ctrl Alt F9 AN New Breakpoint Group Disable All Breakpoints M Enable All Breakpoints h Clear All Breakpoints Ctrl Shift F9 Next Breakpoint Alt F9 4l Previous Breakpoint Alt Shift F9 Chapter 16 Breakpoint menu 195 196 Breakpoint commands Menu command Keystroke Description Activates the New Breakpoint menu which allows you to create New Ctrl Alt F9 complex breakpoints on code or data See Breakpoints window Breakpoint page 102 New Breakpoint Creates a new breakpoint group in the Breakpoints window You Group can manage breakpoints individually or as a group Disable ae Disables all breakpoints so that they are never hit Breakpoints Bae al Enables all breakpoints so that they can be hit Breakpoints Se ae Ctrl Shift F9 Removes all breakpoints set in the Breakpoints window Breakpoints Next Breakpoint Alt F9 Selects the next breakpoint in the Breakpoint window and moves the cursor to the statement or instruction associated with that breakp
13. 364 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Save Name Descriptio The address to start execution from This defaults to be the Load Addressif it isn t defined external_start_ Start Address String address Folder Properties Folder Options These properties are applicable to project folders Property Type Save Name Descriptio A list of file extensions that are matched when a file is added to the project Filter String List filter Chapter 36 Folder Properties 365 Library Properties Library Options These properties are applicable to Library project types Property Type Save Name suai Specifies the name of the output file produced by the librarian This property will have macro expansion applied to it Note that the save name is the same build_output_f as the ile_name Executable File Name property If this property is used at the solution node level it will be applied to both Library and Executable project types within the solution Library File Name String 366 Chapter 36 Property Reference Linker Properties These properties are applicable to Executable project types Chapter 36 Linker Properties 367 Printf Scanf Options Descriptio n Property Save Name Specifies whether the version of the printf that supports linker_printf_f floating p_enabled point numbers should be linked into the applicatio n Printf Floating Point Suppor
14. Chapter8 Basic editing Select Edit Insert File menu item Select file to insert Click Open button To toggle a files write permission Select the editor containing the file Select Edit Advanced Toggle Read Only Find and replace To find text in a single file Select Edit Find and Replace Find menu item Enter the string to be found in the Find what input If the search will be case sensitive set the Match case option If the search will be for a whole word i e there will be whitespace the beginning or the end of line on either side of the string being searched for set the Match whole word option If the search string is a Regular expressions page 83 set the Use regular expression option If the search should move up the document from the current cursor position rather than down the document set the Search up option Click Find button to find next occurrence of the string or click Mark All to bookmark all lines in the file containing the string To find text within a selection Select text to be searched Select Edit Find and Replace Find menu item Enter the string to be found in the Find what input If the search will be case sensitive set the Match case option If the search will be for a whole word i e there will be whitespace the beginning or the end of line on either side of the string being searched for set the Match whole word option Chapter 8 Find and replace 81 82
15. Describes how to gather useful profiling statistics on your application on the simulator and targets that support execution profiling and tracing Globals window page 112 Locals window page 114 and Watch window page 122 Describes how to examine your application s local and global variables and how to watch specific variables Memory window page 116 Describes how to look at target memory in raw hexadecimal form Register windows page 118 Describes how to examine processor registers and peripherals defined by the project s memory map file Threads window page 120 Describes how CrossStudio can display thread local data tasks and objects when you run your application under a real time operating system Help window page 125 Describes how the CrossSudio help system works and how to get answers to your questions 100 Output window page 127 Describes the output window and the logs it contains Project dependencies and build order page 53 Describes the project explorer and how to manage your projects Properties window page 130 Describes the property window and how to change environment and project properties using it Source code control page 61 Describes how to use the Source Navigator to easily browse your project s functions methods and variable Symbol browser page 133 Describes how you can use the Symbol browser to find out how much code and data your application requires
16. Display the dropdown menu of the item to delete by clicking the arrow at the right of the item From the menu click Delete Removing all items from the clipboard ring To remove all items from the clipboard ring do one of the following From the Edit menu click Clipboard Ring then Clear Clipboard Ring or On the Clipboard Ring tool bar click the Clear Clipboard Ring button or Type Ctrl R Delete Configuring the clipboard ring To configure the clipboard ring do the following From the Tools menu select Options Under Environment select Even More Check Preserve Contents to save the content of the clipboard ring between runs or uncheck it to start with an empty clipboard ring Change Maximum Items to configure the maximum number of items stored on the clipboard ring Build log window The Build window contain the results of the last build it is cleared on each rebuild If there are any errors in the build then they are displayed in red Clicking on such a line will locate the editor to the errant source line The command lines used to do the build can be echoed to the build log using the tools options build echo checkbox Breakpoints window The Breakpoints window manages the list of currently set breakpoints on the solution Using the breakpoint window you can 102 Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows Enable disable and delete existing breakpoints Add new breakpoints Sho
17. Formatted output functions printf Write formatted text to standard output snprintf Write formatted text to a string with truncation sprintf Write formatted text to a string Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Write formatted text to standard output using a va_list rintf vprnt argument 3 Write formatted text to a string with truncation using a va_list vsnprintf argument vsprintf Write formatted text to a string using a va_list argument Formatted output control strings The format is composed of zero or more directives ordinary characters not which are copied unchanged to the output stream and conversion specifications each of which results in fetching zero or more subsequent arguments converting them if applicable according to the corresponding conversion specifier and then writing the result to the output stream Overview Each conversion specification is introduced by the character After the the following appear in sequence Zero or more flags in any order that modify the meaning of the conversion specification An optional minimum field width If the converted value has fewer characters than the field width it is padded with spaces by default on the left or right if the left adjustment flag has been given to the field width The field width takes the form of an asterisk or a decimal integer An optional precision that gives the minimum number of digit
18. If the search string is a Regular expressions page 83 set the Use regular expression option If the search should move up the document from the current cursor position rather than down the document set the Search up option Click Mark All to bookmark all lines in the selection containing the string To find and replace text Select Edit Find and Replace Replace menu item Enter the string to be found in the Find what input Enter the string to replace the found string with in the Replace with input If the search string is a Regular expressions page 83 then the n backreference can be used in the replace string to reference captured text If the search will be case sensitive set the Match case option If the search will be for a whole word i e there will be whitespace the beginning or the end of line on either side of the string being searched for set the Match whole word option If the search string is a Regular expressions page 83 set the Use regular expression option If the search should move up the document from the current cursor position rather than down the document set the Search up option Click Find button to find next occurrence of string and then Replace button to replace the found string with replacement string or click Replace All to replace all occurrences of the string without prompting To find text in multiple files Select Edit Find and Replace Find in Files menu item Enter the
19. mkpkg d packages MyNewTarget hzq d fileToRemove 330 You can add or replace a file into an existing package using the r option mkpkt r packages MyNewTarget hzq r fileToAddOrReplace You can automate the package creation process using a Combining project type Using the new project wizard create a combining project in the directory StudioDir Set the Output File Path property to be S StudioDir packages mypackage hzq Set the Combine command property to StudioDir bin mkpkg c CombiningOutputFilePath CombiningRelInputPaths Add the files you want to go into the package into the project using the project explorer Right click on the project node in the project explorer and build When a package is installed the files in the package are copied into the desired StudioDir relative locations When a file is copied into the StudioDir packages directory and it s filename ends with _package xml the file StudioDir packages installed_packages xml is updated with an entry lt include filename MyNewTarget_package xml gt During development of a package you can manually edit this file The same applies to the file StudioDir targets project_templates xml which will contain a reference to your project_templates xml file Usage mkpkg options package filel file2 c Create a new package d Remove files from a package r Replace files in a package t List the contents
20. 0 ctl_unmask_isr 11 T The isr function is triggered from interrupt vector 11 and will run at priority 11 When the function is run it enables interrupts which will allow higher priority interrupts to trigger whilst it is executing 234 Chapter25 Programmable interrupt handling Low level interrupt handling If your system doesn t support a programmable interrupt controller and you want tasks to be rescheduled when interrupts occur you must save the register state of the CPU on entry to an interrupt service routine and increment the global variable ctl_interrupt_count When you are executing an interrupt service routine you must not call the tasking library functions that may block task_wait_events task_wait_semaphore task_post_message task_receive_message task_wait_timeout you can call other tasking library functions but a task switch will only occur when the last interrupt handler has completed execution Whilst you are executing an interrupt service routine you can allow interrupts of a higher priority to occur by calling ctl_global_interrupts_re_enable_from_isr You must also disable interrupts before exit from the interrupt service routine by calling ctl_global_interrupts_un_re_enable_from_isr In order to achieve a task switch from an interrupt service routine the ctl_exit_isr function must be jumped to as the last action of an interrupt service routine This function must be passed a pointer to the save
21. 154 code it is put into the program section vectorswhich is positioned at address 0x00000000 by the Memory map files page 157 file 154 The processor jumps to the reset_handler label in the Target startup code page 154 code which configures the target When the target is configured the Target startup code page 154 code jumps to the _start entry point in the Startup code page 155 code which sets up the C runtime environment When the C runtime environment has been set up the Startup code page 155 code jumps to the C entry point function main When the program returns from main it re enters the Startup code page 155 code executes the destructors and then finally enters an endless loop Target startup code The following section describes the role of the target specific startup code When you create a new project to produce an executable file using a target specific project template a file containing the default startup code for the target will be added to the project Initially a shared version of this file will be added to the project if you want to modify this file you should select the file in the project explorer and then select Import to copy the file to your project directory The target startup file typically consists of the following _vectors This is the exception vector table It is put into it s own vectors section in order to ensure that it is always placed at address 0x00000000 reset_handler This is
22. 186 187 188 189 190 192 194 195 196 198 199 200 205 205 206 207 207 207 207 209 213 217 221 CrossStudio menu summary File menu New menu Edit menu Clipboard menu Clipboard Ring menu Macros menu Edit Selection menu Bookmarks menu Advanced menu View menu Other Windows menu Browser menu Toolbars menu Search menu Project menu Build menu Debug menu Debug Control menu Breakpoint menu Debug Windows menu Tools menu Window menu Help menu Tasking Library Tutorial Overview Tasks Task synchronization and resource allocation Timer support Interrupt service routine support Memory block allocation support C library support Tasks Event sets Semaphores Message queues Chapter 1 Chapter 22 Chapter 23 Chapter 24 Chapter 25 Chapter 26 Chapter 27 Part IV Chapter 28 Part V Chapter 29 Chapter 30 Chapter 31 Chapter 32 Chapter 33 Chapter 34 225 229 231 233 235 237 241 242 243 247 248 252 276 278 280 295 310 321 323 327 329 331 333 Byte queues Global interrupts control Timer support Programmable interrupt handling Low level interrupt handling Memory areas Library Reference Standard C Library Reference lt assert h gt Diagnostics lt ctype h gt Character handling lt errno h gt Errors lt limits h gt Integer numerical limits lt math h gt Mathematics lt setjmp h gt Non local jumps lt
23. Additionally the library provides timer interrupt service routine and memory block allocation support In this section Overview page 205 Describes the principles behind the CTL Tasks page 209 Describes how to create CTL tasks turn the main program into a task and manage tasks Event sets page 213 Describes what a CTL event set is and how it can be used Semaphores page 217 Describes what a CTL semphotre is and how it can be used Message queues page 221 Describes what a CTL message queue is and how it can be used Byte queues page 225 Describes what a CTL byte queue is and how it can be used Global interrupts control page 229 Describes how you can use CTL functions to enable and disable global interrupts Timer support page 231 Describes the timer facilities that the CTL provides D T aF gt OQ m O gt ba a lt _ c ep Q gt 2 Programmable interrupt handling page 233 Describes how you can use CTL functions on systems that have programmable interrupt controller hardware Low level interrupt handling page 235 Describes how to write interrupt service routines that co exist with the CTL Memory areas page 237 Describes how you can use the CTL to allocate fixed sized memory blocks Related sections lt ctl_api h gt CTL functions The reference for each of the functions and variables defined by the CTL Threads window page 120 A scriptable d
24. Reconnecting a target You can disconnect and reconnect a target in a single operation using the reconnect feature This may be useful if the target board has been power cycled or reset manually as it forces CrossStudio to resynchronize with the target To reconnect a target do one of the following From the Target menu click Reconnect or On the Targets window tool bar click the Reconnect button or Chapter 12 Targets window 141 142 Type Ctrl T E In the Targets window right click the target to reconnect From the popup menu click Reconnect Automatic target connection You can configure CrossStudiuo to automatically connect to the last used target interface when loading a solution To enable or disable automatic target connection do the following From the View menu click Properties Window In the Properties Window click Environment Properties from the combo box In the Target Settings section set the Enable Auto Connect property to Yes to enable automatic connection or to No to disable automatic connection Creating a new target interface To create a new target interface do the following From the targets window s context menu click New Target Interface A new menu will be displayed containing the types of target interface that may be created Select the type of target interface to create Setting target interface properties All target interfaces have a set of proper
25. S Match a non whitespace character w Match a word character W Match a non word character Match set of characters e g ch matches characters c or h A range can be specified using the character e g 0 27 9 matches if c character is 0 1 2 7 8 or 9 A range can be negated using the character e g a z matches if character is anything other than a lower case alphabetic character The literal character c For example to match the character you would use a Match ASCII bell character f Match ASCII form feed character n Match ASCII line feed character Chapter 8 Regular expressions 83 84 r Match ASCII carriage return character t Match ASCII horizontal tab character v Match ASCII vertical tab character xhhhh Match Unicode character specified by hexadecimal number hhhh Match any character Match zero or more occurrences of the preceding expression Match one or more occurrences of the preceding expression Match zero or one occurrences of the preceding expression n Match n occurrences of the preceding expression n Match at least n occurrences of the preceding expression m Match at most m occurrences of the preceding expression tnm Match at least n and at most m occurrences of the preceding expression A Beginning of line End of line b Word boundary B Non word boundary e Capture expression e
26. Size Access Type Specifies if the memory segment is read only or read write Program section properties Start Address An optional hexadecimal value that is the absolute load position of the section If this isnt set then the relative placement of the program section within the memory segment will determine the load position of the section Size An optional decimal value that is the size in bytes of the program section Load Specifies whether or not the section should be loaded by the debugger Alignment An optional decimal value that specifies the alignment requirements of the section Section To Run In An optional name of another program section that this program section will be copied to Chapter9 Memory map editor Input Section Names The optional names of the files that will be placed into this section Register properties Start Address A hexadecimal value specifying where the register is placed Start Address Symbol The name of a linker symbol to generate that has the value of the Start Address Register Type Optional a C type specifying how you want the register to be displayed The defaults to the word length of the target processor Endian Optional specifies the byte order of a multibyte register This defaults to the byte order of the target processor Bitfield properties Bit Offset A decimal value that is the starting bit position of the bit field Bit 0 is the first bit position
27. The delay parameter specifies the number of milliseconds to hold the nSRST signal This function allows the processor to run for a period of time before the processor is stopped which may cause unpredictable behaviour as the processor may be left in an undefined state if it has been allowed to start up from reset Targetinterface stopAndReset TargetInterface stopAndReset delay TargetInterface stopAndReset resets the target by stopping the processor and then cycling nSRST The delay parameter specifies the number of milliseconds to hold the nSRST signal The difference between this function and TargetInterface resetAndStopis that this function attempts to keep the processor stopped whilst it is reset and therefore allows you to start your program with the processor in a known state Some ARM targets however can t do this as the reset also resets the debug interface which allows the processor to run when it is released from reset On these targets this function behaves in the same way as TargetInterface resetAndStop TargetInterface setNSRST TargetInterface setNSRST state TargetInterface setNSRST sets the level of the target s nSRST reset signal high if state is non zero TargetInterface setRegister TargetInterface setRegister register value TargetInterface setRegister sets the CPU regsister register to value Chapter 14 Target script file 165 166 Synopsis Description Synopsis Description register is a string d
28. The parameter type must be a type name such that the type of a pointer to an object that has the specified type can be obtained simply by postfixing a to type If there is no actual next argument or if type is not compatible with the type of the actual next argument as promoted according to the default argument promotions the behavior of va_arg is undefined except for the following cases one type is a signed integer type the other type is the corresponding unsigned integer type and the value is representable in both types one type is pointer to void and the other is a pointer to a character type The first invocation of the va_arg macro after that of the va_start macro returns the value of the argument after that specified by parmN Successive invocations return the values of the remaining arguments in succession When calling va_arg you must ensure that type is the promoted type of the argument not the argument type The following will not work as you expect char x va_arg ap char Because characters are promoted to integers the above must be written Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Portability See also va_copy Synopsis Description Portability See also va_end Synopsis Description Portability See also va_end Synopsis Description char ch char va_arg ap int va_arg conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 va_copy page 279 va_end
29. To see the project explorer do one of the following From the View menu click Project Explorer or Type Ctrl Alt P or Right click the tool bar area From the popup menu select Project Explorer This is what our project looks like in the Project Explorer Chapter 2 Creating a project 15 16 You ll notice that the project name is shown in bold which indicates that it is the active project and in our case the only project If you have more than one project then you can set the active project using the dropdown box on the build tool bar or the context menu of the project explorer The files are arranged into two groups Source Files contains the main source files for your application which will typically be header files C files and assembly code files You may want to add files with other extensions or documentation files in HTML format for instance System Files contains links to source files that are not part of the project yet are required when the project is built and run In this case the system files are crt0 s which is the C runtime startup written in assembly code RAM_at_Zero_MemoryMap xmla memory map file that describes a target with RAM located at address 0x00000000 sram_placement xm1 which directs the linker on how to arrange program sections in memory Standard_ARM_Startup s which contains the target specific start code and exception vectors and Standard_ARM_Target js which contains the tar
30. Type Ctrl Alt or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Symbol Browser Drilling down into the application The Tutorial project shows this in the Symbol Browser EN 7 fast fast_load init tot tat load bss ctors data data_load dtors heap stack 00000a78 00000e77 stack_irq 00000e78 D0000F77 stack _fiq 00000F78 00001077 stack _abt 00001078 stack_svc 00001078 stack_und 00001078 No section sodata FE From this you can see The vectors section containing the ARM exception vectors is placed in memory between address 0x00000000 and 0x0000003B The fast section containing performance critical code and data is empty The init section containing the system startup code is placed in memory between address 0x0000003C and 0x00000213 The text section containing the program code is placed in memory between address 0x00000214 and 0x0000065F The text_load section which is the section that the text section image is loaded from is at the same address as text If the textand text_load section start addresses Chapter 2 Exploring projects 25 differ then the startup code will copy the contents of the text_load section to the text section before the program enters main This feature allows the text section to ru
31. and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt void memcpy void s1 const void s2 size_t n memcpy copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the object pointed to by s1 The behaviour of memcpy is undefined if copying takes place between objects that overlap memcpy returns the value of s1 memcpy conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt void memmove void s1 const void s2 size_t n memmove copies n characters from the object pointed to by s2 into the object pointed to by s1 ensuring that if s1 and s2 overlap the copy works correctly Copying takes place as if the n characters from the object pointed to by s2 are first copied into a temporary array of n characters that does not overlap the objects pointed to by s1 and s2 and then the n characters from the temporary array are copied into the object pointed to by s1 memmove returns the value of s1 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Portability memset Synopsis Description Portability strcat Synopsis Description Portability strchr Synopsis Description Portability See also strcmp Synopsis memmove conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt void memset void s int c size_t n memset copies the value of c converted to an unsigned char into each of the first n characters of the object pointed to
32. ares Comms Channel Loader a loader that communic ates using the ARM DCC Fast Comms Channel arm_target_flas Loader a h_loader_type loader that communic ates using the ARM DCC RAM Loader a loader that communic ates using RAM and breakpoint s and LIBMEM RPC Loader a loader that communic ates using remote procedure calls Loader File Type Enumeration 396 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Loader Parameter String Save Name arm_target_loa der_parameter Descriptio This field allows a parameter to be passed to the loader The parameter is loader specific Reset After Download Boolean arm_target_loa der_reset_after _download Specifies whether the target should be reset after a download using a loader Stop CPU Using DBGRQ Boolean arm_target_sto p_cpu_using_d bgrq Specifies whether the CPU should be stopped by asserting DBGRO rather than by using breakpoint s ARM Simulator Properties These properties are applicable to Executable and Externally Built Executable project types Chapter 36 ARM Simulator Properties 397 398 Simulator Options Property Save Name Descriptio Memory Simulation Filename Filename arm_simulator _memory_simu lation_filename The path to the dynamic link library that will implement the memory for the ARM simulator This property will have macro expansion applied to i
33. tasks can wait for to be non zero Counting semaphores are useful when serialising access to fixed sized buffers i e the count value can represent the number of free or used elements in the buffer Message Queues A message queue is a structure that enables tasks to post and receive data Message queues are used to provide a buffered communication mechanism between tasks Byte Queues A byte queue is a specialisation of a message queue i e it is a message queue where the messages are one byte in size Interrupt enable disable The tasking library provides functions that enable and disable the global interrupt enables state of the processor These functions can be used to provide a time critical mutual exclusion facility Note that all waits on task synchronization objects are priority based i e the highest priority task waiting will be scheduled first Chapter17 Overview Timer support If your application can provide a periodic timer interrupt for example one that keeps a watch dog alive then you can use the timer wait facility of the library This is a simple software counter that is incremented by your timer interrupt You can use this to specify a wakeup time and to prevent your program waiting forever for something to happen Interrupt service routine support On systems that have programmable interrupt controllers the CTL provides functions that enable you to install interrupt service routines as C functions
34. value of this property will be automatically set to a project s Endian property when a project is downloaded or attached to Chapter13 Target interfaces Processor Stop Time The timeout period in milliseconds to allow when stopping the processor ARM Simulator Target interface The ARM Simulator target interface provides access to CrossStudio s ARM instruction set simulator ISS The ISS simulates the ARM V5TE instruction set as defined in Part A of the ARM Architecure Reference Manual ARM DDI 0100E The ISS supports exception vectors at address zero high vectors are not supported The ISS implements a 3 word instruction pre fetch buffer The ISS supports MCR and MRC access to the 16 primary registers of the System Control coprocessor CP15 as defined in Part B of the ARM DDI 0100E however the cache and MMU functionality is not supported The ISS supports MCR and MRC access to the Debug Communication Channel CP 14 as defined in ARM7TDMI Technical Reference Manual ARM DDI 0210B The memory system simulated by the ISS is specified by a dynamic link library and associated parameter defined inARM Simulator Properties page 397 The ISS supports program loading and debugging with an unlimited number of breakpoints The ISS supports instruction tracing execution counts exception vector trapping and exception vector triggering Chapter 13 ARM Simulator Target interface 151 152 Chapter13 Target interfaces ARM Target Sup
35. 169 Exceptions Opens the Exceptions dialog Debug Control menu The Debug Control menu provides commands to control how you debug your program The Debug Control menu is a submenu of the Debug menu The Debug Control menu Source Mode Ctrl T S Interleaved Mode Ctrl T I Assembly Mode Ctrl T A Toggle Debug Mode Ctrl F 11 Enable Interrupt Processing Ctrl T N Disable Interrupt Processing Ctrl T X 1 p Start Cycle Counte Aid Pause Cycle Counter Asd Reset Cycle Counter 194 Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary Debug Control commands Menu command Keystroke Description Source Mode Switches the debugger into Source Debugging mode where code 1 T i carl is stepped a statement at a time Switches the debugger into Interleaved Debugging mode where Ctrl T I code is stepped one instruction at a time and source code is intermixed with the generated assembly code Switches the debugger into Assembly Debugging mode where Assembly Mode Ctrl T A code is stepped one instruction at a time with a simple disassembly of memory Toggle Debug Ctrl F11 Toggles between Source Debugging and Interleaved Debugging Mode modes Enable Interrupt Ctrl T N Enables global interrupts in the processor by writing to the Processing appropriate register Disable Interrupt Ctrl T X Disables global interrupts in the processor by writing to the Processing appropriate register
36. 187 Menu command Keystroke Description Text Edit Displays the Text Edit tool bar Build Displays the Build tool bar Debug Displays the Debug tool bar Debug Location Displays the Debug Location tool bar Macro Recording Displays the Macro Recording tool bar HTML Browser Displays the HTML Browser tool bar Source Control Displays the Source Control tool bar File Comparison Displays the File Comparison tool bar Customize Displays the Toolbar Configuration dialog Search menu The Search menu provides commands to search in files The Search menu A Eind Ctrl F amp Find in Files Ctrl Shift F i Replace Ctrl H AI Replace in Files Ctrl Shift H fA Find Next F3 ffl Find Previous Shift F3 R Find Selected Text Ctrl F3 aft Find and Mark All Alt Shift F3 GoToLine Ctrl G Ctrl L Go To Mate Ctrl Yy Next Location F4 Ye Previous Location Shift F4 Next Function Ctrl PgDown 2 Previous Function Ctrl PgUp wa Case Sensitive Matching Ctrl K Ctrl F C fie Whole Word Matching Ctrl K Ctrl F W amp Regular Expression Matching Ctrl K Ctrl F x 188 Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary Search menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description Find CIR Searches documents for strings Find in Files Ctrl Shift F Searches for a string in multiple files Replace Replace Replaces text with different text Replace in Files Ctrl Shift H
37. 22 C library support 227 228 Chapter22 Byte queues Global interrupts control The CrossWorks tasking library provides functions that lock and unlock the global interrupt enables These functions can be used sparingly to provide a fast mutual exclusion facility for time critical uses You can disable interrupts using the ctl_global_interrupts_disable function call int en ctl_global_interrupts_disable This function returns the previous global interrupts enabled state You can enable interrupts using the ctl_global_interrupts_enable function call int en ctl_global_interrupts_enable This function returns the previous global interrupts enabled state You can restore the previous global interrupts enabled state you the ctl_global_interrupts_set function call int en ctl_global_interrupts_disable ctl_set_interrupts en Note that you can call a tasking library function that causes a task switch with global interrupts disabled The tasking library will ensure that when a task is scheduled that global interrupts are enabled You can re enable global interrupt enables from within an interrupt service routine using the ctl_global_interrupts_re_enable_from_isr function call in order to permit higher priority interrupts to occur A call to this function must be matched with a call to the ctl_global_interrupts_un_re_enable_from_isr function code of interrupt service routine ctl_global_interrupts_re_enable_from_isr
38. 344 Chapter 35 File formats Property Reference Build Properties Build Options These properties are applicable to a range of project types Property Type Save Name Ea ish Suppress the display of the startup Build Quietly Boolean build_quietly banners and informatio n messages If this option is set then any build_remove_ unreferenc Enable Unused Symbol Removal Boolean unused_symbo ed Is symbols will be removed from your program Descriptio Property Save Name Specifies whether or not to build_exclude_ exclude from_build the project fil e from the build Exclude From Build Boolean 346 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property File Type Chapter 36 Build Properties Type Enumeration Save Name file_type Descriptio Use this property to change the file type of the selected file If this property isn t set then the file extension is used to determine the file type Inthe case of an XML file the document type is used The options are C compile using a C compiler C compile using a C compiler Basic compile using a BASIC compiler Assembly assemble using an assembler Section Placement an XML linker section placement file Memory Map an XML memory map file Tanat 347 Descriptio n Property Save Name Specifies whether symbolic debug informatio nis generated build_debug_i Include Debug Inform
39. Bie p oep rp Section A program section Symbol browser columns You can choose to display the following fields against each symbol Value The value of the symbol For labels code and data symbols this will be the address of the symbol For absolute or symbolic equates this will be the value of the symbol Range The range of addresses the code or data item covers For code symbols that correspond to high level functions the range is the range of addresses used for that function s code For data addreses that correspond to high level static or extern 134 Chapter 12 CrossStudio Windows variables the range is the range of addresses used to store that data item These ranges are only available if the corresponding source file was compiled with debugging information turned on if no debugging information is available the range will simply be the first address of the function or data item Size The size in bytes that the code or data item covers The Size column is derived from the Range of the symbol if the symbol corresponds to a high level code or data item and has a range then Size is calculated as the difference between the start and end address of the range If a symbol has no range the size column is left blank Section The section in which the symbol is defined If the symbol is not defined within a section the Section column is left blank Type The high level type for the data or code item If the source
40. Changing display format When you select a variable in the main part of the display the display format button highlighted on the Locals window tool bar changes to show the item s display format To change the display format of a local variable do one of the following Right click the item to change From the popup menu select the format to display the item in or Click the item to change On the Locals window tool bar select the format to display the item in Modifying local variable values To modify the value of a local variable do one of the following Click the value of the local variable to modify Enter the new value for the local variable Prefix hexadecimal numbers with Ox binary numbers with 0b and octal numbers with 0 Right click the value of the local variable to modify From the popup menu select one of the operations to modify the local variable value Memory window The memory window shows the contents of the connected targets memory areas The memory window does not show the complete address space of the target and instead you must enter both the start address and the number of bytes for the memory window to display You can specify the start address and the size using Debug expressions page 65 which enables you to position the memory display at the start address of a variable or use a value ina register You can also specify if you want the expressions to be ev
41. Debugging workspace You can choose which windows to display in both these workspaces and manage them independently CrossStudio loads the active project into the target and places the breakpoints that you have set During loading the the Target Log in the Output Window shows its progress and any problems The program stops at our breakpoint and a yellow arrow indicates where the program is paused T elp main c include lt cross_studio_io h gt int factorial int gt void main void int i for i O i lt 10 i gt debug_printf Factorial of d is sa n i factorial i You can step over a statement by selecting Debug gt Step Over by typing F10 or by clicking the Step Over button on the Debug tool bar Right now we ll step into the next function factorial and trace its execution To step into factorial select Debug gt Step Into type F11 or click the Step Into button on the Debug tool bar Now the display changes to show that you have entered factorial and execution is paused there Help main c fact c ff CrossWorks Tutorial gt int factorial int n if n lt 1 You can also step to a specific statement using Debug gt Run To Cursor To restart your application to run to the next breakpoint use Debug gt Go Note that when single stepping you may step into a function that the debugger cannot locate source code for In this case the debugger will di
42. F conversions trailing zeros are not removed from the result As an extension when used in p conversion the results has prefixed to it For other conversions the behavior is undefined 0 For d i 0 u x X e BE F g and G conversions leading zeros following any indication of sign or base are used to pad to the field width rather than performing space padding except when converting an infinity or NaN If the 0 and flags both appear the 0 flag is ignored For d i o u x and xX conversions if a precision is specified the 0 flag is ignored For other conversions the behavior is undefined Length modifiers The length modifiers and their meanings are Poser boy toon sous hW Specifies that a following d i o u x or X conversion specifier applies to a signed char or unsigned char argument the argument will have been promoted according to the integer promotions but its value will be converted to signed char or unsigned char before printing or that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a signed char argument P Err ee ee ee Aa W Specifies that a following d i o u x or X conversion specifier applies to a short int or unsigned short int argument the arg
43. Infinity is Infinity ceilf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double cos double x cos returns the radian circular cosine of x If x gt 1049 errno is set to EDOM and cos returns HUGE_VAL If x is NaN cos returns x If x is Infinity cos returns NaN with invalid signal cos conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float cosf float x cosf returns the radian circular cosine of x If x gt 1049 errno is set to EDOM and cosf returns HUGE_VALF If x is NaN cosf returns x If x is Infinity cosf returns NaN with invalid signal cosf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double cosh double x cosh calculates the hyperbolic cosine of x Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 261 Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability coshf Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability exp Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability expt Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior 262 If x gt 709 782 errno is set to EDOM and cosh returns HUGE_VAL If x is Infinity Infinity or NaN cosh returns x If x gt 709 782 cosh returns Infinity or Infinity depending upon th
44. Memory 2 Ctrl T M 2 Memory 3 Ctrl T M 3 Memory 4 Ctrl T M 4 HHAAHHAHHHBAAASA WA Execution Trace EJ Execution Counts Other Windows commands Menu command Keystroke Description Breakpoints Ctrl Alt B eae Breakpoints window See Breakpoints window Activates the Call Stack window See Call stack window page Call Stack Ctrl Alt S 107 Chapter 16 Other Windows menu 185 Menu command Keystroke Description Locals Ctrl Alt L Activates the Locals window See Locals window page 114 Globals Ctrl Alt G Activates the Globals window See Globals window page 112 Threads Ctrl Alt D Activates the Threads window See Threads window page 120 Registers 1 Ctrl T R 1 o the first Register window See Register windows page Registers 2 Ctrl T R 2 Activates the second Register window See Register windows page 118 Registers 3 Ctrl T R 3 T the third Register window See Register windows page Registers 4 Ctrl T R 4 Activates the fourth Register window See Register windows page 118 Watch 1 Ctrl T W 1 Activates the first Watch window See Watch window page 122 Watch 2 Ctrl T W 2 the second Watch window See Watch window page Watch 3 Ctrl T W 3 Activates the third Watch window See Watch window page 122 Watch 4 Ctrl T W 4 n the fourth Watch window See Watch window page Memory 1 Ctrl T M 1 n the first Memory window See Memory window page Memory 2 C
45. Now click OK to add the file to the project The Project Explorer will show fact c with a shortcut arrow because the file is not in the project s home directory Rather than edit the file in the tutorial directory we ll take a copy of it and put it into the project home directory In the Project Explorer right click the fact c node From the popup menu click Import The shortcut arrow disappears from the fact c node which indicates that the file is now in our home directory We can open a file for editing by double clicking the node in the Project Explorer Double clicking fact c brings it into the code editor Help mainc facte CrossWorks Tutorial int fact int n if n lt 1 return 1 else return fact n 1 n Chapter2 Managing files in a project 17 18 Adding a new file to a project Our project isn t complete as fact c is only part of an application We ll add a new C file to the project which will contain the main function To add a new file to the project do the following From the Project menu click New File or On the Project Explorer tool bar click the Add New File tool button or In the Project Explorer right click the Tutorial node From the context menu click Add New File or Type Ctrl N The New File dialog appears Ensure that the C File c icon is selected In the Name edit box type main The dialog box will now look like this x Categor
46. Preview iti i review appear when it is printed 174 Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary Menu command Keystroke Description Opens the Recent Files menu which contains a list of files that have been recently opened with the most recently opened file first in the list You can configure the number of files retained in the Recent Files menu in the Environment Options dialog You can clear the list of recent files by selecting Clear Recent Files List from the Recent Files menu Recent Files Opens the Recent Projects menu which contains a list of projects that have been recently opened with the most recently opened project first in the list You can configure the number of projects retained in the Recent Projects menu in the Environment Options dialog You can clear the list of recent projects by selecting Clear Recent Projects List from the Recent Projects menu Recent Projects Saves all edited files closes the solution and exits CrossStudio For each new file without a name CrossStudio opens a file browser for you to choose where to save the file and what to call it Cancelling a save at any time will return you to CrossStudio without exiting Exit Alt F4 New menu The New menu provides commands to create files and folders The New menu jal New File HC New Blank File Ctrl K Ctrl N baa New Project G1 New Blank Solution Ctrl K Ctrl Shift N 35 New File Comparison Ctrl T F 5 New Folder
47. Registers 2 Ctrl T R 2 Activates the second Register window See Register windows page 118 Registers 3 Ctrl T R 3 rica the third Register window See Register windows page Registers 4 Ctrl T R 4 Activates the fourth Register window See Register windows page 118 Watch 1 Ctrl T W 1 Activates the first Watch window See Watch window page 122 Watch 2 Ctrl T W 2 Activates the second Watch window See Watch window page 122 Chapter 16 Debug Windows menu 197 Menu command Keystroke Description Watch 3 Ctrl T W 3 Activates the third Watch window See Watch window page 122 Watch 4 Ctrl T W 4 oo the fourth Watch window See Watch window page Memory 1 Ctrl T M 1 oe the first Memory window See Memory window page Memory 2 Ctrl T M 2 eer second Memory window See Memory window Memory 3 Ctrl T M 3 the third Memory window See Memory window page Memory 4 Ctrl T M 4 Activates the fourth Memory window See Memory window page 116 Activates the Execution Trace window See Trace window page Execution Trace 122 Execution Activates the Execution Counts window See Execution counts Counts window page 111 Tools menu The Tools menu provides setup and configuration of CrossStudio The Tools menu Source Navigator Symbol Browser Terminal Emulator r v vx Comparisons amp Disassemble Ctrl K Ctrl Options Tools menu commands Menu
48. Replaces text with different text in multiple files Find Next F3 Searches for the next occurrence of the specified text Find Previous Shift F3 Searches for the previous occurrence of the specified text lt Peata Ctrl F3 Searches for the next occurrence of the selection Find and Mark Alt Shift F3 Searches the document for all occurrences of the specified text and All marks them with bookmarks Go To L ine Ctrl G Ctrl L Moves the cursor to a specified line in the document Go To Mate Ctrl Moves the cursor to the bracket parenthesis or brace that matches the one at the cursor Next Location F4 Moves the cursor to the line containing the next error or tag Previous Shift F4 Moves the cursor to the line containing the previous error or tag Location Next Function Ctrl PgDn Moves the cursor to the declaration of the next function Ton Ctrl PgUp Moves the cursor to the declaration of the previous function Function ea Ctrl K Ctrl F C Enables or disables the case sensitivity of letters when searching Matching Whole Word Ctrl K Ctrl F y Matching w Enables or disables whole word matching when searching Regular r f i Expression Ctrl K Ctrl F X Enables or disables expression matching rather than plain text Matching matching Project menu The Project menu provides commands to manipulate the project Chapter 16 Project menu 189 The Project menu Fal Add New File E Add Existing File ba
49. Stack Size Undefined Mode Integer dk ai size Specifies the size of the User Syste m mode stack in bytes arm_linker_sta Stack Size User System Mode Integer ck size If set then warnings arm_linker_tre produced Treat Linker Warnings as Errors Boolean at_warnings_as_ by the _errors linker are treated as errors Use GCC floating arm_use_gcc_li point braries exception and rtti libraries Use GCC Libraries Boolean Specifies that multi threaded re entrant versions of the libraries should be linked in link_use_multi Use Multi Threaded Libraries Boolean _threaded_libr aries 378 Chapter 36 Property Reference Staging And Combining Project Properties Staging Options These properties are applicable to Staging project types Descriptio n Property Type Save Name Specifies the name the file will be copied to This property will have macro expansion applied to it stage_output_fi Output File Path String lepath Specifies the package file that the file will be added to This property will have macro expansion applied to it stage_package_ Package File Path String filepath Chapter 36 Staging And Combining Project Properties 379 Descriptio n Property Save Name Specifies the name thatthe file will have in the package This property will have macro expansion applied to it The dynamic macros StageOut putFilePat h and St
50. Timer support Programmable interrupt handling The CTL provides an optional set of functions for establishing C functions as interrupt service routines These functions are available on systems that have programmable interrupt controller hardware On systems that have fixed interrupt schemes you should use the facilities described in Low level interrupt handling page 235 when you create your interrupt service routines The function ctl_set_isr is used to establish a C function as an interrupt service routine You must enable an interrupt source using ctl_unmask_isr and you can disable an interrupt source using ctl_mask_isr The C function you have established is called when the interrupt occurs On entry to this function interrupts will still be disabled To allow interrupts of a higher priority to occur you should enable interrupts on entry by calling ctl_global_interrupts_re_enable_from_isr and disable interrupts on exit by calling ctl_global_interrupts_un_re_enable_from_isr Note that the pending interrupt flag in the interrupt controller hardware will be cleared by the CTL when your interrupt service routine returns Interrupt service routine example void isr void ctl_global_interrupts_re_enable_from_isr do interrupt handling stuff in here including clearing the source of the interrupt ctl_global_interrupts_un_re_enable_from_isr int main void ctl_set_isr 11 11 CTL_ISR_TRIGGER_FIXED isr
51. To paste text into current editor from clipboard do one of the following From the Edit menu click Paste or Type Ctrl V or Type Shift Ins To paste text into a new editor from clipboard do the following From the Edit menu click Clipboard then Paste As New Document Clearing the clipboard To clear the clipboard do the following From the Edit menu click Clipboard then Clear Clipboard Drag and drop editing You can select text and then drag and drop it in another location You can drag text to a different location in the same text editor or to another text editor Dragging and dropping text To drag and drop text do the following Select the text you want to move either with the mouse or with the keyboard Chapter 8 Drag and drop editing 75 76 Click on the highlighted text and keep the mouse button pressed Move the mouse cursor to where you want to place the text Release the mouse button to drop the text Dragging text moves it to the new location You can copy the text to a new location by holding down the Ctrl key while moving the text the mouse cursor changes to indicate a copy Pressing the Esc key while dragging text will cancel a drag and drop edit Enabling drag and drop editing To enable or disable drag and drop editing do the following From the Tools menu click Options Under Text Editor click General Inthe Editing section check Drag drop editing
52. You almost always want project dependencies to be independent of the configuration so the Project Dependencies dialog selects the Common configuration by default Making a project dependent upon another To make one project dependent upon another do the following From the Project menu click Dependencies to display the Project Dependencies dialog From the Project dropdown select the target project which depends upon other projects In the Depends Upon list box check the projects that the target project depends upon and uncheck the projects that it does not depend upon Some items in the Depends Upon list box may be disabled which indicates that if the project were checked a circular dependency would result Studio prevents you from constructing circular dependencies using the Project Dependencies dialog Finding the project build order To display the project build order do the following From the Project menu click Build Order to display the Project Dependencies dialog with the Build Order tab selected The projects build in order from top to bottom If your target supports loading of multiple projects then the Build Order also reflects the order in which projects are loaded onto the target Projects will load in order from top to bottom Generally libraries need to be loaded before applications that use them and you can ensure that this happens by making the application dependent upon the library With this
53. a dependency set the library gets built before the application and loaded before the application Chapter 4 Project dependencies and build order 53 54 Applications are deleted from a target in reverse build order and as such applications are removed before the libraries that they depend upon Project macros You can use macros to modify the way that the project system refers to files Macros are divided into four classes System Macros These are provided by the Studio application and are used to relay information from the environment such as paths to common directories Global Macros These macros are saved in the environment and are shared across all solutions and projects Typically you would set up paths to library or external items here Project Macros These macros are saved in the project file as project properties and can define macro values specific to the solution project they are defined in Build Macros These macros are generated by the project system whenever a build occurs System macros The following macro values are defined by CrossStudio itself LUET Description StudioDir The install directory of the CrossStudio application System macros can be used in build properties and also for environment settings Global macros To define a global macro Select Macros from the Project menu Click on the the Global tab Set the macro using the syntax name replacement text Project macro
54. and view your solution You can also edit and view the project file which contains your solution using the text editor this can be used for making large changes to the solution In this section Project system page 44 A summary of the features of the CrossStudio project system Creating a project page 46 Describes how to create a project and add it toa solution Adding existing files to a project page 47 Describes how to add existing files to a project how filters work and what folders are for Adding new files to a project page 48 Describes how create and add new files to a project Removing a file folder project or project link page 48 Describes how to remove items from a project Project properties page 49 Describes what properties are how they relate to a project and how to change them Project configurations page 52 Describes what project build configurations are to to create them and how to use themProject configurations page 52 Project dependencies and build order page 53 Describes project dependencies how to edit them and how they are used to define the order projects build in 44 Project macros page 54 Describes what project macros are and what they are used for Related sections Project explorer page 128 Describes the project explorer and how to use it Project property reference A complete reference to the properties used in the project system Project
55. appropriate memory location To change the location in memory of a particular stack the section should be moved to the required position in the section placement or memory map file There is a Stack Size linker project property for each stack you can modify this property in order to alter each stack maximum size For compatibility with earlier versions of CrossStudio you can also specify the stack size using the stack section s Size property in the section placement or memory map file Should your application not require one or more of these stacks to be set up you can remove the sections from the memory map file or set the size to 0 and remove the initialization code from the crt0 s file data Section The data section contains the initialized data If the run address is different from the load address as it would be in a FLASH based application in order to allow the program to run from reset the crt0 s startup code will copy the data section from the load address to the run address before calling the main entry point fast Section For performance reasons it is a common requirement with embedded systems to have critical code running from fast memory the fast section can be used to simplify this If the fast section s run address is different from the load address the crt0 s startup code will copy the fast section from the load address to the run address before calling the main entry point bss Section The bss section contains
56. are located in order to allow the debugger to find them If a program or libraries linked into the program are being run on a different machine to the one they were compiled on or if the source files have moved since the program was compiled the debugger will unable to find the source files In this situation the simplest way to help CrossStudio find the moved source files is to add the directory containing the source file to one of its source file search paths Alternatively if CrossStudio cannot find a source file it will prompt you for its location and record it s new location in its source file map Debug source file search paths The debug source file search paths can be used to help the debugger locate source files that are no longer in the same location as they were at compile time When a source file cannot be found the search path directories will be checked in turn to see if they contain the source file CrossStudio maintains two debug source file search paths Project session search path This path is set in the current project session and does not apply to all projects The global search path This path is set system wide and applies to all projects The project session search path is checked before the global search path 170 To view and edit the debug search paths From the Debug menu click Edit Search Paths Debug source file map If a source file cannot be found whilst debugging and the debugger has to prompt the u
57. argument with type pointer to double Some CrossWorks library variants do not support the 1 length modifier in order to reduce code and data space requirements please ensure that you have selected the correct library in the Printf Integer Support property of the project if you use this length modifier Poses bor teen say E IT Specifies that a following d i o u x X or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to long long int or unsigned long long int Some CrossWorks library variants do not support the 11 length modifier in order to reduce code and data space requirements please ensure that you have Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference selected the correct library in the Printf Integer Support property of the project if you use this length modifier If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified above the behavior is undefined Note that the C99 length modifiers j z t and L are not supported Conversion specifiers a Matches an optionally signed decimal integer whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtol function with the value 10 for the base argument The corresponding argument must be a pointer to signed integer i Matches an optionally signed integer whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtol function w
58. button or In the Call Stack window click the stack frame on the function to stop at when it is returned to Type F9 or In the Call Stack window right click the function to stop at when it is returned to From the popup menu click Toggle Breakpoint Execution counts window The Execution Counts window shows a list of source locations and the number of times those source locations have been executed This window is only available for targets that support the collection of jump trace information The count value displayed is the number of times the first instruction of the source code location has been executed The source locations displayed are target dependent they could represent each statement of the program or each jump target of the program If however the debugger is in intermixed or disassembly mode then the count values will be displayed on a per instruction basis The execution counts window is updated each time your program stops and the window is visible so if you have this window displayed then single stepping may be slower than usual Chapter 12 Execution counts window 111 The counts window can be sorted by any column counts source file or function name by clicking on the appropriate column header Double clicking on an entry will locate the source display to the appropriate source code location Globals window The globals window displays a list of all variables that are global
59. command Keystroke Description Source Navigator Displays the Source Navigator configuration menu Symbol Browser Displays the Symbol Browser configuration menu Terminal Emulator Displays the Terminal Emulator configuration menu Comparisons Displays the Comparisons menu 198 Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary Menu command Keystroke Description Disassemble Ctrl K Ctrl V Disassembles the selected project item Options Displays the Environment Options dialog Window menu The Window menu provides commands to control windows within CrossStudio The Window menu E New Horizontal Tab Group Ctrl F6 Cy Close Close all Ctrl Shift F4 Close All Unedited Windows Ctrl K Ctrl F4 Hide Shift Esc T Cascade E Tile Horizontally 0 Tile vertically G Next Ctrl Tab 4 Previous Ctrl Shift Tab Next Tab Group F6 Previous Tab Group Shift F6 K Tabbed Document Workspace Multiple Document Workspace Workspace Layouts Reverse Workspace Layout Customize Workspace Layout TE windows Ctrl Shift w Window menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description New Horizontal Splits the tab group in two at the active tab and creates two tab Tab Group ae groups in tabbed document workspace mode Close Ctrl F4 Closes the active document window Close All Ctrl Shift F4 Closes all document windows Close All Unedited Ctrl K Ctrl F4 Closes all document windows that have not been chang
60. configuration lt property name target_reset_script configuration RAM value Evaluator7T_ResetWithRamAtZero gt Alternatively you can include a property that will be shown to the user who can supply a value as part of the new project process lt property name linker_output_format gt The folders to be created are defined using the folder element The folder element must havea name attribute and can also havea filter attribute lt folder name Source Files filter c cpp cxx cc h s asm inc gt Chapter 35 File formats The files to be in the project are specified using the file element You can use build system Project macros page 54 to specify files that are in the CrossStudio installation directory Files will be copied to the project directory or just left as references based on the value of the expand attribute lt file name StudioDir source crt0 s expand no gt You can define the set of configurations that can be referred to in the the top level configurations element lt configurations gt lt configuration lt configurations gt This contains the set of all configurations that can be created when a project is created Each configuration is defined using a configuration element which can define the property values for that configuration lt configuration name Debug gt lt property name build_debug_information value Yes gt Chapter 35 Project Templates file format 343
61. data_run text vectors SRAM data_run Load No stack Chapter 11 Linking and Section placement The startup code will need to copy the contents of the data_load section to the data_run To enable this symbols for each section marking the start and end addresses are generated Each section will have a start symbol generated called __section name_start__ and an end symbol generated called __section name_end__ These symbols can be used to copy the sections from their load positions to their run positions For example the data_load section can be copied to the data_runsection using the following call to memcpy memcpy __data_run_start__ data_load_start__ data_load_end data_load_start__ If you create a section that needs to be copied then you will need to modify the startup code to do the initialisation Chapter 11 Code templates 97 98 Chapter 11 Linking and Section placement CrossStudio Windows This section is a reference to each of the windows in the CrossStudio environment In this section Breakpoints window page 102 Describes how to use the breakpoints window to manage breakpoints in a program Call stack window page 107 Descibes how to traverse the call stack to examine data and where function calls came from Clipboard ring window page 100 Describes how to use the clipboard ring to make complex cut and pastes easier Execution counts window page 111 and Trace window page 122
62. float x float y powf computes x raised to the power y If x lt 0 and y lt 0 errno page 247 is set to EDOM and powf returns HUGE_VALF If x lt 0 and y is not an integer value errno page 247 is set to EDOM and pow returns HUGE_VALF If y 0 powf returns 1 If y 1 powf returns x If y NaN powf returns NaN If x NaN and y is anything other than 0 powf returns NaN If x lt 1 or 1 lt x and y Infinity powf returns Infinity If x lt 1 or 1 lt x and y Infinity powf returns 0 If 1 lt x lt 1and y Infinity powf returns 0 If 1 lt x lt 1and y Infinity powf returns Infinity If x 1 or x 1 and y Infinity or y Infinity powf returns NaN If x 0 and y gt 0 and y lt gt NaN powf returns 0 If x 0 and y gt 0 and y lt gt NaN or y not an odd integer powf returns 0 If x 0 and y lt 0 and y lt gt NaN powf returns Infinity If x 0 and y gt 0 and y lt gt NaN or y not an odd integer powf returns Infinity If x 0 and y is an odd integer powf returns 0 If x Infinity and y gt 0 and y lt gt NaN powf returns Infinity Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 271 Portability scalbn Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability See Also scalbnf Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability See Also 272 If
63. foo Alternatively you can specify the section names of the code constant data and zero d data for an entire compliation unit using thesection options properties You can place the section into the section placement file using the memory map editor If you are modifying a section placement file that is supplied in the CrossWorks distribution you will need to import it into your project using the project explorer With the section placement file in the memory map editor you can right click on the memory segment in which you wish to place the section and select New Program Section from the context menu Right click on the new program section and select Properties from the context menu In the properties window you can specify the Name which should correspond to the name used when you created the section You will also need to specify the Input Sections property to match the name In the simplest case this will be the Name Using the context menu you can move the section within the segment to specify the order in which it should be placed Sections containing code and constant data should have their Load property set to be Yes There are sections that don t require any loading such as stack sections and zero d data sections these sections should have the Load property set to No For example initialised data is loaded into the section data_load and then copied into the data_run section ROOT FLASH data_load Load Yes Section To Run In
64. have been written had n been sufficiently large not counting the terminating null character or a negative value if an encoding error occurred Thus the null terminated output has been completely written if and only if the returned value is nonnegative and less than n vsnprintf is equivalent to snprintf with the variable argument list replaced by arg vsnprintf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 Formatted output control strings page 281 include lt stdio h gt int vsprintf char s const char format va_list arg Chapter 28 lt stdio h gt Input output functions 293 Description vsprintf writes to the string pointed to by s under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments are converted for output Before calling vsprintf arg must be initialized by the va_start macro and possibly subsequent va_arg calls vsprintf does not invoke the va_end macro A null character is written at the end of the characters written it is not counted as part of the returned value If there are insufficient arguments for the format the behavior is undefined If the format is exhausted while arguments remain the excess arguments are evaluated but are otherwise ignored If copying takes place between objects that overlap the behavior is undefined vsprintf returns number of characters transmitted not counting the terminating null or a negative value if an output or encoding
65. including space isprint conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt ctype h gt int ispunct int c Chapter 28 lt ctype h gt Character handling 245 Description Portability See also isspace Synopsis Description Portability See also isupper Synopsis Description Portability isxdigit Synopsis Description Portability tolower Synopsis 246 ispunct returns nonzero true for every printing character for which neither isspace nor isalnum is true ispunct conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 isspace page 246 isalnum page 244 include lt ctype h gt int isspace int c isspace returns nonzero true if and only if the value of the argument c is a standard white space character The standard white space characters are space form feed new line n carriage return r horizontal tab t and vertical tab v isspace conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 isblank page 244 include lt ctype h gt int isupper int c isupper returns nonzero true if and only if the value of the argument c is an uppercase letter A through Z isupper conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt ctype h gt int isxdigit int c isxdigit returns nonzero true if and only if the value of the argument c is a hexadecimal digit 0 throu
66. instruction that the Statement Shift F10 cursor is on Note that doing this may lead to unpredictable or incorrect execution of your program Displays the source line or instruction associated with the program Show Next A F Alt counter You can use this to show the execution point after Statement ee navigating through files Locate Chapter 16 Debug menu 193 Menu command Keystroke Description Opens a viewer on the variable or expression at the cursor position If no text is selected CrossStudio opens a viewer using the word at Quick Watch Shift F9 the cursor position as the expression If some text is selected CrossStudio opens a viewer using the selected text as the expression Adds the variable or expression at the cursor position to the last activated watch window If no text is selected CrossStudio adds Add To Watch Ctrl T Ctrl W the word at the cursor position to the watch window If some text is selected CrossStudio adds the selected text as the expression to the watch window Removes the variable or expression at the cursor position to the last activated watch window If no text is selected CrossStudio Remove From removes any expression matching the word at the cursor position Watch from the watch window If some text is selected CrossStudio removes any expression matching the selected text from the watch window Opens the Debug Search File dialog See Debug file search editor Edit Search Paths page
67. into a task and creates another task The main task ultimately will be the lowest priority task that switches the CPU into a power save mode when it is scheduled this satisfies the requirement of always having a task to execute and enables a simple power saving system to be implemented Chapter18 Tasks include lt ctl_api h gt void task1 void p task code on return task will be terminated static CTL_TASK_t mainTask taskiTask static unsigned task1Stack 64 int main void Turn myself into a task running at the highest priority ctl_task_init amp mainTask 255 main Initialise the stack of taski memset taskiStack Oxba sizeof taskiStack sizeof unsigned Make another task ready to run ctl_task_run amp taskiTask 1 taskl 0 taski sizeof taskiStack sizeof unsigned tasklStack 0 Now all the tasks have been created go to lowest priority ctl_task_set_priority amp mainTask 0 Main task if activated because task1 is suspended just enters low power mode and waits for taski to run again for example because an interrupt wakes it for Go into low power mode sleep Note that initially the main task is created at the highest priority whilst it creates the other tasks it then changes its priority to the lowest task This technique can be used when multiple tasks are created to enable all of the tasks to be created before they start to
68. item to change From the popup menu select the format to display the item in or Click the item to change On the Watch window tool bar select the format to display the item in The selected display format will then be used for all subsequent displays and will be recorded when the debug session stops For C programs the interpretation of pointer types can be changed by right clicking and selecting from the popup menu A pointer can be interpreted as anull terminated ASCII string an array an integer dereferenced Modifying watched values To modify the value of a local variable do one of the following Click the value of the local variable to modify Enter the new value for the local variable Prefix hexadecimal numbers with Ox binary numbers with 0b and octal numbers with 0 Right click the value of the local variable to modify From the popup menu select one of the operations to modify the variable s value Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows Expressions you can watch Help window The help viewer is located in the HTML viewer in the main tab window It displays the currently selected help topic Context sensitive help CrossStudio provides four types of context sensitive help with increasing detail Tool tips When you move your mouse pointer over a tool button and keep it still a small window appears with a very brief description of the tool button and its k
69. library there is only a single task but for multi tasking programs that do use the CrossWorks Tasking Library there may be any number of tasks CrossStudio updates the Call Stack window when you change the active task in the Threads window page 120 Call Stack user interface The Call Stack window is divided into a tool bar and the main breakpoint display Chapter 12 Call stack window 107 108 Call Stack tool bar Description W pe e Moves the cursor to where the call to the selected frame was made Sets the debugger context to the selected stack frame Moves the debugger context down one stack to the called function Moves the debugger context up one stack to the calling function Selects the fields to display for each entry in the call stack Sets the debugger context to the most recent stack frame and moves the cursor to the currently executing statement HE E BEA i Call Stack display The main part of the Call Stack window displays each unfinished function call active stack frame at the point that program execution halted The most recent stack frame is displayed at the bottom of the list and the eldest is displayed at the top of the list CrossStudio displays these icons to the left of each function name Icon Description Cc Indicates the stack frame of the current task gt Indicates the stack frame selected for the debugger context Indicates that a breakpoint is active
70. mbly by the C C compiler of the GCC are kept Instruction Set Enumeration Keep Assembly Boolean 356 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Name Type Save Name Deseriplle Specifies whether function calls are made using 32 bit Long Calls Boolean arm_long_calls absolute addresses Set this if you get relocation errors from the linker Specifies the name of the object file produced by the compiler assembler This property will have macro expansion applied to it build_object_fil Object File Name String e name Chapter 36 Compilation Properties 357 Descriptio n Property Name Save Name Specifies the optimizati on level to use for compliatio n The optionsare None Level x and Optimize gcc_optimizati For Size on_level Use None when developin g and debugging code Use Level 1 for release builds Don t use any of the other options Optimization Level Enumeration 358 Chapter 36 Property Reference Preprocessor Options Property Type Save Name Descriptio If set to Yes the System Include Directorie c_ignore_inclu sand User des Include Directorie s properties are ignored Ignore Includes Boolean Specifies one or more preprocess or definitions c_preprocessor P D fi TE i Li acer reprocessor Definitions String List _definitions Specifies one or more preprocess or undefinitio ns c_preprocessor P finiti ing Li en
71. menu item Changing Case The editor can change the case of selected areas of text To change case of selected text to uppercase Select text Select Edit gt Advanced gt Make Selection Uppercase menu item To change case of selected text to lowercase Select text Select Edit gt Advanced gt Make Selection Lowercase menu item Commenting The editor can add or remove language specific comment characters to areas of text To comment out an area of selected text Select text to comment out Select Edit gt Advanced gt Comment menu item To uncomment an area of selected text Select text to remove comment characters from Chapter8 Basic editing Select Edit gt Advanced gt Uncomment menu item Indentation The editor can increase or decrease the indentation level of an area of selected text To increase indentation of selected text Select text Select Edit gt Advanced gt Increase Line Indent menu item To decrease indentation of selected text Select text Select Edit gt Advanced gt Decrease Line Indent menu item Sorting The editor can sort areas of selected text in ascending or descending ASCII order To sort selected lines into ascending order Select text to sort Select Edit gt Advanced gt Sort Ascending menu item To sort selected lines into descending order Select text to sort Select Edit gt Advanced gt Sort Descending m
72. nor are the conversion specifiers a and A getchar Synopsis include lt stdio h gt int getchar void Description getchar reads a single character from the standard input stream If the stream is at end of file or a read error occurs getc returns EOF Portability getchar conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 288 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference gets Synopsis Description See also printf Synopsis Description Portability See Also putchar Synopsis Description include lt stdio h gt char gets char s gets reads characters from standard input into the array pointed to by s until end of file is encountered or a new line character is read Any new line character is discarded and a null character is written immediately after the last character read into the array gets returns s if successful If end of file is encountered and no characters have been read into the array the contents of the array remain unchanged and gets returns a null pointer If a read error occurs during the operation the array contents are indeterminate and gets returns a null pointer Portability gets conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 getchar page 288 include lt stdio h gt int printf const char format printf writes to the standard output stream using putchar under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies how
73. of a package v verbose V show verbose Chapter 32 mkpkg package creator 33 GCC Online Documentation 332 Chapter 33 GCC Online Documentation BINUTILS Online Documentation 334 Chapter 34 BINUTILS Online Documentation Part VI Appendices gt D 5 A MD N File formats Memory Map file format CrossStudio memory map files are structured using XML syntax to enable simple construction and parsing The first entry of the project file defines the XML document type which is used to validate the file format lt DOCTYPE Board_Memory_Definition_File gt The next entry is the Root element there can only be one Root element in a memory map file lt Root name My Board gt A Root element has a name attribute every element in a memory map file has a name attributes Names should be unique within a hierarchy level Within a Root element there are MemorySegment elements which represent memory regions within the memory map lt Root name My Board gt lt MemorySegment name Flash start 0x1000 size 0x200 access ReadOnly gt MemorySegment elements have the following attributes start The start address of the memory segment A 0x prefixed hexadecimal number size The size of the memory segment A Ox prefixed hexadecimal number 338 access The permissable access types of the memory segment One of ReadOnly Read Write WriteOnly None address_symbol A sym
74. of status bar Chapter 15 Dialogs Show full path in title bar Enables display in title bar of full file path of current file being edited Show dock window contents when moving Enables display of docking window contents when window is being moved Docking windows show toolbars Configures docking window toolbar display Projects location Specifies the default directory location of projects Environment Workspace The workspaces dialog provides the ability to specify which windows and toolbars are displayed in Full Screen Normal and Debug run states Text Editor General Vertical scroll bar Enables display of vertical scroll bar Horizontal scroll bar Enables display of horizontal scroll bar Indicator margin Enables display of indicator margin Margins enabled Enables margins Top margin Size in lines of top margin Left margin Size in columns of left margin Bottom margin Size in lines of bottom margin Right margin Size in columns of right margin Hide mouse cursor when typing Enables hiding of mouse cursor when typing Use I beam text cursor Enables I beam cursor when mouse is moved over editor Allow editing or read only files Enables the editing of read only files Insert mode style Specifies the caret style when the editor is in insert mode Overtype mode style Specifies the caret style when the editor is in overwrite mode Text Editor Indent File
75. or realloc or if the space has been deallocated by a call to free or realloc the behaviour is undefined free conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt stdlib h gt char itoa int val char buf int radix itoa converts val to a string in base radix and places the result in buf itoa returns buf as the result If radix is greater than 36 the result is undefined If val is negative and radix is 10 the string has a leading minus sign for all other values of radix value is considered unsigned and never has a leading minus sign itoa is an extension to the standard C library provided by CrossWorks C Itoa page 301 Iltoa page 300 ultoa page 309 ultoa page 309 utoa page 310 include lt stdlib h gt ldiv_t ldiv long int numer long int denom Idiv computes numer denom and numer denom in a single operation Idiv returns a structure of type Idiv_t page 299 comprising both the quotient and the remainder The structures contain the members quot the quotient and rem the remainder each of which has the same type as the arguments numer and denom If either part of the result cannot be represented the behavior is undefined Idiv conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Idiv_t page 299 include lt stdlib h gt typedef struct long int quot long int rem ldiv_t Chapter 28 lt stdlib h gt General utilities 299 Description Port
76. or until no more characters can be read A directive that is an ordinary character is executed by reading the next characters of the stream If any of those characters differ from the ones composing the directive the directive fails and the differing and subsequent characters remain unread Similarly if end of file an encoding error or a read error prevents a character from being read the directive fails Chapter 28 lt stdio h gt Input output functions 286 A directive that is a conversion specification defines a set of matching input sequences as described below for each specifier A conversion specification is executed in the following steps Input white space characters as specified by the isspace function are skipped LE Lod unless the specification includes a c or n specifier An input item is read from the stream unless the specification includes an n specifier An input item is defined as the longest sequence of input characters which does not exceed any specified field width and which is or is a prefix of a matching input sequence The first character if any after the input item remains unread If the length of the input item is zero the execution of the directive fails this condition is a matching failure unless end of file an encoding error or a read error prevented input from the stream in which case it is an input failure 1 Except in the case of a specifier the
77. page 279 va_end page 279 include lt stdarg h gt void va_copy va_list dest va_list src va_copy initializes dest as a copy of src as if the va_start macro had been applied to dest followed by the same sequence of uses of the va_arg macro as had previously been used to reach the present state of sre Neither the va_copy nor va_start macro shall be invoked to reinitialize dest without an intervening invocation of the va_end macro for the same dest va_copy conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 va_arg page 278 va_end page 279 va_end page 279 include lt stdarg h gt void va_end va_list ap va_end indicates a normal return from the function whose variable argument list ap was initialised by va_start or va_copy The va_end macro may modify ap so that it is no longer usable without being reinitialized by va_start or va_copy If there is no corresponding invocation of va_start or va_copy or if va_end is not invoked before the return the behavior is undefined va_end conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 va_arg page 278 va_copy page 279 va_end page 279 include lt stdarg h gt void va_start va_list ap parmN va_start initializes ap for subsequent use by the va_arg and va_end macros The parameter parmN is the identifier of the last fixed parameter in the variable parameter list in the function definition the one just before the Chapter 28 lt stdarg h gt Variable
78. r7 Oxcdcdcdcd re Oxcdcdcdcd r9 Oxcdcdcdcd r10 Oxcdcdcdcd r11 0x00000e74 r12 0x00000e78 sp r13 0x00000e64 lr r14 0x00000180 pc r15 0x000002a4 H cpsr 0x8 amp 00000df This register view is displaying the registers for the active processor mode You can also display the entire set of ARM registers to do this select CPU ALL from the Groups menu on the toolbar There are four register windows so you can open and display four sets of peripheral registers at the same time You can configure which registers and peripherals to display in the Registers windows individually As you single step the program the contents of the Registers window updates automatically and any change in a register value is highlighted in red Chapter2 Low level debugging 32 Debugging modes The debugger supports three modes of debug Source mode where the source code is displayed in a code editor Interleaved mode where the editor displays an interleaved listing of the currently located source code All single stepping is done an instruction at a time Assembly mode where a disassembly of the instructions around the currently located instruction is shown in the editor All single stepping is done an instruction at a time You have already seen debugging at the source level To single step at the assembly level from the Debug menu click Control then Interleaved Mode The editor window now interleaves the source
79. selected cuts and appends the current line to the clipboard Converts the selection to complete lines then cuts the selected text Cut Lines Num lines them to the clipboard If no text is selected cuts and appends the current line to the clipboard Converts the selection to complete lines then cuts the selected text na Lines Shift Num lines and appends them to the clipboard If no text is selected cuts ppend and appends the current line to the clipboard Cut Marked Cuts all bookmarked lines in the current document to the Lines clipboard Cut Marked Cuts all bookmarked lines in the current document and appends Lines Append them to the clipboard Copy Append Copies the selected text and appends it to the clipboard If no text is selected copies and appends the current line to the clipboard Converts the selection to complete lines then copies the selected Copy Lines text lines them to the clipboard If no text is selected copies and appends the current line to the clipboard Converts the selection to complete lines then copies the selected Copy Lines text lines and appends them to the clipboard If no text is selected ppend p copies and appends the current line to the clipboard Copy Marked Copies all bookmarked lines in the current document to the Lines clipboard Copy Marked Copies all bookmarked lines in the current document and appends Lines Append them to the clipboard 178 Chapter 16 Cross
80. sequence begins with a minus sign the value resulting from the conversion is negated A pointer to the final string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form no conversion is performed the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer strtof returns the converted value if any If no conversion could be performed zero is returned If the correct value is outside the range of representable values HUGE_VALF is returned according to the sign of the value if any and the value of the macro errno page 247 is stored in errno page 247 strtof conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 include lt stdlib h gt long int strtol const char nptr char endptr int base strtol converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to a long int representation Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Portability First strtol decomposes the input string into three parts an initial possibly empty sequence of white space characters as specified by isspace page 246 a subject sequence resembling an integer represented in some radix determined by the value of base and a final string of one or more unrecognized characters including the terminating null character of the input string strtol then attempts to convert the subject sequence to an integer and retur
81. springboard to start your application development A project is typically organized into groups where each group gathers together files that are related for example header files source files and documentation files can all have their own group in a project This section will take you through creating compiling and debugging a simple application using the build in simulator to prepare you for starting your own projects using CrossStudio In this section Creating a project page 14 Describes how to start a project select your target processor and other common options Managing files in a project page 16 Describes how to add existing and new files to a project and how to remove items from a project Setting project options page 19 Describes how to set options on project items and how project option inheritance works Building projects page 21 Describes how to build the project correct compilation and linkage errors and find out how big your applications are Exploring projects page 22 Describes how to use the Project Explorer Symbol Browser and Source Navigator to find out how much memory your project takes and navigate around the files that make up the project It also describes the similarities and differences between the three windows Using the debugger page 27 Describes the debugger and how to find and fix problems at a high level when executing your application 14 Low level debugging page 30 D
82. string to be found in the Find what input Enter the wildcard to use to filter the files in the In file types input Enter the folder to start search in the In folder input If the search will be case sensitive set the Match case option If the search will be for a whole word i e there will be whitespace the beginning or the end of line on either side of the string being searched for set the Match whole word option If the search string is a Regular expressions page 83 set the Use regular expression option Chapter8 Basic editing If the search will be carried out in the root folders sub folders set the Look in subfolders option The output of the search results can go into two separate panes If the output should go into the second pane select Output to pane 2 option a Click Find button Regular expressions The editor can search and replace test using regular expressions A regular expression is a string that uses special characters to describe and reference patterns of text The regular expression system used by the editor is modelled on Perls regexp language For more information on regular expressions see Mastering Regular Expressions Jeffrey E F Freidl ISBN 0596002890 Summary of special characters The following table summarizes the special characters that the CrossStudio editor supports d Match a numeric character D Match a non numeric character s Match a whitespace character
83. subsequent arguments are converted for output If there are insufficient arguments for the format the behavior is undefined If the format is exhausted while arguments remain the excess arguments are evaluated but are otherwise ignored printf returns number of characters transmitted or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred printf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 Formatted output control strings page 281 include lt stdio h gt int putchar int c putchar writes the character c to the standard output stream putchar returns the character written If a write error occurs putchar returns EOF Chapter 28 lt stdio h gt Input output functions 289 Portability See also puts Synopsis Description Portability See also scanf Synopsis Description Portability See Also snprintf Synopsis Description 290 putchar conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Customizing putchar puts page 290 include lt stdio h gt int puts const char s puts writes the string pointed to by s to the standard output stream using putchar and appends a new line character to the output The terminating null character is not written puts returns EOF if a write error occurs otherwise it returns a nonnegative value puts conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 putchar page 289 include lt stdio h
84. the current line Ctrl F3 Search up the document for currently selected text Ctrl Shift F3 Search down the document for the currently selected text Ctrl G Ctrl L Display the goto line dialog Delete the character to the left of the caret Backspace na position Delete the character to the right of the caret Delete ve position Ctrl Backspace Delete from the caret position to the start of the current word Ctrl Delete Delete from the caret position to the end of the current word Ctrl L Delete current line Ctrl Alt L Delete from the caret position to the end of the line AltsShift L Delete from the caret position to the next blank line Edit Either advance the caret to the next indent Advanced Tab position or if there is selected text indent each Increase Dinie line of the selection Indent s di Either move the caret to the previous indent Shift Tab position or if there is selected text unindent Decrease Line y A each line of the selection Indent Alt Right Indent the current line Alt Left Unindent the current line Ctrl S File Save Save the current file 402 Chapter 37 Code editor command summary Keystrokes Menu File Save As Description Save the current file under a different file name Ctrl Shift S File Save All Save all the files Ctrl P File Print Print the current file Edit Either change the current character to Adv
85. the following attributes name BitFields names should be valid C C identifier names i e alphanumeric and underscores but not starting with a number start The starting bit position 0 31 size The number of bits 1 31 You can refer to other memory map files using the Import element lt Root name My Board gt lt MemorySegment name External SRAM start 0x3000 size 0x200 Chapter 35 File formats access ReadOnly gt lt Import filename StudioDir targets Manufacturerl Processor1 xml gt The filename attribute is an absolute filename which is macro expanded using CrossWorks system macros An imported memory map file must be an XML file without a DOCTYPE The Processor element can be used to group several MemorySegment elements for this purpose lt Processor name Processorl gt lt MemorySegment name Internal SRAM start 0x1000 size 0x200 access ReadOnly gt lt MemorySegment name System start 0x2000 size 0x200 gt Section Placement file format CrossStudio section placment files are structured using XML syntax to enable simple construction and parsing The first entry of the project file defines the XML document type which is used to validate the file format lt DOCTYPE Linker_Placement_File gt The next entry is the Root element there can only be one Root element in a memory map file lt Root name Flash Placement gt A Root element has a name attribute every eleme
86. the main reset handler function and typically the main entry point of an executable The reset handler will usually carry out any target specific initialisation and then jump to the _startentry point In a C system the _start entry point is in the Startup code page 155 file undef_handler This is the default undefined instruction exception handler This has been declared as a weak symbol to allow the user to override the implementation swi_handler This is the default software interrupt exception handler This has been declared as a weak symbol to allow the user to override the implementation pabort_handler This is the default prefetch abort exception handler This has been declared as a weak symbol to allow the user to override the implementation dabort_handler This is the default data abort exception handler This has been declared as a weak symbol to allow the user to override the implementation irq_handler This is the default IRQ exception handler This has been declared as a weak symbol to allow the user to override the implementation Chapter14 ARM Target Support fiq_handler This is the default FIQ exception handler This has been declared as a weak symbol to allow the user to override the implementation Startup code The following section describes the role of the C runtime startup code crt0 s When you create a new project to produce an executable file using a target specific project template the crt0 s fi
87. the ones you want hidden You can also select the panels to display from the Tools gt Options dialog in the Environment gt More folder From the Tools menu click Options In the tree view Environment folder click More In the Status bar group check the panels that you want displayed and uncheck the ones you want hidden Hiding the status bar To hide the status bar do the following From the View menu click Status Bar From the status bar menu uncheck the Status Bar menu item or Right click on the status bar Chapter 3 The status bar 39 40 From the status bar menu uncheck the Status Bar menu item Showing the status bar To show the status bar do the following From the Tools menu click Options In the tree view Environment folder click More In the Status bar group check visible Showing or hiding the size grip You can choose to hide or display the size grip when the CrossStudio main window is not maximized the size grip is never shown in full screen mode or when maximized To do this From the View menu click Status Bar From the status bar menu uncheck the Size Grip menu item or Right click on the status bar From the status bar menu uncheck the Size Grip menu item You can also choose to hide or display the size grip from the Tools gt Options dialog in the Environment gt More folder From the Tools menu click Options
88. the zero initialized data The crt0 s startup code references the bss section and sets its contents to zero Heap The position and size of the heap is specified in the project s section placement or memory map file by the heap program section The crt0 s startup code references this section and initializes the heap To change the position of the heap the section should be moved to the required position in the section placement or memory map file Chapter14 ARM Target Support There is a Heap Size linker project property you can modify this property in order to alter the heap size For compatibility with earlier versions of CrossStudio you can also specify the heap size using the heap section s Size property in the section placement or memory map file Should your application not require the heap functions you can remove the heap section from the memory map file or set the size to 0 and remove the heap initialization code from the crt0 s file Memory map files CrossStudio s memory map files are XML files that are used for the following purposes Linking Memory map files are used by the linker to describe how to lay out a program in memory Loading Memory map files are used by the loader to check that a program being downloaded will actually fit into the target s memory Debugging Memory map files are used by the debugger to describe the location and types of memory a target has This information is used to de
89. to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt stdlib h gt int rand void rand computes a sequence of pseudo random integers in the range 0 to RAND_MAX rand returns the computed pseudo random integer rand conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 lt stdlib h gt General utilities 301 See Also RAND_MAX Synopsis Description Portability See Also realloc Synopsis Description Notes Portability srand Synopsis Description 302 srand page 302 RAND_MAX page 302 include lt stdlib h gt define RAND_MAX 32767 RAND_MAX expands to an integer constant expression that is the maximum value returned by rand RAND_MAX conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 rand page 301 srand page 302 include lt stdlib h gt void realloc void ptr size_t size realloc deallocates the old object pointed to by ptr and returns a pointer to a new object that has the size specified by size The contents of the new object is identical to that of the old object prior to deallocation up to the lesser of the new and old sizes Any bytes in the new object beyond the size of the old object have indeterminate values If ptr is a null pointer realloc behaves like malloc for the specified size If memory for the new object cannot be allocated the old object is not deallocated and its value is unchanged realloc function re
90. to the program The operations available on the entries in the globals window are the same as the Watch window page 122 except that variables cannot be added to or deleted from the globals window Globals window user interface The Globals window is divided into a tool bar and the main data display 112 Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows Globals tool bar Button Description x Displays the selected item in binary X Displays the selected item in octal Bing Displays the selected item in decimal Big Displays the selected item in hexadecimal EX Displays the selected item as a signed decimal g Displays the selected item as a character or Unicode character Sets the displayed range in the active memory window to the Be where the selected item is stored eal Sorts the global variables alphabetically by name a ny ner aa numerically by address or register Using the Globals window The Globals window shows the global variables of the application when the debugger is stopped When the program stops at a breakpoint or is stepped the Globals window automatically updates to show the active stack frame and new variable values Items that have changed since they that were previously displayed are highlighted in red Showing the Globals window To display the Globals window if it is hidden do one of the following From the View menu click Other Windows then Globals or From the Debug menu click Debu
91. trace entry will show the appropriate source display Some targets may provide timing information which will be displayed in the ticks column The trace window is updated each time the debugger stops when it is visible So single stepping is likely to be slower if you have this window displayed Watch window The watch window provides a means to evaluate expressions and display the values of those expressions Typically expressions are just the name of the variable to be displayed but can be considerably more complex see Debug expressions page 65 Note that the expressions are always evaluated when your program stops so the expression you are watching is the one that is in scope of the stopped program position Watch window user interface The Watch window is divided into a tool bar and the main data display Chapter 12 CrossStudio Windows Watch tool bar Button Description X Displays the selected item in binary X Displays the selected item in octal Bing Displays the selected item in decimal Big Displays the selected item in hexadecimal x Displays the selected item as a signed decimal g Displays the selected item as a character or Unicode character Sets the displayed range in the active memory window to the where the selected item is stored Sorts the global variables numerically by address or register al Sorts the global variables alphabetically by name 3 5 number default Using
92. type The type of file to configure the indent options for Insert spaces Enables insertion of spaces only Tab size Specifies the tab size in characters Keep tabs Enables use of tab characters Indent size Specifies the default indentation size in characters Auto indent Specifies indent mode Chapter 15 Environment options 171 172 Indent open brace Enables indentation of open braces when in smart indent mode Indent closing brace Enables indentation of closing braces when in smart indent mode Previous lines used for context Specifies the maximum number of lines prior to the current line to start parsing when in smart indent mode Build General Echo command lines to log Enables echoing of build command lines to output window Show build information in log Enables build avoidance logic to be displayed Debugger General Default data display Specifies the default data display format Source file search path Comma separated list of directories to use to locate source files Debugger Data Tips Limit data tip array display to n elements Specifies the maximum number of array elements to display when showing array data tips Display extended data tips Enables display of extended data tips Extended data tips display the data in a number of formats Extended data tip formats Specifies the formats to display when displaying extended data tips is enabled Chapter 15
93. x Infinity and y lt 0 and y lt gt NaN powf returns 0 If x Infinity powf returns powf 0 y If x lt 0 and x lt gt Infinity and y is a non integer powf returns NaN powf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double scalbn double x int exp scalbn multiplies a floating point number by an integral power of FLT_RADIX As floating point aritmetic conforms to IEC 60559 FLT_RADIX is 2 and scalbn is in this implementation identical to ldexp scalbn returns x FLT_RADIX exp If the result overflows errno is set to ERANGE and scalbn returns HUGE_VAL If x is Infinity or NaN scalbn returns x If the result overflows scalbn returns Infinity scalbn conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 Idexp page 268 include lt math h gt float scalbnf float x int exp scalbnf multiplies a floating point number by an integral power of FLT_RADIX As floating point aritmetic conforms to IEC 60559 FLT_RADIX is 2 and scalbnf is in this implementation identical to ldexpf scalbnf returns x FLT_RADIX exp If the result overflows errno page 247 is set to ERANGE and scalbnf returns HUGE_VALF If x is Infinity or NaN scalbnf returns x If the result overflows scalbnf returns Infinity scalbnf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Idexpf page 268 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference sin Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60
94. 04 Rowley Associates Ltd The user types the text hcl v myprog c and then presses the enter key which is assumed and is not shown the computer responds with the rest Standard syntactic metalanguage In a formal description of a computer language it is often convenient to use a more precise language than English This language description language is referred to as a metalanguage The metalanguage which will be used to describe the C language is that specified by British Standard 6154 A tutorial introduction to the standard syntactic metalanguage is available from the National Physical Laboratory The BS6154 standard syntactic metalanguage is similar in concept to many other metalanguages particularly those of the well known Backus Naur family It therefore suffices to give a very brief informal description here of the main points of BS6154 for more detail the standard itself should be consulted Terminal strings of the language those built up by rules of the language are enclosed in quotation marks Non terminal phrases are identified by names which may consist of several words When numbers are used in the text they will usually be decimal When we wish to make clear the base of a number the base is used as a subscript for example 15g is the number 15 in base eight and 13 in decimal 2F16 is the number 2F in hexadecimal and 47 in decimal A sequence of items may be built up by connecting the components with commas
95. 1 strncpy conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt char strpbrk const char s1 const char s2 strpbrk locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by s1 of any character from the string pointed to by s2 strpbrk returns a pointer to the character or a null pointer if no character from s2 occurs in s1 strpbrk conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt char strrchr const char s int c strrchr locates the last occurrence of c converted to a char in the string pointed to by s The terminating null character is considered to be part of the string strrchr returns a pointer to the character or a null pointer if c does not occur in the string Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Portability See also strspn Synopsis Description Portability strstr Synopsis Description Portability strtok Synopsis Description strrchr conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 strchr page 313 include lt string h gt size_t strspn const char s1 const char s2 strspn computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters from the string pointed to by s2 strspn returns the length of the segment strspn conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt ch
96. 10 Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability log10f Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability logf Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior include lt math h gt double log10 double x log10 computes the base 10 logarithm of x If x 0 errno is set to ERANGE and 1og10 returns HUGE_VAL If x lt 0 errno is set to EDOM and 1og10 returns HUGE_VAL If x lt 0 or x Infinity log10 returns NaN with signal If x 0 log10 returns Infinity with signal If x Infinity log10 returns Infinity If x NaN log10 returns x with no signal log10 conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float logl0f float x log10f computes the base 10 logarithm of x If x 0 errno is set to ERANGE and log10f returns HUGE_VALF If x lt 0 errno is set to EDOM and log10f returns HUGE_VALF If x lt 0 or x Infinity log10f returns NaN with signal If x 0 log10f returns Infinity with signal If x Infinity log10f returns Infinity If x NaN log10f returns x with no signal log10f conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float logf float x logf computes the base e logarithm of x If x 0 errno is set to ERANGE and logf returns HUGE_VALF If x lt 0 errno is set to ED
97. 3028 F302C F3030 F3034 F3038 F303C 0x07FFFFAO 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x0000003E 0x18860030 0x00400010 0x00801010 0x08018020 0x0A020040 0x0C028040 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x9C218360 i ae a i i dJa fe aed i i H ee i i i i ay A i i i SYSCFG CLKCON EXTACONO EXTACON1 EXTDBWIDTH ROMCONO ROMCON ROMCON ROMCON ROMCON ROMCON DRAMCONO DRAMCON1 DRAMCON2 DRAMCON3 REFEXTCON BUNE See TargetInterface Object for a description of the TargetInterface object which is used by the attach script to access the target hardware Stop Script The Stop Script property held in the Target project property groups is used to define a script that is executed when the target enters debug stopped state This can be after the application hits a breakpoint or when the Debug Break operation has been carried out The aim of the stop script is to carry out any target specific operations Chapter 14 ARM Target Support before the debugger starts accessing target memory This is particularly useful when debugging applications that have caches enabled as the script can disable and flush the caches enabling the debugger to access the current memory state See TargetInterface Object for a description of the TargetInterface object which is used by the stop script to access the target hardware Run Script This Run Script property held in the Ta
98. 512K FLASH 0x01800000 0x0187FFFF ROMCON2 256K SRAM FpPose see os seca aee ee sse ROMCON1 256K SRAM 0x00040000 0x0007FFFF 0x00000000 0x0003FFFF F ke K k H KEKE EEK ERE EEK KEKE He e ERE R RRR EKER RE REE REE EERE KER EKER REE ERK k kk k kkk kkk f Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe Targe tIn tin tin tIn tin tin tIn CIN tIn EIN CIN tIn CIN tIn tIn CIN Cer Cer Cer Cer Cer cer cer cer terface terface face face terface terface face face terface terface face face terface terface face face Attach Script The Attach Script property held in the Target project property group is used to define a script that is executed when the debugger first attaches to an application This can be after a download or reset before the program is run or after an attach to a running application The aim of the attach script is to carry out any target specific configuration before the debugger first attaches to the application being debugged pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord pokeWord 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F 0x03F F0000 F3000 F3008 F300C F3010 F3014 F3018 F301C F3020 F3024 F
99. 559 math library behavior Portability sinf Synopsis Description Fast math library special cases IEC 60559 math library special cases Portability sinh Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability include lt math h gt double sin double x sin returns the radian circular sine of x If x gt 1049 errno page 247 is set to EDOM and sin returns HUGE_VAL sin returns x if x is NaN sin returns NaN with invalid signal if x is Infinity sin conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float sinf float x sinf returns the radian circular sine of x If x gt 1049 errno page 247 is set to EDOM and sin returns HUGE_VALF sinf returns x if x is NaN sinf returns NaN with invalid signal if x is Infinity sinf conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double sinh double x sinh calculates the hyperbolic sine of x If x gt 709 782 errno page 247 is set to EDOM and sinh returns HUGE_VAL If x is Infinity Infinity or NaN sinh returns x If x gt 709 782 sinh returns Infinity or Infinity depending upon the sign of x sinh conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 273 sinhf Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library b
100. 6 Target Interface Properties 389 Descriptio n Property Save Name Specifies the number of bits to pad the JTAG data register before the data for the ARM processor being targeted As the width of arm_linker_jta the g pad_pre_dr BYPASS register is normally 1 bit this value is usually equal to the number of devices in the scan chain before the device being targeted JTAG Data Bits Before Integer 390 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Save Name Descriptio Specifies the number of bits to pad the JTAG instruction register with the BYPASS instruction all bits set after the instruction for the ARM processor being targeted This value should be the combined length of the instruction registers for all devices in the scan chain after the ARM processor being targeted arm_linker_jta JTAG Instruction Bits After Integer T Chapter 36 Target Interface Properties 391 Descriptio n Property Save Name Specifies the number of bits to pad the JTAG instruction register with the BYPASS instruction all bits set before the instruction for the ARM processor arm_linker_jta being g_pad_pre_ir targeted This value should be the combined length of the instruction registers for all devices in the scan chain before the ARM processor being targeted JTAG Instruction Bits Before Integer 392 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type S
101. 90 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference strerror Synopsis Description Portability strlen Synopsis Description Portability strncat Synopsis Description Portability strncmp Synopsis Description include lt string h gt char strerror int errnum strerror maps the number in errnum to a message string Typically the values for errnum come from errno but strerror can map any value of type int to a message strerror returns a pointer to the message string The program must not modify the returned message string The message may be overwritten by a subsequent call to strerror strerror conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt size_t strlen const char s strlen returns the length of the string pointed to by s that is the number of characters that precede the terminating null character strlen conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt char strncat char sl const char s2 size_t n strncat appends not more than n characters from the array pointed to by s2 to the end of the string pointed to by s1 A null character in s1 and characters that follow it are not appended The initial character of s2 overwrites the null character at the end of s1 A terminating null character is always appended to the result The behaviour of strncat is undefined if copying ta
102. 990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference SCHAR_MIN Synopsis Description Portability SCHAR_MAX Synopsis Description Portability SHRT_MIN Synopsis Description Portability SHRT_MAX Synopsis Description Portability UCHAR_MAX Synopsis Description Portability include lt limits h gt define SCHAR_MIN 127 SCHAR_MIN is the minimum value for an object of type signed char SCHAR_MIN conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define SCHAR_MAX 127 SCHAR_MAX is the maximum value for an object of type signed char SCHAR_MAX conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define SHRT_MIN 32767 1 SHRT_MIN is the minimum value for an object of type short int SHRT_MIN conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define SHRT_MAX 32767 SHRT_MAX is the maximum value for an object of type short int SHRT_MAX conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define UCHAR_MAX 255 UCHAR_MAX is the maximum value for an object of type unsigned char UCHAR_MAX conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 lt limits h gt Integer numerical limits 251 UINT_MAX Synopsis Description Portability ULLONG_MAX Synopsis Description
103. CTL_Executable_1 Build Solution Shift F7 Rebuild Solution Alt Shift F7 gt Clean Solution Batch Build Cancel Build Shift Pause ze Build Configurations jo Set Active Build Configuration gt Show Build Log Build menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description Build and Debug Builds the active project and starts debugging it Build and Run Builds the active project and runs it without debugging Compile file Ctrl F7 Compiles the selected project file Build project F7 Builds the active project Rebuild project Alt F7 Rebuilds the active project Clean project n all output and temporary files generated by the active Build Solution Shift F7 Builds all projects in the solution Rebuild Solution Alt Shift F7 Rebuilds all projects in the solution Removes all output and temporary files generated by all projects in Clean Solution the solution Batch Build Displays the Batch Build menu Cancel Build Shift Pause Stops any build in progress o T Displays the Build Configurations dialog Set Active Build Displays a menu which allows you to select the active build Configuration configuration Show Build Log Displays the Build Log in the Output window Chapter 16 Build menu 191 Debug menu The Debug menu provides commands to download run and debug your application You can find common debug actions as tool buttons on the Debug toolbar
104. CrossWorks for ARM User Guide Rowley Associates Limited Part Chapter 1 Part Il Chapter 2 Chapter 3 OON A UMN SW 13 14 16 19 21 22 27 30 35 35 36 37 Contents Preface Introduction What is CrossWorks What we don t tell you Activating your product Text conventions Standard syntactic metalanguage Requesting support and reporting problems CrossStudio Reference CrossStudio Tutorial Creating a project Managing files in a project Setting project options Building projects Exploring projects Using the debugger Low level debugging Overview CrossStudio standard layout The title bar The menu bar Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 38 40 43 44 46 47 48 48 49 52 53 54 57 57 58 60 61 61 62 65 67 67 68 70 72 74 75 76 77 79 81 83 85 88 89 The status bar The editing workspace Project management Project system Creating a project Adding existing files to a project Adding new files to a project Removing a file folder project or project link Project properties Project configurations Project dependencies and build order Project macros Building projects Build configurations and their uses Building your applications Correcting errors after building Source code control Configuring source control Using source control Debug expressions Basic editing Elements of the code ed
105. Ctrl I Ctrl Q Ctrl L Ctrl O Ctr y Ctrl Q Ctrl K Ctrl Q Ctri O Ctrl Q Ctri x Macros menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description Play Recording Ctrl Shift P Plays the last recorded keyboard macro Start Recording Ctrl Shift R Starts recording a keyboard macro Pause Resume Temporarily pauses a recording a keyboard macro If already Recording paused recommences recording of the keyboard macro Stops recording a keyboard macro and saves it Note that when Stop Recording recording has commenced the keystroke to stop recording the keyboard macro is Ctrl Shift R Cancel F Recording Cancels recording without changing the current keyboard macro Insert Hard Tab GeO Tab Inserts a tab character into the document even if the documents language settings inserts tabs as spaces If there is a selection parentheses are placed around the selection Declare Or Cast Po h to die and that expression is cast to type If there is no selection type is YP inserted into the document Insert keyword Inserts keyword into the document followed by a space Edit Selection menu The Edit gt Selection menu provides commands to operate on the selection Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary Tabify The Edit Selection menu WS Tabify 3 Untabify peni aA oO Aa Ka aA fs t ix Make Uppercase Make Lowercase Switch Case Comment Uncomment Align Left Center Align Right Sort Ascendin
106. Day amp Locate Topic t Previous T trl Alt Up 4 Next Topic Ctrl Alt Down Se Keyboard Map Ctrl K Ctrl M Help menu commands re aad F1 Displays online help for the focused GUI element me er Whats This Shift F1 Enters Whats This mode which provides a short description of each GUI element Contents Ctrl Alt F1 Activates the Contents window Index Ctrl Alt F2 Activates the Index window Search Ctrl Alt F3 Activates the Search window Tip of the Day Activates the Tip of the Day window Locate Topic Locates the help page displayed by the browser in the Contents window Previous Topic Ctrl Alt Up Moves to the previous topic in the Contents window and updates the browser Next Topic Ctrl Alt Down Moves to the next topic in the Contents window and updates the browser Keyboard Map Ctrl K Ctrl M Displays the Keyboard Map dialog Quick Links Displays the Quick Links menu which contains useful shortcuts to the online manual Favorites Displays the web pages from the Favorites window About Displays information on CrossStudio the license agreement and CrossStudio activation status Chapter 16 Help menu 201 202 Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary Part Ill Tasking Library Tutorial This section describes the CrossWorks Tasking Library which will be subsequently referred to as the CTL The CTL provides a multi priority preemptive task switching and synchronisation facility
107. Dialogs 16 CrossStudio menu summary The following sections describe each menu and each menu item File menu The File menu provides commands to create open and close files and to print them The File menu New gt Open Ctrl 0 Open With Close Ctrl F4 Gl Open Solution Ctrl Shift O m Close Solution Ge Save wait c Ctrl S Save wait c As Ctrl K A Save wait c And Close Ctrl K D Gi Save all Ctrl Shift 5 Save All and Exit Alt Shift F4 RA Page Setup A Print Preview amp Print Ctrl P Recent Files Recent Projects gt Exit File commands Menu command Keystroke Description New Displays the New menu Open Ctrl O Opens an existing file for editing Open With Displays the Open With menu Close Ctrl F4 Closes the active editor If you have made changes to the file CrossStudio prompts you to save the file Opens an existing solution for editing If you already have an open solution CrossStudio will close it before opening the new solution and if you have made changes to any of the files in your solution you are prompted to save each of them Open Solution Ctrl Shift O Closes the current solution If you have made changes to any of the Close Soluti ee perenne aes files in your solution you are prompted to save each of them Saves the contents of the active editor to disk If it is a new file Save file Ctrl S without a name CrossStudio opens a
108. File The files are added to the folder without using any filter matching Chapter 4 Adding existing files to a project 47 Adding new files to a project You can add new files to a project in a number of ways Adding a new file to the active project To add new files to the active project do one of the following From the Project menu click Add New File or On the Project Explorer tool bar click the Add New File button or Type Ctrl N Adding a new file to any project To add a new file to a project without making it active do one of the following In the Project Explorer right click on the project to add a new file to From the popup menu select Add New File When adding a new file CrossStudio displays the New File dialog from which you can choose the type of file to add its file name and where it will be stored Once created the new file is added to the folder whose filter matches the extension of the newly added file If no filter matches the newly added file extension the new file is placed underneath the project node Adding a new file to a specific folder To add new files directly to a folder bypassing the file filter do the following In the Project Explorer right click on the folder to add a new file to From the popup menu select Add New File The new file is added to the folder without using any filter matching Removing a file folder project or project link You
109. IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double fabs double x fabs computes the absolute value of the floating point number x fabs conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float fabs float x fabsf computes the absolute value of the floating point number x fabsf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double floor double x floor computes the largest integer value not greater than x floor 0 isO floor Infinity is Infinity floor conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double floor double x floorf computes the largest integer value not greater than x floorf 0 isO floorf Infinity is Infinity floorf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 263 fmax Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability fmaxf Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability fmin Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability fminf Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability 264 include lt math h gt double fmax double x double y fmax determines the minimum of x and y fmax NaN y is y fmax x NaN is x fmax conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99
110. In the New Project dialog select the type of project you wish to create and where it will be placed Click OK Adding existing files to a project You can add existing files to a project in a number of ways Adding existing files to the active project You can add one or more files to the active project quickly using the standard Open File dialog To add existing files to the active project do one of the following From the Project menu select Add Existing File or On the Project Explorer tool bar click the Add Existing File button or Type Ctrl D Using the Open File dialog navigate to the directory containing the existing files select the ones to add to the project then click OK The selected files are added to the folders whose filter matches the extension of the each of the files If no filter matches a files extension the file is placed underneath the project node Adding existing files to any project To add existing files a project without making it active In the Project Explorer right click on the project to add a new file to From the popup menu select Add Existing File The procedure for adding existing files is the same as above Adding existing files to a specific folder To add existing files directly to a folder bypassing the file filter do the following In the Project Explorer right click on the folder to add a new file to From the popup menu select Add Existing
111. In the tree view Environment folder click More In the Status bar group check or uncheck the Size grip item The editing workspace The main area of CrossStudio is the editing workspace This area contains files that are being edited by any of the editors in CrossStudio and also the online help system s HTML browser You can organize the windows in the editing area either into tabs or as separate windows In Tabbed Document Workspace mode only one window is visible at any one time and each of the tabs displays the files name In Multiple Document Workspace mode many overlapping windows are displayed in the editing area By default CrossStudio starts in Tabbed Document Workspace mode but you can change at any time between the two Chapter3 Overview Changing to Multiple Document Workspace mode To change to Multiple Document Workspace mode do the following From the Window menu click Multiple Document Workspace Changing to Tabbed Document Workspace mode To change to Tabbed Document Workspace mode do the following From the Window menu click Tabbed Document Workspace The document mode is remembered between invocations of CrossStudio Chapter 3 The editing workspace 41 42 Chapter3 Overview Project management CrossWorks has a project system that enables you to manage the source files and build instructions of your solution The Project Explorer and the Properties Window are the standard ways to edit
112. Name Parallel Port Description The parallel port connection to use to connect to target Value Lptl Name Parallel Port Sharing Description Specifies whether sharing of the parallel port with other device drivers or programs is permitted Value No You can modify a target property using the setprop option For example the following command line would set the parallel port interfaced used to Ipt2 crossload target parport setprop Parallel Port Ltp2 Chapter 30 lt string h gt String handling 325 326 Chapter 30 CrossLoad 31 mkhdr C C header file generator The command line program mkhdr can generate a C C header file from a crossworks memory map file For each register definition in the memory map file a corresponding define is generated in the header file The define is named the same as the register name and is defined as a volatile pointer to the address The type of the pointer is derived from the size of the register A 4 byte register will generate an unsigned long pointer A 2 byte register will generate an unsigned short pointer A 1 byte register will generate an unsigned char pointer If a register definition in the memory map file has bitfields then defines are generated for each bitfield Each bitfield will have two defines generated one representing the mask and one defining the start bit position The bitfield define names are formed by prepending the register name to the bit
113. OM and logf returns HUGE_VALF Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 269 IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability modf Synopsis Description Portability modff Synopsis Description Portability pow Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior 270 If x lt 0 or x Infinity logf returns NaN with signal If x 0 logf returns Infinity with signal If x Infinity logf returns Infinity If x NaN logf returns x with no signal logf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double modf double x double iptr modf breaks x into integral and fractional parts each of which has the same type and sign as x The integral part in floating point format is stored in the object pointed to by iptr and modf returns the signed fractional part of x modf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float modff float x double iptr modff breaks x into integral and fractional parts each of which has the same type and sign as x The integral part in floating point format is stored in the object pointed to by iptr and modff returns the signed fractional part of x modff conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double pow double x double y pow computes x raised to the power y If x lt 0 and y
114. SO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 lt limits h gt Integer numerical limits 249 INT_MAX Synopsis Description Portability LLONG_MIN Synopsis Description Portability LLONG_MAX Synopsis Description Portability LONG_MIN Synopsis Description Portability LONG MAX Synopsis Description Portability 250 include lt limits h gt define INT_MAX processor dependent value INT_MAX is the maximum value for an object of type int For processors where an integer is held in 16 bits INT_MAX is 32767 and for processors where an integer is held in 32 bits INT_MAX is 2147483647 INT_MAX conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define LLONG_MIN 9223372036854775807 1 LLONG_MIN is the minimum value for an object of type long long int LLONG_MIN conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define LLONG_MAX 9223372036854775807 1 LLONG_MAX is the maximum value for an object of type long long int LLONG_MAX conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define LONG_MIN 2147483647 1 LONG_MIN is the minimum value for an object of type long int LONG_MIN conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define LONG_MAX 2147483647 LONG_MAX is the maximum value for an object of type long int LONG_MAX conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1
115. Studio menu summary Menu command Keystroke Description Paste to New Alt Shift V Creates a new unnamed document and pastes the clipboard into it Document Clear Clipboard Clears the contents of the clipboard Clipboard Ring menu The Clipboard Ring menu provides commands to edit files using the clipboard ring The Clipboard Ring menu G Paste Al Ctrl R Ctrl Cycle Clipboard Ring Ctrl Shift amp Clear Clipboard Ring Ctrl R Del Clipboard Ring Ctrl Alt C Clipboard Ring menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description Paste All Ctrl Shift X Pastes the contents of the clipboard ring to the current document pee pee Num Cycles the clipboard ring Ring eae spe Ctrl R Del Clears the contents of the clipboard ring Displays the Clipboard Ring window See Clipboard ring window Clipboard Ring Ctrl Alt C page 100 Macros menu The Macros menu provides additional commands to record and play key sequences as well as provide some fixed macros Chapter 16 Clipboard Ring menu 179 180 The Macros menu jg Play Recording G Start Recording G Stop Recording Gx Cancel Recording Insert Hard Tab Declare Or Cast To Declare Or Cast To Declare Or Cast To int Declare Or Cast To Declare Or Cast To Insert const Insert volatile Insert extern Ctrl Shift P Ctrl Shift R Gy Pause Resume Recording Ctrl Q Tab Ctrl Q Ctrl C t Ctrl Q Ctri 5 Ctrl Q
116. TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float fmod float x float y fmod computes the floating point remainder of x divided by y fmod returns the value x ny for some integer n such that if y is nonzero the result has the same sign as x and magnitude less than the magnitude of y If y 0 fmodf returns zero and errno is set to EDOM fmodf 0 y is 0 for y not zero fmodf Infinity y is NaN and raises the invalid floating point exception fmodf x 0 is NaN and raises the invalid floating point exception fmodf x Infinity is x for x not infinite fmodf conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double frexp double x int exp frexp breaks a floating point number into a normalized fraction and an integral power of 2 Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 265 IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability frexpf Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability hypot Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability hypotf Synopsis 266 frexp stores power of two in the int object pointed to by exp and returns the value x such that x has a magnitude in the interval 1 2 1 or zero and value equals x 2 exp If x is zero both parts of the result are zero If x is Infinity or NaN frexp returns x and stores zero into the int object pointed to by exp fre
117. Targets window page 139 Describes how to manage your target connections by creating new ones editing existing ones and deleteing unused ones Clipboard ring window The code editor captures all Cut and Copy operations and stores the the cut or copied item on the Clipboard Ring The clipboard ring stores the last 20 text items that were cut or copied but you can configure the maximum number of items stored on the clipboard ring using the environment options dialog The clipboard ring is an excellent place to store scraps of text when you re working with many documents and need to cut and paste between them Showing the clipboard ring To display the Clipboard Ring window if it is hidden do one of the following From the View menu click Clipboard Ring or Type Ctrl Alt C or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Clipboard Ring Pasting an item by cycling the clipboard ring To paste from the clipboard ring do the following Cut or copy some text from your code The last item you cut or copy into the clipboard ring is the current item for pasting Type Ctrl Shift V to paste the clipboard ring s current item to the current document Chapter 12 CrossStudio Windows Repeatedly type Ctrl Shift V to cycle through the entries in the clipboard ring until you get to the one you want to permanently paste in the document Each time you press Ctrl Shift V the edito
118. The optionsare Software VFP and ARM Floating Point Format Enumeration arm_fp_format Software FPA The C libraries supplied with CrossWor ks for ARM are compiled for Software VFP Specifies that the ARM code generated can be called either from ARM or Thumb code ARM Thumb interworking Boolean arm_interwork Settingthis property to No may result in smaller code sizes when compiling for architectur e v4T 354 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Name Type Save Name Deseripile Specifies the endiannes s to build for The options are Little and Big Note that the value of this property at project level will be used to automatica lly set the Endian target property whena project is download ed or attached to Enable additional checking toensureC programs conform to the ISO C99 standard and C programs conform to the 1998 ISO C standard Endian Enumeration arm_endian c_enforce_ansi Enforce ANSI Checking Boolean checking Chapter 36 Compilation Properties 355 Descriptio n Works around a problem in the C C compiler of the GCC when using long calls from Thumb code Property Name Save Name arm_module_c Generate Static call_via_rX Boolean all_vias Specifies the instruction set the compiler arm_instructio should n_set generate code for The options are ARM or Thumb When set the assembly code arm_keep_asse generated
119. _allocate function If the memory block cannot be allocated then zero is returned unsigned block ctl_memory_area_allocate amp m1 if block block has been allocated else no block has been allocated When you have finished with a memory block you should return it to the memory area from which it was allocated using ctl_memory_area_free ctl_memory_area_free amp ml block 238 Chapter 27 Memory areas Part IV Library Reference ox a Q a lt ad MD e MD a D gt A MD Standard C Library Reference CrossWorks C provides a library that conforms to the ANSI and ISO standards for C In this section lt assert h gt Diagnostics page 242 Describes the diagnostic facilities which you can build into your application lt ctype h gt Character handling page 243 Describes the character classification and manipulation functions lt errno h gt Errors page 247 Describes the macros and error values returned by the C library lt limits h gt Integer numerical limits page 248 Describes the macros that define the extreme values of underlying C types lt math h gt Mathematics page 252 Describes the mathematical functions provided by the C library lt setjmp h gt Non local jumps page 276 Describes the non local goto capabilities of the C library lt stdarg h gt Variable arguments page 278 Describes the way in which variable parameter lists are acces
120. _assert const char const char int There is no default implementation of __assert Keeping __assert out of the library means that you can can customize its behaviour without rebuilding the library Importantnotes The assert macro is redefined according to the current state of NDEBUG each time that lt assert h gt is included Portability assert conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 242 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference lt ctype h gt Character handling The header lt ctype h gt declares several functions useful for classifying and mapping characters The character argument to all functions is an int the value of which is representable as an unsigned char or is the value of the macro EOF If the argument has any other value the behavior is undefined Only the C locale is supported by CrossWorks C and thus the functions in this header are not affected by locales The term printing character refers to a member of a set of characters each of which occupies one printing position on a display device the term control character refers to a member of a set of characters that are not printing characters All letters and digits are printing characters Classification functions isalnum Is character alphanumeric isalpha Is character alphabetic isblank Is character a space or horizontal tab iscntrl Is character a control character isdigit Is character a decimal digit isgraph Is charac
121. _post amp ml void 45 1 ctl_get_current_time 1000 0 timeout occured This example uses a timeout and tests the return result to see if the timeout occured If you want to post a message and you dont want to block e g from an interrupt service routine you can use the ctl_message_queue_post_nb function if ctl_message_queue_post_nb amp m1 void 45 0 queue is full This example tests the return result to see if the post failed You can receive a message with an optional timeout using the ctl_message_queue_receive function void msg ctl_message_queue_receive amp ml amp msg 0 0 This example receives the oldest message in the message queue if ctl_message_queue_receive amp m1 amp msg 1 ctl_get_current_time 1000 0 timeout occured This example uses a timeout and tests the return result to see if the timeout occured If you want to receive a message and you dont want to block e g from an interrupt service routine you can use the ctl_message_queue_receive_nb function if ctl_message_queue_receive_nb amp m1 amp msg 0 queue is empty The following example illustrates usage of a message queue to implement the producer consumer problem CTL_MESSAGE_QUEUE_t m1 void queue 20 void task1 void ctl_message_queue_post amp ml void i 0 0 Chapter21 Message queues void task2 void void msg ctl_message_queue_r
122. a Add New Project E Add Existing Project Eg New Folde Source Control A oo Dependencies Build Order z ao Macros Set Active Project Properties Ctrl N Ctrl D Ctrl Shift N Ctrl Shift D Alt Return Project menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description Add New File Ctrl N Adds a new file to the active project Add Existing File Ctrl D Adds an existing file to the active project ade New Ctrl Shift N Adds a new project to the solution Project oer song Ctrl Shift D Adds a link to an existing project to the solution New Folder Adds a new folder to the current project or folder Source Control Displays the Source Control menu Dependencies Displays the Project Dependencies dialog to alter project dependencies Build Order Displays the Build Order tab of the Project Dependencies dialog Displays the Project Macros dialog to edit the macros defined in a Macros t project Set Active Project Displays a menu which allows you to select the active project Properties Alt Return Displays the Project Properties dialog for the current project item Build menu The Build menu provides commands to build projects and solutions 190 Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary The Build menu Build and Debug Build and Run a Compile wait c Ctrl F7 g a Build CTL_Executable_1 F7 Rebuild CTL_Executable_1 Alt F7 Clean
123. ability See also lldiv Synopsis Description Portability See also lldiv_t Synopsis Description Portability See also lltoa Synopsis Description 300 Idiv_t stores the quotient and remainder returned by Idiv page 299 Idiv_t conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Idiv page 299 include lt stdlib h gt lldiv_t 1lldiv long long int numer long long int denom Ildiv computes numer denom and numer denom in a single operation Ildiv returns a structure of type Ildiv_t page 300 comprising both the quotient and the remainder The structures contain the members quot the quotient and rem the remainder each of which has the same type as the arguments numer and denom If either part of the result cannot be represented the behavior is undefined Ildiv conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 Ildiv_t page 300 include lt stdlib h gt typedef struct long long int quot long long int rem lldiv_t Ildiv_t stores the quotient and remainder returned by Ildiv page 300 Ildiv_t conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Ildiv page 300 include lt stdlib h gt char lltoa long long val char buf int radix Iltoa converts val to a string in base radix and places the result in buf lltoa returns buf as the result If radix is greater than 36 the result is undefined Chapter 28 Standard C Library Refere
124. acters as specified by isspace page 246 a subject sequence resembling an integer represented in some radix determined by the value of base and a final string of one or more unrecognized characters including the terminating null character of the input string strtoull then attempts to convert the subject sequence to an integer and return the result When converting no integer suffix such as U L UL LL ULL is allowed If the value of base is zero the expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign followed by an integer constant If the value of base is between 2 and 36 inclusive the expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign followed by a sequence of letters and digits representing an integer with the radix specified by base The letters from a or A through z or Z represent the values 10 through 35 only letters and digits whose ascribed values are less than that of base are permitted If the value of base is 16 the characters 0x or 0X may optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits following the optional sign Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference ultoa Portability Synopsis Description ultoa Portability See Also Synopsis The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string starting with the first non white space character that is of the expected form The subject sequence contains no characters i
125. aluated each time the memory window is updated or you can re evaluate them yourself with the press of a button Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows Memory window updates The memory window updates each time the debugger locates to source code So it will update each time your program stops on a breakpoint or single step and whenever you traverse the call stack If any values that were previously displayed have changed they will be displayed in red Display formats You can set the memory window to display 8 bit 16 bit and 32 bit values that are formatted as hexadecimal decimal unsigned decimal octal or binary You can also change the number of columns that are displayed You can change a value in the memory window by clicking the value to change and editing it as a text field Note that when you modify memory values you need to prefix hexadecimal numbers with 0x binary numbers with Ob and octal numbers with go Saving memory contents You can save the displayed contents of the memory window to a file in various formats Alternatively you can export the contents to a binary editor to work on them Saving memory You can save the displayed memory values as a binary file Motorola S record file Intel hex file or a Texas Instruments TXT file To save the current state of memory to a file do the following Selects the start address and number of bytes to save by editing the Start Address and Size fields in the memory
126. an disable all breakpoints within a group as a whole To disable all breakpoints in a group do the following In the Breakpoints window right click the breakpoint group to disable From the popup menu click Disable Breakpoint Group Managing all breakpoints You can delete enable or disable all breakpoints Deleting all breakpoints To delete all breakpoints do one of the following From the Debug menu click Breakpoints then Delete All Breakpoints Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows or From the Breakpoints window tool bar click the Delete All Breakpoints button or Type Ctrl Shift F9 Enabling all breakpoints To enable all breakpoints do one of the following From the Debug menu click Breakpoints then Enable All Breakpoints or From the Breakpoints window tool bar click the Enable All Breakpoints button Disabling all breakpoints To disable all breakpoints do one of the following From the Debug menu click Breakpoints then Disable All Breakpoints or From the Breakpoints window tool bar click the Disable All Breakpoints button Call stack window The Call Stack window displays the list of function calls stack frames that are active at the point that program execution halted When program execution halts CrossStudio populates the call stack window from the active currently executing task For simple single threaded applications not using the CrossWorks tasking
127. an infinity is converted to inf A double argument representing a NaN is converted to nan The G conversion specifier produces INF or NAN instead of inf or nan respectively Some CrossWorks library variants do not support the and F conversion specifiers in order to reduce code and data space requirements please ensure that you have selected the correct library in the Printf Floating Point Support property of the project if you use these conversion specifiers ce The argument is converted to an unsigned char and the resulting character is written s The argument is be a pointer to the initial element of an array of character type Characters from the array are written up to but not including the terminating null character If the precision is specified no more than that many characters are written If the precision is not specified or is greater than the size of the array the array must contain a null character Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference p The argument is a pointer to void The value of the pointer is converted in the same format as the x conversion specifier with a fixed precision of 2 sizeof void w The argument is a pointer to signed integer into which is written the number of characters written to the output stream so far by the call to the formatting function No argument is converted but one is consumed If the conversion spe
128. an2f NaN x is NaN atan2f 0 anything but NaN is 0 atan2f 0 anything but NaN is atan2f anything but 0 and NaN 0 is 2 atan2f anything but Infinity and NaN Infinity is 0 atan2f anything but Infinity and NaN Infinity is atan2f Infinity Infinity is 4 atan2f Infinity Infinity is 3 4 atan2f Infinity anything but 0 NaN and Infinity is 2 atan2f conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 atanf page 259 include lt math h gt float atanf float x atanf returns the principal value in radians of the inverse circular tangent of x The principal value lies in the interval 34 34 radians atanf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double atanh double x atanh returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of x If x 1 errno is set to EDOM and atanh returns HUGE_VAL If x gt 1 atanh returns NaN with signal If x is NaN atanh returns that NaN with no signal If x is 1 atanh returns Infinity with signal If x is 1 atanh returns Infinity with signal atanh conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 259 atanhf Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability cbrt Synopsis Description Portability cbrtf Synopsis Description Portability ceil Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math libr
129. anced Ctrl U lowercase or if there is selected text change all Make Selection aa i characters within the selection to lowercase Lowercase Edit Either change the current character to Advanced uppercase or if there is selected text change ohne Make Selection all characters within the selection to Uppercase uppercase If there is a selection adds a comment to the Edit i Ctrl Advanced start of each selected line If there is no selection adds a comment to the start of the Comment line the caret is on If there is a selection removes any comment Pau from the start of each selected line If there is Ctrl Shift Advanced lecti fro th Uncomment no selection removes any comment fro the start of the line the caret is on Coi Edit Undo Undoes the last operation Alt Backspace Ctrl Y Edit Redo Redoes the last operation Insert Enable or disable overwrite mode Swap the current word with the previous Ctrl Shift T word or if there is no previous word the next word AltsShift T Swap the current line with the previous line or if there is no previous line the next line Ctrl Alt J Appends the line below the caret onto the end of the current line Edit Advanced Replace whitespace with appropriate tabs Tabify within the current selection Selection Edit Advance d Remove tabs from within the current selection Untabify Selection Chapter 37 ARM Simulator Properties 403 Keystrokes Menu Des
130. and associate the required hardware priority to their execution On systems that have fixed interrupt schemes functions are provided that enable you to create interrupt service routines that co operate with the CTL Tasks can synchronize with interrupt service routines using either event sets semaphores or message queues Interrupt service routines are allowed to set and clear events in an event set to signal a semphore and to do a non blocking post to a message queue Interrupt service routines cannot wait for events wait for a semaphore or use blocking message queue functions Memory block allocation support The CTL provides a simple memory block allocator that can be used in situations where the standard C malloc and free functions are either too slow or may block the calling task C library support The CTL provides a task specific errno as well as exclusion mechanisms to enable usage of malloc free functions in a multi tasking envrionment Chapter 17 Timer support 207 208 Chapter17 Overview 18 Tasks Each task has a corresponding task structure that holds information such as the priority and the saved register state You allocate task structures by declaring them as C variables CTL_TASK_t mainTask You create the first task using the ctl_task_init function which turns the main program into a task This function takes a pointer to the task structure that represents the main task its priority and a name as parameters
131. and when the function i returns to its caller These icons can be overlaid to show for instance the debugger context and a breakpoint on the same stack frame Showing the Call Stack window To display the Call Stack window if it is hidden do one of the following From the View menu click Other Windows then Call Stack or From the Debug menu click Debug Windows then Call Stack or Type Ctrl Alt S Chapter 12 CrossStudio Windows or On the Debug tool bar click the Call Stack icon or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Other Windows then Breakpoints Configuring the Call Stack window Each entry in the Call Stack window displays the function name and additionally parameter names types and values You can configure the Call Stack to display varying amounts of information for each stack frame By default CrossStudio displays all information Displaying or hiding parameter names To display or hide the name of each parameter in the call stack do the following On the Call Stack tool bar click the Fields button From the dropdown menu check or uncheck Parameter Names Displaying or hiding parameter values To display or hide the value of each parameter in the call stack do the following On the Call Stack tool bar click the Fields button From the dropdown menu check or uncheck Parameter Valuev Displaying or
132. applications There are two variants of the Wiggler one with 20 pins and one with 14 pins and both are supported Connection properties Parallel Port The parallel port connection to use to connect to the target Chapter13 Target interfaces Parallel Port Address The base address of the currently connected parallel port if available Parallel Port Sharing If set to Yes parallel port may be shared with other device drivers and programs If set to No the target interface will demand exclusive use of the port Interface properties Version The device driver version information Current device properties Device Type The JTAG device ID of the currently connected device JTAG properties Identify Target Specifies whether the target should be identified on connection Use this setting with caution as setting this to No disables the checks carried out on connection that the JTAG interface is functioning correctly and may make an malfunctioning JTAG connection appear as if it is working Invert nSRST Specifies whether the nSRST signal should be inverted JTAG Clock Divider The value to divide the JTAG clock frequency This feature allows the JTAG clock frequency to be reduced in order to allow CrossStudio to communicate with boards with unreliable target interfaces Loader properties Erase All If set to Yes all of the target s FLASH memory will be erased prior to downloading the application This can b
133. applied to both Library and Executable project types within the solution Executable File Name String Chapter 36 Linker Properties 373 Property Save Name Descriptio n Generate Map File Boolean linker_map_fil e Specifies whether or nota linker map file is generated Heap Size Integer arm_linker_hea p_size Specifies the heap size in bytes to be used by the applicatio n You must define this if your program uses malloc Include Standard Libraries Boolean link_include_st andard_librarie s Specifies whether the standard libraries should be linked into the applicatio n Include Startup Code Boolean link_include_st artup_code Specifies whether the standard C startup code is linked into the applicatio n 374 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Save Name Descriptio Specifies a list of symbols that should always be included by the linker in the output file even if those symbols aren t directly used by the applicatio n linker_keep_sy Keep Symbols String List mbols Specifies the library variant the linker should use The options are ARM or Thumb arm_library_in Library Instruction Set Enumeration sw ction set Chapter 36 Linker Properties 375 Descriptio n Property Save Name The name of the file containing the memory map descriptio n This property will have macro expansion applie
134. ar strstr const char sl const char s2 strstr locates the first occurrence in the string pointed to by s1 of the sequence of characters excluding the terminating null character in the string pointed to by s2 strstr returns a pointer to the located string or a null pointer if the string is not found If s2 points to a string with zero length strstr returns s1 strstr conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt char strtok char s1 const char s2 A sequence of calls to strtok breaks the string pointed to by s1 into a sequence of tokens each of which is delimited by a character from the string pointed to by s2 The first call in the sequence has a non null first argument subsequent calls in the sequence have a null first argument The separator string pointed to by s2 may be different from call to call The first call in the sequence searches the string pointed to by s1 for the first character that is not contained in the current separator string pointed to by s2 If no such character is found then there are no tokens in the string pointed to by s1 and strtok returns a null pointer If such a character is found it is the start of the first token Chapter 28 lt string h gt String handling 317 strtok then searches from there for a character that is contained in the current separator string If no such character is found the current token extends to the end of the string point
135. arguments 279 280 Portability See also The behaviour of va_start and va_arg is undefined if the parameter parmN is declared with the register storage class with a function or array type or with a type that is not compatible with the type that results after application of the default argument promotions va_start must be invoked before any access to the unnamed arguments va_start and va_copy must not be be invoked to reinitialize ap without an intervening invocation of the va_end macro for the same ap va_start conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 va_arg page 278 va_copy page 279 va_end page 279 lt stdio h gt Input output functions The header file lt stdio h gt defines a number of functions to format and output values The format control directives that for the formatted input and output function are described in Formatted input control strings page 285 and Formatted output control strings page 281 Character and string I O functions getchar Read a character from standard input gets Read a string from standard input putchar Write a character to standard output puts Write a string to standard output Formatted input functions scanf Read formatted text from standard input sscanf Read formatted text from a string Read formatted text from standard input using a va_list vscanf argument vsscanf Read formatted text from a string using a va_list argument
136. arting with the first digit is interpreted as an integer constant If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is between 2 and 36 it is used as the base for conversion Chapter 28 lt stdlib h gt General utilities 307 308 Portability strtoull Synopsis Description If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign the value resulting from the conversion is negated A pointer to the final string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form no conversion is performed the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer strtoul returns the converted value if any If no conversion could be performed zero is returned If the correct value is outside the range of representable values LONG_MAX page 250 or ULONG_MAX page 252 is returned according to the sign of the value if any and the value of the macro ERANGE is stored in errno page 247 strtoul conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt stdlib h gt unsigned long long int strtoull const char nptr char endptr int base strtoull converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to a long int representation First strtoull decomposes the input string into three parts an initial possibly empty sequence of white space char
137. ary behavior Portability 260 include lt math h gt float atanhf float val atanhf returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of val If x 1 errno is set to EDOM and atanhf returns HUGE_VALF If val gt 1 atanhf returns NaN with signal If val is NaN atanhf returns that NaN with no signal If val is 1 atanhf returns Infinity with signal If val is 1 atanhf returns Infinity with signal atanhf conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double cbrt double x cbrt computes the cube root of x cbrt conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float cbrt float x cbrtf computes the cube root of x cbrtf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double ceil double x ceil computes the smallest integer value not less than x ceil 0 is 0 ceil Infinity is Infinity ceil conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference ceilf Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability cos Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability cosf Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability cosh Synopsis Description include lt math h gt float ceilf float x ceilf computes the smallest integer value not less than x ceilf 0 is 0 ceilf
138. asin returns NaN with invalid signal asin conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float asinf float val asinf returns the principal value in radians of the inverse circular sine of val The principal value lies in the interval PI 2 PI 2 radians If x gt 1 errno is set to EDOM and asinf returns HUGE_VALF If x is NaN asinf returns x If x gt 1 asinf returns NaN with invalid signal asinf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double asinh double x asinh returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of x asinh conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float asinhf float x asinhf returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of x asinhf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 257 atan Synopsis Description Portability See Also atan2 Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability See Also atan2f Synopsis Description 258 include lt math h gt double atan double x atan returns the principal value in radians of the inverse circular tangent of x The principal value lies in the interval 34 34 radians atan conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 atan2 page 258 include lt math h gt double atan2 double y double x atan2 retur
139. ation Boolean nf ormation Defines macro values that are used for filename generation Each macro is defined as name val ue Macros String List macros Specifies a relative path from the project directory to the intermedia build_intermed te file iate_directory directory This property will have macro expansion applied to it Intermediate Directory String 348 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Save Name Descriptio Specifies a relative path from the project directory to the output file directory This property will have macro expansion applied to it build_output_ Output Directory String directory Specifies the project directory This canbe either relative to project_directo the ry solution directory recomme nded or can be an absolute directory Project Directory String Specifies the type of project to build The options are Executabl e Library Object file Staging Combinin g and Externally Built Executabl e Project Type Enumeration project_type Chapter 36 Build Properties 349 350 Descriptio Property Save Name Specifies whether the display build_suppress ofwarning _warnings messages should be suppresse Suppress Warnings Boolean Specifies whether build_treat_wa warning Treat Warnings as Errors Boolean rnings_as_erro messages rs should be treated as errors Compilation Properties These properti
140. ave Name Descriptio The name of the loader s first program section This value is used to tell CrossStudi o the area of memory occupied by the loader in order to prevent it from being overwritte n during download This parameter is only required if the program being download ed overwrites the loader arm_target_loa First Loader Program Section String der_first_progr am_section Chapter 36 Target Interface Properties 393 Descriptio n Property Save Name The name of the loader s last program section This parameter is only required if arm_target_loa the Last Loader Program Section String der_last_progr program am_section section specified by First Loader Program Section is not the loader s only program section 394 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Loader File Path Type Filename Save Name arm_target_flas h_loader_file_p ath Descriptio Specifies the file path of the loader programto use This is typically used by targetsthat support FLASH download It is not possible to download programs to FLASH using only the ARM s debug interface A loader program therefore has to be download ed and run from RAM prior to the download of the main applicatio n Chapter 36 Target Interface Properties 395 Descriptio n Property Save Name Specifies the communic ation mechanis m used to communic ate with the loader Options
141. ay the list of supported target interfaces listtargets solutionfile List all of the supported target interfaces Specify the CrossWorks solution file to use projectname Specify the name of the project to use configconfiguration Specify the build configuration to use filetypefiletype Specify the type of the file to download By default CrossLoad will attempt to detect the file type you should use this option if CrossLoad cannot determine the file type or to override the detection and force the type Use the listfiletypes option to display the list of supported file types listfiletypes List all of the supported file types setpropproperty value Set the target property property to value listprops List the target properties of the target specified by the target option 324 noverify Do not carry out verification of download nodownload Do not carry out download just verify nodisconnect Do not disconnect the target interface when finished help Display the command line options verbose Produce verbose output quiet Do not output any progress messages In order to carry out a download or verify CrossLoad needs to know what target interface to use The supported target interfaces vary between systems to produce a list of the currently supported target interfaces use the listtargets option crossload listtargets This command will produce a lis
142. ber with E instead of e introducing the exponent The exponent always contains at least two digits and only as many more digits as necessary to represent the exponent If the value is zero the exponent is zero A double argument representing an infinity is converted to inf A double argument representing a NaN is converted to nan The E conversion specifier produces INF or NAN instead of inf or nan respectively Some CrossWorks library variants do not support the and F conversion specifiers in order to reduce code and data space requirements please ensure that you have selected the correct library in the Printf Floating Point Support property of the project if you use these conversion specifiers bgt A g A double argument representing a floating point number is converted in style or e or in style F or e in the case of a G conversion specifier with the precision specifying the number of significant digits If the precision is zero it is taken as one The style used depends on the value converted style e or E is used only if the exponent resulting from such a conversion is less than 4 or greater than or equal to the precision Trailing zeros are removed from the fractional portion of the result unless the flag is specified a decimal point character appears only if itis followed by a digit A double argument representing
143. between objects that overlap the behavior is undefined sprintf returns number of characters transmitted not counting the terminating null or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred sprintf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Formatted output control strings page 281 include lt stdio h gt int sscanf const char s const char format Chapter 28 lt stdio h gt Input output functions 291 Description sscanf reads input from the string s under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input sequences and how they are to be converted for assignment using subsequent arguments as pointers to the objects to receive the converted input If there are insufficient arguments for the format the behavior is undefined If the format is exhausted while arguments remain the excess arguments are evaluated but are otherwise ignored sscanf returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion Otherwise sscanf returns the number of input items assigned which can be fewer than provided for or even zero in the event of an early matching failure Portability sscanf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 SeeAlso Formatted input control strings page 285 vprintft Synopsis include lt stdio h gt int vprintf const char format va_list arg Description wprintf writes to the standard output
144. bolic name for the start address size_symbol A symbolic name for the size A MemorySegment can contain Register and RegisterGroup elements RegisterGroup elements are used to group sets of registers Register elements are used to define peripheral registers lt Root name My Board gt lt MemorySegment name System start 0x2000 size 0x200 gt lt RegisterGroup name Peripherall start 0x2100 size 0x10 gt lt Register name Registerl start 0x8 size 4 gt Register group elements have the same attributes as MemorySegment elements Register elements have the following attributes name Register names should be valid C C identifier names i e alphanumeric and underscores but not starting with a number start The start address of the memory segment Either a 0x prefixed hexadecimal number or a prefixed offset from the enclosing element s start address size The size of the register in bytes either 1 2 or 4 access The same as the MemorySegment element _address_symbol The same as the MemorySegment element A Register element can contain BitField elements that represent bits within a peripheral register lt Root name My Board gt lt MemorySegment name System start 0x2000 size 0x200 gt lt RegisterGroup name Peripherall start 0x2100 size 0x10 gt lt Register name Registerl start 0x8 size 4 gt lt BitField name Bits_0_to_3 start 0 size 4 gt BitField elements have
145. bookmark set in the document If there is no previous bookmark the cursor is moved to the last bookmark in the document Moving to the first or last bookmark To move to the first bookmark set in a document do one of the following From the Edit menu click Bookmarks then First Bookmark or Type Ctrl K F2 To move to the last bookmark set in a document do one of the following From the Edit menu click Bookmarks then Last Bookmark or Type Ctrl K Shift F2 Removing bookmarks To remove a temporary bookmark move to the line you want to remove the bookmark from and do one of the following On the Text Edit tool bar click the Toggle Bookmark button or From the Edit menu click Bookmarks then Toggle Bookmark or Chapter 8 Bookmarks 71 72 Type Ctrl F2 The temporary bookmark symbol disappears whoch shows that the bookmark has been removed To remove all temporary bookmarks set in a document do the following From the Edit menu click Bookmarks then Clear All Bookmarks or Type Ctrl Shift F2 Changing text Whether you are editing code HTML or plain text the Code Editor is just line many other text editors or word processors For code that is part of a project the projects programming language support provides syntax highlighting colorization indentation and so on Adding text The editor has two text input modes Insertion mode As text is entere
146. browser to provide an at a glance overview of your application as a whole You can use the symbol browser to drill down to see how big each part of your program is and where it s placed The way that symbols are sorted and grouped is saved between runs When you rebuild an application CrossStudio automatically updates the symbol browser so you can see the effect your changes are making to the memory layout of your program Symbol browser user interface The symbol browser is divided into a tool bar and the main symbol display Chapter 12 Symbol browser Symbol Browser tool bar Button Description a Groups symbols by source file name a Groups symbols by the section that they are defined in i Moves the cursor to the statement that defined the symbol Chooses the columns to display in the symbol browser Symbol Browser display The main part of the symbol browser displays each symbol both external and static that the is linked into an application CrossStudio displays these icons to the left of each symbol Icon Description Private Equate A private symbol that is not defined relative to a section Public Equate A public symbol that is not defined relative to a section Private Function A private function symbol Public Function A public function symbol Private Label A private data symbol defined relative to a section Public Label A public data symbol defined relative to a section
147. by s memset returns the value of s memset conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt char strcat char s1 const char s2 strcat appends a copy of the string pointed to by s2 including the terminating null character to the end of the string pointed to by s1 The initial character of s2 overwrites the null character at the end of s1 The behaviour of strcat is undefined if copying takes place between objects that overlap strcat returns the value of s1 strcat conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt char strchr const char s int c strchr locates the first occurrence of c converted to a char in the string pointed to by s The terminating null character is considered to be part of the string strchr returns a pointer to the located character or a null pointer if c does not occur in the string strchr conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 memchr page 311 include lt string h gt int stremp const char sl const char s2 Chapter 28 lt string h gt String handling 313 Description Portability strcoll Synopsis Description Portability strcpy Synopsis Description Portability strcspn Synopsis Description Portability 314 strcmp compares the string pointed to by s1 to the string pointed to by s2 stremp returns an integer greater than equal to o
148. c functions sin Compute sine of a double sinf Compute sine of a float cos Compute cosine of a double cosf Compute cosine of a float tan Compute tangent of a double tanf Compute tangent of a float Inverse trigonometric functions asin Compute inverse sine of a double asinf Compute inverse sine of a float acos Compute inverse cosine of a double acosf Compute inverse coside of a float atan Compute inverse tangent of a double atanf Compute inverse tangent of a float atan2 Compute inverse tangent of a ratio of doubles atan2f Compute inverse tangent of a ratio of floats Inverse hyperbolic functions acosh Compute inverse hyperbolic cosine of a double acoshf Compute inverse hyperbolic cosine of a float asinh Compute inverse hyperbolic sine of a double asinhf Compute inverse hyperbolic sine of a float atanh Compute inverse hyperbolic tangent of a double atanhf Compute inverse hyperbolic tangent of a float Hyperbolic functions cosh Compute hyperbolic cosine of a double Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 253 coshf Compute hyperbolic cosine of a float sinh Compute hyperbolic sine of a double sinhf Compute hyperbolic sine of a float tanh Compute hyperbolic tangent of a double tanhf Compute hyperbolic tangent of a float Exponential and logarithmic functions exp Compute exponential of a double expf Compute exponentia
149. can remove whole projects folders or files from a project or you can remove a project from a solution using the Remove tool button on the project explorer s toolbar Removing a source file from a project does not remove it from disk Removing an item To remove an item from the solution do one of the following Chapter4 Project management Click on the project item to remove from the Project Explorer tree view On the Project Explorer toolbar click the Remove button or type Delete or Right click on the the project item to remove from the Project Explorer tree view From the popup menu click Remove Project properties For solutions projects folders and files properties can be defined that are used by the project system in the build process These property values can be viewed and modified using the properties window in conjunction with the project explorer As you select an item in the project explorer the properties window will list the set of properties that are applicable Some properties are only applicable to a given item type For example linker properties are only applicable to a project that builds an executable file However other properties can be applied either at the file project or solution project node For example a compiler property can be applied to the solution project or individual file By setting properties at the solution level you enable all files of the solution to use this prope
150. ce and starts Ctrl F5 Debugging running the program without the debugger Continues running the program until a breakpoint is hit or a Go F5 pee hes hardware exception is raised Break Ctrl Stops the program running and returns control to the debugger Stop Shift F5 Stops debugging the program and returns to the editing workspace Rest rt Ctrl Shift F5 Resets the selected target interface and starts debugging the program Steps into the next statement or instruction and enters C functions Step Into F11 and assembly language subroutines If a breakpoint is hit when stepping the debugger immediately stops at that breakpoint Steps over the next statement or instruction without entering C Step Over F10 functions and assembly language subroutines If a breakpoint is hit when stepping the debugger immediately stops at that breakpoint Steps out of the function or subroutine by executing up to the Step Out Shift F11 instruction following the call to the current function or subroutine If a breakpoint is hit when stepping the debugger immediately stops at that breakpoint Runs the program to the statement or instruction the cursor is at If Run To Cursor Ctrl F10 a breakpoint is hit when stepping the debugger immediately stops at that breakpoint Auto Step Alt F11 Animates program execution by running the program and updates all debugger windows after each statement or instruction executed Set Next Sets the program counter to the statement or
151. cide how to debug the program for example whether to set hardware or software breakpoints on particular memory location There are two types of memory map files Board Memory Definition This type of memory map file is used to describe a target s memory segments If no Linker Placement file is defined a Board Memory Definition file can also describe how program sections should be laid out within the memory segments Linker Placement This type of memory map file is used to describe how program sections should be laid out in the memory segments described by a Board Memory Definition file As the Linker Placement file does not describe memory addresses only the mapping between memory segments and program sections it can be used as a general means to describe the layout of a program not tied to a particular target A Linker Placementfile does not need to be used if the Board Memory Definitionfile contains all the program section information Memory map files can be viewed and edited using CrossStudio s memory map editor for more information see Memory map editor page 89 To use a memory map file simply add the memory file to a project You may have configuration specific memory map files by excluding memory map files from configurations as you would any other source file Chapter 14 Memory map files 157 Project configurations The following table describes the default set of Project configurations page 52 when you create a n
152. cification includes any flags a field width or a precision the behavior is undefined A character is written No argument is converted Note that the C99 width modifier 1 used in conjuction with the c and s conversion specifiers is not supported and nor are the conversion specifiers a and A Formatted input control strings The format is composed of zero or more directives one or more white space characters an ordinary character neither nor a white space character or a conversion specification Overview Each conversion specification is introduced by the character After the the following appear in sequence An optional assignment suppressing character An optional nonzero decimal integer that specifies the maximum field width in characters An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the receiving object A conversion specifier character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied The formatted input function executes each directive of the format in turn If a directive fails the function returns Failures are described as input failures because of the occurrence of an encoding error or the unavailability of input characters or matching failures because of inappropriate input A directive composed of white space character s is executed by reading input up to the first non white space character which remains unread
153. code of the application with the assembly language generated by the compiler Help mainc main c interleaved int main void vie oe om int i for i 0 i lt 10 i en a a a vy yvryryr yr O debug _printf Factorial of td is d n i factorial i Db x af In interleaved mode debugging controls such as single step step into and step out work at the instruction level not the source level To return to high level source debugging select Debug gt Control gt Source Mode There are other windows that help you with debugging such as the memory view and the watch windows and the CrossStudio Window Reference describes these Chapter2 CrossStudio Tutorial Stopping and starting debugging You can stop debugging using Debug gt Stop If you wish to restart debugging without reloading the program then you can use Debug gt Debug From Reset Note that when you debug from reset no loading takes place so it is expected that your program is built in a way such that any resetting of data values is done as part of the program startup You can also attach the debugger to a running target using the Debug gt Attach Debugger Chapter 2 Low level debugging 33 34 Chapter2 CrossStudio Tutorial Overview This section introduces the overall layout and operation of the CrossStudio integrated development environment CrossStudio standard layout CrossStudio s main window i
154. cription Edit Advanced Visible Whitespace Edit Advanced Toggle the write permissions of the current Toggle Read file Only Enable or disable visible whitespace 404 Chapter 37 Code editor command summary Binary editor command summary The following table summarizes the keystrokes and corresponding menu items for binary editor commands Keystrokes Menu Action Up Move the caret 16 bytes back Down Move the caret 16 bytes forward Left Move the caret one byte back Right Move the caret one byte forward Home Move the caret to the start of the current line of bytes End Move the caret to the end of the current line of bytes Page Up Move the caret one page up Page Down Move the caret one page down Ctrl Home Move the caret to address 0 Ctrl End Move the caret to the address of the last byte in the file Ctrl Up Move the view up one line Down Move the view down one line Ctrl Left Move the caret 4 bytes back Ctrl Right Move the caret 4 bytes forward Ctrl F Edit Find Display the find dialog Keystrokes Menu Action Find the next occurrence of the value most Pa recently searched for Removes the byte in the address before the Backspace a caret position Delete Removes the currently selected byte Ctrl S File Save Save the current file Save the current file under a different file File Save As Dame WARNING the current version
155. d ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 275 tanhf Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability lt setjmp h gt jmp_buf Synopsis Description Portability See also 276 include lt math h gt float tanhf float x tanhf calculates the hyperbolic tangent of x If x is NaN tanhf returns NaN tanhf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Non local jumps The header file lt setjmp h gt defines macros and functions for non local flow of control commonly used to implement exception handling in a C program Types jmp_buf Structure to hold processor state Functions longjmp Non local jump to saved state setjmp Save state for non local jump include lt setjmp h gt typedef implementation defined type jmp_buf The type jmp_buf is an array type suitable for holding the information needed to restore a calling environment The environment of a call to setjmp consists of information sufficient for a call to the longjmp function to return execution to the correct block and invocation of that block were it called recursively It does not include the state of the floating point status flags of open files or of any other component of the machine jmp_buf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 longjmp page 277 setjmp page 277 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference longjmp Synops
156. d in and your source files have been compiled with debugging information turned on you can jump to the definition of a symbol using the Go To Definition tool button To go to the definition of a symbol do one of the following Select the symbol from the list of symbols On the Symbol Browser tool bar click Go To Definition or Right click the symbol in the list of symbols From the popup menu click Go To Definition Adding symbol to watch and memory windows If a symbol s range and type is known you can add it to the most recently opened watch window or memory window To add a symbol to the watch window do the following Inthe Symbol Browser right click on the the symbol you wish to add to the watch window From the popup menu click Add To Watch To add a symbol to the memory window do the following Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows In the Symbol Browser right click on the the symbol you wish to add to the memory window From the popup menu click Locate Memory Working with the Symbol Browser Here are a few common ways to use the symbol browser What function takes up the most code space or what takes the most data space Show the symbol browser by selecting Symbol Browser from the Tools menu Group symbols by type by choosing Symbol Browser gt Group By Type from the Tools menu Make sure that the Size field is checked in Symbol Browser gt Fields on the Tools menu
157. d it is inserted at the current cursor position and any text to the right of the cursor is shifted along A visual indication of inserion mode is a that the cursor is a flashing line Overstrike mode As text is entered it replaces any text to the right of the cursor A visual indication of inserion mode is that the cursor is a flashing block Insert and overstrike modes are common to all editors if one editor is in insert mode all editors are set to insert mode You can configure the cursor appearance in both insertion and overstrike modes using the Tools gt Options dialog in the Text Editor gt General pane Changing to insertion or overstrike mode To toggle between insertion and overstrike mode do the following Press the Insert button to toggle between insert and overwrite mode Tf overstike mode is enabled the OVR status indicator will be enabled and the overstrike cursor will be visible Adding or inserting text To add or insert text do the following Chapter8 Basic editing Either click somewhere in the document or move the cursor to the desired location Enter the text If your cursor is between existing characters the text is inserted between them To overwrite characters in an existing line press the Insert key to put the editor in Overstrike mode Deleting text The text editor supports the following common editing keystrokes Key Description Backspace Deletes one character to the left of the c
158. d registers Interrupt service routine ARM example This example declares an ISR using the GCC syntax for declaring naked functions and accessing assembly code instructions void irq_ handler void __attribute__ naked void irq handler void asm stmfd sp r0 r12 lr asm mrs r0 spsr 236 asm stmfd sp r0 ctl_interrupt_count do interrupt handling stuff in here asm mov r0 sp asm b ctl_exit_isr Note that the registers SPSR RO through R12 and R14 user mode program counter must be saved on the stack The user mode R13 and R14 registers don t need to be saved because they are held in banked registers Note that FIQ handlers are not supported on the ARM Chapter 26 Low level interrupt handling Memory areas Memoty areas provide your application with dynamic allocation of fixed sized memory blocks Memory areas should be used in preference to the standard C library malloc and free functions if the calling task or interrupt service routine cannot block You allocate a memory area by declaring it as a C variable CTL_MEMORY_AREA_t m1 A message queue is initialised using the ctl memory_area_init function unsigned mem 20 ctl_message_queue_init amp m1 mem 2 10 This example uses an 20 element array for the memory The array is split into 10 blocks of each of which two words in size You can allocate a memory block from a memory area using the ctl_memory_area
159. d signal acosf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double acosh double x acosh returns the non negative inverse hyperbolic cosine of x acosh x is defined as log x sqrt x 2 1 assuming completely accurate computation If x lt 1 errno is set to EDOM and acosh returns HUGE_VAL If x lt 1 acosh returns NaN with signal If x is NaN acosh returns NaN without signal acosh conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float acoshf float x acoshf returns the non negative inverse hyperbolic cosine of x If x lt 1 errno is set to EDOM and acoshf returns HUGE_VALF If x lt 1 acoshf returns NaN with signal If x is NaN acoshf returns NaN without signal acoshf conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double asin double x Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability asinf Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability asinh Synopsis Description Portability asinhf Synopsis Description Portability asin returns the principal value in radians of the inverse circular sine of x The principal value lies in the interval PI 2 PI 2 radians If x gt 1 errno is set to EDOM and asin returns HUGE_VAL If xis NaN asin returns x If x gt 1
160. d to it Note that a memory map file in the project will be used in preference to this setting linker_memory Memory Map File String _map_file Specifies a command torun after the link command has executed This must be the full path to an executable program This property will have macro expansion applied to it linker_post_bui Post Build Command String id command 376 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Section Placement File String Save Name linker_section_ placement_file Descriptio The name of the file containing the section placement descriptio n This property will have macro expansion applied to it Note that a section placement file in the projectwill be used in preference to this setting Stack Size Abort Mode Integer arm_linker_sta ck_abt_size Specifies the size of the Abort mode stack in bytes Stack Size FIQ Mode Integer arm_linker_sta ck_fiq_size Specifies the size of the FIQ mode stack in bytes Stack Size IRQ Mode Integer arm_linker_sta ck_irq_size Specifies the size of the IRQ mode stack in bytes Chapter 36 Linker Properties 377 Descriptio n Property Save Name Specifies the size of the Superviso r mode stack in bytes arm_linker_sta Stack Size Supervisor Mode Integer dk sve size Specifies the size of the Undefine d mode stack in bytes arm_linker_sta
161. data that will fit into a pointer type 2 or 4 bytes depending upon processor word size or can be used to pass a pointer to a block of memory The message queue has a buffer that enables a number of posts to be completed without receives occuring The buffer keeps the posted messages ina fifo order so the oldest message is received first When the buffer isnt full a post will put the message at the back of the queue and the calling task continues execution When the buffer is full a post will block the calling task until there is room for the message When the buffer isnt empty a receive will return the message from the front of the queue and continue execution of the calling task When the buffer is empty a receive will block the calling task until a message is posted You allocate a message queue by declaring it as a C variable CTL_MESSAGE_ QUEUE t ml A message queue is initialised using the ctlmessage_queue_init function void queue 20 ctl_message_queue_init amp m1 queue 20 This example uses an 20 element array for the message queue Note that the array is a void which enables pointers to memory or cast integers to be communicated via a message queue You can post a message to a message queue with an optional timeout using the ctl_message_queue_post function ctl_message_queue_post amp m1 void 45 0 0 222 Example This example posts the integer 45 onto the message queue if ctl_message_queue
162. den do one of the following From the View menu click Source Navigator or Type Ctrl Alt N or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Source Navigator Using the source navigator Parsing source files manually To parse source files manually do one of the following From the Tools menu click Source Navigator then Refresh or On the Source Navigator tool bar click Refresh CrossStudio re parses any changed files and updates the source navigator display with the changes Progress information and any errors are sent to the Source Navigator Log in the Output window when parsing Grouping objects by type You can group object by their type that is whether they are classes functions namespaces structures or variables Each object is placed into a folder according to its type To group objects in the source browser by type do one of the following From the Tools menu click Source Navigator then Group By Type Chapter 12 CrossStudio Windows or On the Source Navigator tool bar click the arrow to the right of the Cycle Grouping button From the dropdown menu click Group By Type Symbol browser The Symbol Browser window shows useful information about your linked application and complements the information displayed in the Project Explorer window You can select different ways to filter and group the information in the symbol
163. dentifier in the program of the current context Numbers can be used in expressions hexadecimal numbers must be prefixed with Ox Registers can be referenced by prefixing the register name with The standard C and C operators gt gt lt lt lt lt gt gt amp amp amp are supported on numeric types The standard assignment operators gt gt lt lt amp are supported on number types The array subscript operator is supported on array and pointer types The structure access operator is supported on structured types this also works on pointers to sstructures and the gt works similarly The dereference operator prefix is supported on pointers the addressof prefix amp and sizeof operators are supported Casting to basic pointer types is supported For example unsigned char 0x300 can be used to display the memory at a given location Operators have the precedence and associativity that one would expect of a C like programming language 66 Chapter7 Debug expressions Basic editing CrossStudio has a built in editor which allows you to edit text but has features that make it particularly well suited to editing code and is referred to as either the Text Editor or the Code Editor based on its content You can open multiple code editors to view or edit source code in projects and copy and paste among them T
164. dialog that allows you name your configuration You can now specify which existing configurations your new configuration will inherit values from Deleteing a configuration You can delete a configuration by selecting it and pressing the Remove button Note that this operation cannot be undone or cancelled so beware Hidden configurations There are some configurations that are defined purely for inheriting and as such should not appear in the build combo box When you select a configuration in the configuration dialog you can specify if you want that configuration to be hidden Chapter4 Project management Project dependencies and build order You can set up dependency relationships between projects using the Project Dependencies dialog Project dependencies make it possible to build solutions in the correct order and where the target permits to manage loading and deleting applications and libraries in the correct order A typically usage of project dependencies is to make an executable project dependent upon a library executable When you elect to build the executable then the build system will ensure that the library it is dependent upon is up to date In the case of a dependent library then the output file of the library build is supplied as an input to the executable build so you dont have to worry about this Project dependencies are stored as project properties and as such can be defined differently based upon the selected configuration
165. dot OBJ The default file extension for an object file including the dot Chapter 4 Project macros 55 56 Macro Description A platform specific library extension that is generated LibExt based on project property values Using macros You can use a macro in a project property or an environment setting using the macro syntax For example the Object File Name property has a default value of IntDir InputName OB J To enable debugging of builds you should use the Build Information dialog that is on the context menu of the project explorer This dialog will give a full list of the macros that are specified for the project node selected together with the macro expanded property values Chapter4 Project management Ys Building projects CrossStudio provides a facility to build projects in various configurations Build configurations and their uses Configurations are typically used to differentiate debug builds from release builds For example debug builds will have different compiler options to a release buid a debug build will set the options so that the project can be debugged easily whereas a release build will enable optimization to reduce program size or increase its speed Configurations have other uses for example you can use configurations to produce variants of software such as a library for for several different hardware variants Configurations inherit properties from other configura
166. e Control then Undo Check Out Getting the latest version of a file To retrieve the latest version of a file from source control do the following In the Project Explorer right click the file to check out From the menu click Source Control then Get Latest Version Showing the differences between files To show the differences between the file on disk and the version checked into source control do the following In the Project Explorer right click the file to show the differences of From the menu click Source Control then Show Differences Chapter 6 Using source control 63 64 Removing a file from source control To remove a file from being managed by the source control system do the following In the Project Explorer right click the file to remove from source control From the menu click Source Control then Remove From Source Control Note that this deletes the file from the source code control system but does not touch the working file on disk and does not remove the file from the project Source control properties When a file is controlled the Properties window shows the following properties in the Source Control Options group Checked Out If Yes the file is checked out by you to the project location if No the file is not checked out Different If Yes the checked out file differs from the one held in the source control system if No they are identical File Path The file path of th
167. e application which we have just compiled and linked is now built and ready to run In this section we ll concentrate on downloading and debugging this application and using the features of CrossStudio to see how it performs Getting set up Before running your application you need to select the target to run it on The Targets window lists each target interface that is defined as does the Targets menu and you use these to connect CrossStudio to a target For this tutorial you ll be debugging on the simulator not hardware to simplify matters To connect to the simulator do one of the following From the Target menu click Connect ARM Simulator or From the View menu click Targets to focus the Targets window In the Targets window double click ARM Simulator After connecting the connected target is shown in the status bar O ARM Simulator Built OK Ove READ Ln 1Col 1 The color of the LED in the Target Status panel changes according to what CrossStudio and the target are doing White No target is connected Yellow Target is connected Solid green Target is free running not under control of CrossStudio or the debugger Chapter 2 Using the debugger 27 28 Flashing green Target is running under control of the debugger Solid red Target is stopped at a breakpoint or because execution is paused Flashing red CrossStudio is programming the applicati
168. e cursor to the next bookmark in the document If there is Next Bookmark F2 no following bookmark the cursor is placed at the first bookmark in the document Previous Moves the cursor to the previous bookmark in the document If Shift F2 there is no previous bookmark the cursor is placed at the last Bookmark bookmark in the document First Bookmark Ctrl K F2 Moves the cursor to the first bookmark in the document Last Bookmark Ctrl K Shift F2 Moves the cursor to the last bookmark in the document Clear All Ctrl Shift F2 Removes all bookmarks from the document Bookmarks Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary Advanced menu The Advanced menu provides additional commands to edit your document The Advanced menu Undo all Ctrl K Ctrl42Z Redo All Ctrl K Ctrl l Transpose Words Ctri K Ctrl T Transpose Lines Ctrl k T E Scroll To Top Ctrl G Ctrl T E Scroll To Middle Ctrl G Ctrl M E Scroll To Bottom Ctrl G Ctrl B a Toggle Read Only Ctri K Ctrl R a b Visible Whitespace Ctrl Shift 8 Advanced menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description Undo All Ctrl K Ctrl Z Undoes all editing actions in the document Redo All Ctrl K Ctrl Y Redoes all editing actions in the document Transpose Words Ctrl K Ctrl T Swaps the word at the cursor position with the preceding word Transpose Lines Ctrl K T Swaps the cursor line with the preceding line Scroll To Top Ctrl G Ctrl T Moves the cursor lin
169. e file or are compiled with without debugging information are grouped beneath Unknown To group symbols by source file do one of the following On the Symbol Browser tool bar click the arrow next to the Cycle Grouping tool button From the popup menu click Group By Source File or From the Tools menu click Symbol Browser then Group By Source File The Cycle Grouping tool button icon will change to indicate that the symbol browser is now grouping symbols by source file Sorting symbols alphabetically When you sort symbols alphabetically all symbols are displayed in a single list in alphabetical order To group symbols alphabetically do one of the following On the Symbol Browser tool bar click the arrow next to the Cycle Grouping tool button From the popup menu click Sort Alphabetically or From the Tools menu click Symbol Browser then Sort Alphabetically The Cycle Grouping tool button icon will change to indicate that the symbol browser is now grouping symbols alphabetically Filtering finding and watching symbols When you re dealing with big projects with hundreds or even thousands of symbols a way to filter the display of those symbols and drill down to the ones you need is very useful The symbol browser provides an editable combo box in the toolbar which you can use to specify the symols you d like displayed The symbol browser uses to match a sequence of zero or
170. e file in the source control system Old Version If Yes the file in the project location is an old version compared to the latest version in the source control system Status Controlled indicates that the file is controlled by the source code control system Source control status By selecting Project gt Source Control gt Show Status a window is displayed that shows the current source control state of each file in the project If a local file has been changed then this file is displayed in red You can use this window to do multiple source control operations e g add several files to the source control You can restrict the file list to a node in the project hierarchy e g all files of a folder and supply a filter which enables the file list to be restricted to the source control status e g all files that are different When a given file or solution is selected in the project explorer the source control properties appear in the properties window these properties reflect the local checkout status of the file and whether or not it has been modified Chapter6 Source code control Debug expressions The debugger can evaluate simple expressions that can be subsequently displayed in the watch window or as a tool tip in the code editor The simplest expression is an identifier which the debugger tries to interpret in the following order an identifier that exists in the scope of the current context the name of a global i
171. e file to open from the dialog Click Open Opening multiple files To open multiple existing files in the same directory do one of the following Select File Open menu item Choose multiple files to open from the dialog Hold down Ctrl key to add individual files or hold down Shift to select a range of files Select Open from the dialog Saving a file To save a file do one of the following Chapter 8 File management 79 Activate the editor to save From the File menu click Save or Activate the editor to save Type Ctrl S or Right click the tab of the editor to save From the popup menu click Save Saving a file to a different name To save a file do one of the following Select editor to save From the File menu click Save As Enter the new file name and click Save or Right click the tab of the editor to save From the popup menu click Save As Enter the new file name and click Save Printing a file To print a file do one of the following Select editor to print From the File menu click Print Select the printer to print to and click OK or Right click the tab of the editor to print From the popup menu click Print Select the printer to print to and click OK To insert a file at the current cursor position Select the editor to insert file into Move the cursor to the required insertion point
172. e on them A tool bar at the top of thw window offers quick access to commonly used commands for the item selected in the Project Explorer This section gives a brief overview of the project explorer window and its operation but for a complete description of how to work with projects and how to manage them please refer to Project management page 43 Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows The Project Explorer tool bar Button Description Adds a new file to the project using the New File dialog Adds an existing files to the project Removes files folders projects and links from the project Creates a new folder in the project Builds the active project Disassembles the selected project item Sets project explorer options Displays the properties dialog for the selected item EA ED A e X y Showing the Project Explorer To activate the Project Explorer if it is hidden do one of the following From the View menu click Project Explorer or Type Ctrl Alt P or On the Standard tool bar click the Project Explorer icon or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Project Explorer Setting project properties When you select an item in the project explorer the properties window displays the properties that can be set for the item This allows you to set compilation options for source files for instance Opening files for
173. e or is in read only mode the READ panel is highlighted otherwise it is dimmed Indicates the success or failure of the last build If the last build completed without errors or warnings the build Build status status pane contains Build OK otherwise it contains the number of errors and warnings reported Right clicking this panel displays the Build Log in the Output window 38 Chapter3 Overview Panel Description Indicates the cursor position of the current editor For text editors the caret position pane displays the line number and column number of the cursor for binary editors it displays the address where the Caret position Indicates the Caps Lock state If the Caps Lock is on Caps lock status CAPS is highlighted otherwise it is dimmed Indicates the Num Lock state If the Num Lock is on Nuni lock statis NUM is highlighted otherwise it is dimmed Indicates the Scroll Lock state If the Scroll Lock is on Scrol lock status SCR is highlighted otherwise it is dimmed Time panel Displays the current time Configuring the status bar panels To configure which panels are shown on the status bar do the following From the View menu click Status Bar From the status bar menu check the panels that you want displayed and uncheck the ones you want hidden or Right click on the status bar From the status bar menu check the panels that you want displayed and uncheck
174. e sign of x cosh conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float coshf float x coshf calculates the hyperbolic sine of x If x gt 88 7228 errno is set to EDOM and coshf returns HUGE_VALF If x is Infinity Infinity or NaN coshf returns x If x gt 88 7228 coshf returns Infinity or Infinity depending upon the sign of x coshf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double exp double x exp computes the base e exponential of x If x gt 709 782 errno is set to EDOM and exp returns HUGE_VAL If x is NaN exp returns NaN If x is Infinity exp returns Infinity If x is Infinity exp returns 0 exp conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float expf float x expf computes the base e exponential of x If x gt 88 722 errno is set to EDOM and expf returns HUGE_VALF Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability fabs Synopsis Description Portability fabsf Synopsis Description Portability floor Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability floorf Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability If xis NaN expf returns NaN If x is Infinity expf returns Infinity If x is Infinity expf returns 0 expf conforms to ISO
175. e to the project Ideally the file_name is a file path relative to the project or solution directory but you can also specify a full file path if you want to File paths are case sensitive and use as the directory separator They may contain macro instantiations so you cannot have file paths containing the character For example lt file file_name StudioDir source crt0 s Name crt0 s gt will be expanded using the value of the StudioDir when the file is referenced from CrossStudio Project properties are held in configuration elements with the Name attribute of the configuration element corresponding to the configuration name e g Debug At a given project level solution project folder there can only be one named configuration element i e all properties defined for a configuration are in single configuration element lt project Name projectname gt lt configuration project_type Library Name Common gt lt configuration Name Release build_debug_information No gt lt project gt You can link projects together using the import element lt import file_name target libc hzp gt Project Templates file format The CrossStudio New Project Dialog works from a file called project_templates xml which is held in the targets subdirectory of the CrossStudio installation directory We anticipate that you may want to add your own new project types so they are structured using XML syntax to enable simp
176. e to the top of the window Scroll To Middle Ctrl G Ctrl M Moves the cursor line to the middle of the window Scroll To Bottom Ctrl G Ctrl B Moves the cursor line to the bottom of the window oe nae Ctrl K Ctrl R Toggles the read only bit of the document Visibl Toggles the document display between non visible whitespace and eee Ctrl Shift 8 visible whitespace where tabs and spaces are shown with special Whitespace characters View menu The View menu provides commands to control the way that windows and their contents are seen within CrossStudio Chapter 16 Advanced menu 183 The View menu C Project Explorer Ctrl alt P Source Navigator Ctrl Alt N e Targets Ctrl Alt T QJ Output Ctrl Alt o Properties Window Ctrl alt Je Favorites Ctrl alt y 8 Terminal Emulator Ctrl Alt M l Debug 1 0 Terminal Ctrl Alt D JavaScript Console Ctrl Alt I amp Disk Explorer Ctrl aAlt K Sm Symbol Browser Ctrl aAlt Clipboard Ring Ctrl Alt C Other Windows gt HTML Browser Toolbars Logs gt Status Bar gt Outlining Full Screen Alt Shift Return View menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description Project Explorer Ctrl Alt P Activates the Project Explorer See Project explorer page 128 Source Navigator Ctrl Alt N Activate the Source Navigator See Source Navigator Targets Ctrl Alt T Activates the Targets window See Targets window page 139 Output Ctrl Alt O Ac
177. e used to speed up download of large programs as it generally quicker to erase a whole device rather than individual segments If set to No only the areas of FLASH containing the program being downloaded will be erased Erase All Timeout The timeout period for an erase all operation in milliseconds Target properties Debug Interface Type The type of debug interface that the target has Note that the value of this property will be automatically set to a project s ARM Debug Interface property on connection Chapter 13 Macraigor Wiggler 20 and 14 pin Target interface 147 148 Memory Access Timeout The timeout period for memory accesses in milliseconds Processor Endian Specifies the byte order of the target processor Note that the value of this property will be automatically set to a project s Endian property when a project is downloaded or attached to Processor Stop Time The timeout period in milliseconds to allow when stopping the processor CrossConnect Target interface The CrossConnect for ARM target interface provides access to ARM targets via the Rowley Associates CrossConnect for ARM This target interface supports program loading and debugging of both RAM and FLASH based applications Current device properties Device Type The JTAG device ID of the currently connected device CrossConnect Interface properties Firmware Variant The variant of the firmware running on the currently connected CrossConnect V
178. ebug Compile assemble for Thumb instruction set Link Thumb version of libraries Load into and run from RAM Compile assemble without debug information and with optimization enabled Thumb RAM Release 158 Chapter14 ARM Target Support Target script file The target interface system uses CrossStudios JavaScript ECMAScript interpreter to support board and target specific behaviour The main use for this is to support non standard target and board reset schemes and also to configure the target after reset see Reset Script for more information The target script system can also be used to carry out target specific operations when the debugger attaches stops or starts the target This can be useful when debugging with caches enabled as it provides a mechanism for the debugger to flush and disable caches when the processor enters debug state and then re enable the caches when the processor is released into run state See Attach Script Stop Script and Run Script for more information In order to reduce script duplication when the target interface runs a reset attach run or stop script it first looks in the current active project for a file marked with a project property File Type set to Reset Script If a file of this type is found it will be loaded prior to executing the scripts each of the scripts can then call functions within this script file Reset Script The Reset Script property held in the Target project property group
179. ebug information for the statement at the call location CrossStudio opens a disassembly window at the instruction Moving up one stack frame To move the debugger context up one stack frame to the calling function do one of the following On the Call Stack window s tool bar click the Up One Stack Frame button or On the Debug Location tool bar click the Up One Stack Frame button or Type Alt The debugger moves the cursor to the statement where the call was made If there is no debug information for the statement at the call location CrossStudio opens a disassembly window at the instruction Moving down one stack frame To move the debugger context down one stack frame to the called function do one of the following On the Call Stack window s tool bar click the Down One Stack Frame button Chapter 12 CrossStudio Windows or On the Debug Location tool bar click the Down One Stack Frame button or Type Alt The debugger moves the cursor to the statement where the call was made If there is no debug information for the statement at the call location CrossStudio opens a disassembly window at the instruction Setting a breakpoint on a return to a function To set a breakpoint on return to a function do one of the following In the Call Stack window click the stack frame on the function to stop at when it is returned to From the Build tool bar click the Toggle Breakpoint
180. ebugger window that displays the threads of a running program together with their state Tasks Overview The CTL enables your application to have multiple tasks You will typically use a task when you have some algorithmic or protocol processing that suspend its execution whilst other activities occur For example you may have a protocol processing task and a user interface task A task sometimes called a thread is a CPU execution context which is typically a subset of the CPU register state When a task switch occurs the CPU execution context is saved on to the stack of the current task a new task is selected to run and its saved CPU execution context is restored The process of selecting a new task to run is called task switching or re scheduling A task has a priority associated with it the lowest priority is 0 the highest is 255 A task is either executing the current task or it is queued in the task list The task list is kept in priority order with the highest priority task at the head of the list The current task will always have a priority that is greater than or equal to the first runnable task in the task list Task switching can be cooperative or preemptive Cooperative task switching occurs when the current task calls a CTL function which checks for rescheduling and the next task ready to run is of the same or higher priority than the current task 206 Preemptive task switching occurs when an interrupt service rou
181. eceive m1 amp msg 0 0 i dis int main void ctl_message_queue_init amp m1 queue 20 Chapter 21 C library support 223 224 Chapter 21 Message queues Byte queues A byte queue is a structure that enables tasks to post and receive data bytes The byte queue has a buffer that enables a number of posts to be completed without receives occuring The buffer keeps the posted bytes in a fifo order so the oldest byte is received first When the buffer isnt full a post will put the byte at the back of the queue and the calling task continues execution When the buffer is full a post will block the calling task until there is room for the byte When the buffer isnt empty a receive will return the byte from the front of the queue and continue execution of the calling task When the buffer is empty a receive will block the calling task until a byte is posted You allocate a byte queue by declaring it as a C variable CTL_BYTE_QUEUE_t m1 A byte queue is initialised using the ctl_byte_queue_init function unsigned char queue 20 ctl_byte_queue_init amp m1 queue 20 This example uses an 20 element array for the byte queue You can post a byte to a byte queue with an optional timeout using the ctl_byte_queue_post function ctl_byte_queue_post amp ml1 45 0 0 This example posts the byte 45 onto the byte queue if ctl_byte_queue_post amp m1 45 1 ctl_get_current_time 1000 0 timeout
182. ecome runnable 214 You can wait for events to be set using the ctl_events_wait function You can wait for any of the events in an event set to be set CTL_LEVENT_WAIT_ANY_EVENTS or all of the events to be set CTL_EVENT_WAIT_ALL_EVENTS You can also specify that when events have been set and have been matched that they should be automatically reset CTL_LEVENT_WAIT_ANY_EVENTS_WITH_AUTO_CLEAR and CTL_EVENT_WAIT_ALL_EVENTS_WITH_AUTO_CLEAR You can associate a timeout with a wait for an event set to stop your application blocking indefinately ctl_events_wait CTL_EVENT_WAIT_ANY_EVENTS amp e1 0x80 0 0 This example waits for bit 15 of the event set pointed to by e1 to become set if ctl_events_wait CTL_EVENT_WAIT_ANY_EVENTS amp el 0x80 1 ctl_get_current_time 1000 0 timeout occured This example uses a timeout and tests the return result to see if the timeout occured Task synchronisation in an interrupt service routine The following example illustrates synchronising a task with a function called from an interrupt service routine CTL_EVENT_SET_t el CTL_TASK_s t1 void ISRfn do work and then ctl_events_set_clear amp el 1 0 void task1 void p while 1 ctl_events_wait CTL_EVENT_WAIT_ANY_EVENTS amp el 1 0 0 ctl_events_set_clear amp el 0 1 Task synchronisation with more than one interrupt ser
183. ected form and the value of base is between 2 and 36 it is used as the base for conversion If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign the value resulting from the conversion is negated A pointer to the final string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form no conversion is performed the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Portability strtoul Synopsis Description strtoll returns the converted value if any If no conversion could be performed zero is returned If the correct value is outside the range of representable values LLONG_MIN page 250 or LLONG_MAxX page 250 is returned according to the sign of the value if any and the value of the macro ERANGE is stored in errno page 247 strtoll conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt stdlib h gt unsigned long int strtoul const char nptr char endptr int base strtoul converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to a long int representation First strtoul decomposes the input string into three parts an initial possibly empty sequence of white space characters as specified by isspace page 246 a subject sequence resembling an integer represented in some radix determined by the
184. ed Windows Hide window Hides the focused dock window Chapter 16 Window menu 199 Menu command Keystroke Description Cascade Cascades windows in multiple document interface mode Tile Horizontally Tiles windows horizontally in multiple document interface mode Next Ctrl Tab Activates the next window in the tab group or window stack Previous Ctrl Shift Tab Activates the previous window in the tab group or window stack Next Tab Group F6 Activates the next tab group in tabbed document interface mode rea Tab Shift F6 Activates the next tab group in tabbed document interface mode Tabbed Document Enables the tabbed document workspace Workspace Multiple Document Enables the multiple document workspace Workspace Workspace Displays the Workspace Layout menu which allows selection of Layouts various workspace layouts Reverse Workspace Reverses the left and right dock areas Layout Customize Workspace Displays the Document Workspace Layout dialog Layout Windows Displays the Windows dialog Help menu 200 The Help menu provides access to online help for CrossStudio Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary Menu command Keystroke Description The Help menu E CrossStudio Help R What s This Reload Contents Quick Links Favorites About CrossStudio Fl Shift F 1 Contents Ctrl Alt F1 Index Ctrl alt F2 Search Ctrl alt F3 Q Tip of the
185. ed 16 bit integers from target memory starting at address and returns them as an array Targetinterface peekMultUint32 TargetInterface peekMultUint32 address length TargetInterface peekMultUint32 reads length unsigned 32 bit integers from target memory starting at address and returns them as an array TargetInterface pokeMultUint16 TargetInterface pokeMultUint16 address data TargetInterface pokeBytes writes the array data containing 16 bit data to target memory at address TargetInterface pokeMultUint32 TargetInterface pokeMultUint32 address data TargetInterface pokeBytes writes the array data containing 32 bit data to target memory at address TargetInterface setICEBreakerBreakpoint TargetInterface setICEBreakerBreakpoint n addressValue addressMask dataValue dataMask controlValue controlMask Chapter14 ARM Target Support Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description TargetInterface setICEBreakerBreakpoint sets an ICEBreaker breakpoint nis the number of the watchpoint unit to use address Value is the address value addressMask is the address mask dataValue is the data value dataMask is the data mask control Value is the control value and controlMask is the control mask Targetinterface resetAndStop TargetInterface resetAndStop delay TargetInterface resetAndStop resets the target by cycling nSRST and then stops the processor
186. ed in libe hzp in the configuration V5T Thumb LE Release If your project file imports other project files using the lt import gt mechanism then denoting projects requires you to specify the solution names as a comma seperated list in brackets after the project name crossbuild config V5T Thumb LE Release project libc C Library arm hzp With this example libc C Library specifies the libc project in the C Library solution that has been imported by the project file arm hzp If you want to build a specific solution that has been imported from other project files you can use the solution option This option takes the solution names as a comma seperated list crossbuild config ARM Debug solution ARM Targets EB55 arm hzp With this example ARM Targets EB55 specifies the EB55 solution imported by the ARM Targets solution which in turn was imported by the project file arm hzp You can do a batch build using the batch option crossbuild config ARM Debug batch libc hzp With this example the projects in libc hzp which are marked to batch build in the configuration ARM Debug will be built By default a make style build will be done i e the dates of input files are checked against the dates of output files and the build is avoided if the output file is up to date You can force a complete build by using the rebuild option Alternatively you can remove all output files using the clean option You can see the command
187. ed to by s1 and subsequent searches for a token will return a null pointer If such a character is found it is overwritten by a null character which terminates the current token strtok saves a pointer to the following character from which the next search for a token will start Each subsequent call with a null pointer as the value of the first argument starts searching from the saved pointer and behaves as described above Portability strtok conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 318 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Part V Command Line Tools CY 3 D Q E O ZA N CrossBuild The command line program crossbuild enables your software to be built without using CrossStudio This tool can be used for production build purposes but isn t designed to be used for development The tool works from a crossstudio project file hzp and options that specify what is to be built crossbuild options project hzp You must specify a configuration to build in using the config option crossbuild config V5T Thumb LE Release arm hzp This example will build all projects in the solution contained in arm hzp in the configuration V5T Thumb LE Release If you want to build a specific project in the solution then you can specify it using the project option crossbuild config V5T Thumb LE Release project libm libc hzp This example will build the project libm contain
188. editing Double clicking a source file will load it into the code editor for editing As you switch between files in the editor the selection in the project explorer changes to highlight the file that you re currently editing Chapter 12 Project explorer 129 130 Source code control Using the the project explorer you can check files into and out of a source code control system Right clicking on a source file brings up a context menu with the following source code control operations Check In checks a file into source code control Check Out checks a source file out of the repository and makes it writable Undo Check Out undoes a check out and reverts the file on disk to the one in the source code control system Add To Source Control adds a file to source control Remove From Source Control removes a file from source control and deletes it from the source code control database For more information on source code control see Source code control page 61 Related sections See the Project management page 43 section Properties window The properties window displays properties of the current focused CrossStudio object Using the properties window you can set build properties of your project modify the editor defaults and change target settings The properties window is organised as a set of key value pairs As you select one of the keys then a help display explains the purpose of the property Because the propertie
189. ehavior Portability log Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability 268 include lt math h gt double ldexp double x int exp Idexp multiplies a floating point number by an integral power of 2 Idexp returns x 24exp If the result overflows errno is set to ERANGE and Idexp returns HUGE_VAL If x is Infinity or NaN ldexp returns x If the result overflows ldexp returns Infinity Idexp conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float ldexpf float x int exp Idexpf multiplies a floating point number by an integral power of 2 Idexpf returns x 2 exp If the result overflows errno is set to ERANGE and Idexpf returns HUGE_VALF If x is Infinity or NaN ldexpf returns x If the result overflows Idexpf returns Infinity Idexpf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double log double x log computes the base e logarithm of x If x 0 errno is set to ERANGE and log returns HUGE_VAL If x lt 0 errno is set to EDOM and log returns HUGE_VAL If x lt 0 or x Infinity log returns NaN with signal If x 0 log returns Infinity with signal If x Infinity log returns Infinity If x NaN log returns x with no signal log conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference 1og
190. ehavior Portability sqrt Synopsis Description Special cases Portability sqrtf Synopsis Description Special cases 274 include lt math h gt float sinhf float x sinhf calculates the hyperbolic sine of x If x gt 88 7228 errno page 247 is set to EDOM and sinhf returns HUGE_VALF If x is Infinity Infinity or NaN sinhf returns x If x gt 88 7228 sinhf returns Infinity or Infinity depending upon the sign of x sinhf conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double sqrt double val sqrt computes the nonnegative square root of val C90 and C99 require that a domain error occurs if the argument is less than zero CrossWorks C deviates and always uses TEC 60559 semantics If val is 0 sqrt returns 0 If val is 0 sqrt returns 0 If val is Infinity sqrt returns Infinity If val lt 0 sqrt returns NaN with invalid signal If val is NaN sqrt returns that NaN with invalid signal for signaling NaN sqrt conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 except in the case of domain errors include lt math h gt float sqrtf float val sqrtf computes the nonnegative square root of val C90 and C99 require that a domain error occurs if the argument is less than zero CrossWorks C deviates and always uses TEC 60559 semantics If val is 0 sqrt returns 0 If val is 0 sqrt returns 0 If val is Infinity sqrt
191. enu item Text Transposition The editor can transpose word or line pairs To transpose the word at the current cursor position with the previous word Select Edit gt Advanced gt Transpose Words menu item To transpose the current line with the previous line Select Edit gt Advanced gt Transpose Lines menu item Chapter 8 Advanced editor features 87 88 Whitespace To make whitespace visible Select Edit gt Advanced gt Visible Whitespace menu item Code templates The editor provides the ability to use code templates A code template is a block of frequently used source code that can be inserted automatically by using a particular key sequence A character is used in the template to indicate the required position of the cursor after the template has been expanded Editing code templates To edit code templates do the following From the Edit menu click Advanced then View Code Templates Code templates can either be expanded manually or automatically when the Space key is pressed Manually expanding a template To expand a code template manually do the following Type a key sequence for example the keys c followed by b for the comment block template From the Edit menu click Advanced then Expand Template or type Ctrl J to expand the template Automatically expanding templates To expand the template automatically do the following Ensure the Expand Templates On Space editor propert
192. er is written at the end of the characters actually written into the array A null character is written at the end of the conversion it is not counted as part of the returned value If there are insufficient arguments for the format the behavior is undefined If the format is exhausted while arguments remain the excess arguments are evaluated but are otherwise ignored If copying takes place between objects that overlap the behavior is undefined snprintf returns the number of characters that would have been written had n been sufficiently large not counting the terminating null character or a negative value if an encoding error occurred Thus the null terminated output has been completely written if and only if the returned value is nonnegative and less than n snprintf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 Formatted output control strings page 281 include lt stdio h gt int sprintf char s const char format sprintf writes to the string pointed to by s under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments are converted for output A null character is written at the end of the characters written it is not counted as part of the returned value If there are insufficient arguments for the format the behavior is undefined If the format is exhausted while arguments remain the excess arguments are evaluated but are otherwise ignored If copying takes place
193. erence to factorial Build failed EEE Notice that fact c has not been recompiled because it was compiled correctly before and is up to date The remaining error is a linkage error Double click on fact cin the Project Explorer to open it for editing and change the two occurrences of fact to factorial Recompile the project this time the project compiles correctly 4 Exploring projects Now that the project has no errors and builds correctly we can turn our attention to uncovering exactly how our application fits in memory and how to navigate around it Using Project Explorer features The Project Explorer is the central focus for arranging your source code into projects and it s a good place to show ancillary information gathered when CrossStudio builds your applications This section will cover the features that the Project Explorer offers to give you an overview of your project Chapter2 CrossStudio Tutorial Project code and data sizes Developers are always interested in how much memory their applications take up and with small embedded microcontrollers this is especially true The Project Explorer can display the code and data sizes for each project and individual source file that is successfully compiled To do this click the Options dropdown on the Project Explorer tool bar and make sure that Show Code Data Size is checked Once checked the Project Explorer disp
194. error occurred Notes vsprintf is equivalent to sprintf with the variable argument list replaced by arg Portability vsprintf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 SeeAlso Formatted output control strings page 281 vsscant Synopsis include lt stdio h gt int vsscanf const char s const char format va_list arg Description wsscanf reads input from the string s under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input sequences and how they are to be converted for assignment using subsequent arguments as pointers to the objects to receive the converted input Before calling vsscanf arg must be initialized by the va_start macro and possibly subsequent va_arg calls vsscanf does not invoke the va_end macro If there are insufficient arguments for the format the behavior is undefined vsscanf returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion Otherwise vsscanf returns the number of input items assigned which can be fewer than provided for or even zero in the event of an early matching failure Notes vsscanf is equivalent to sscanf with the variable argument list replaced by arg Portability vsscanf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 SeeAlso Formatted input control strings page 285 294 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference lt stdlib h gt General utilities The header file lt stdlib h gt defi
195. errors in the program which we need to correct Building the project To buld the project do the following From the Project menu click Build or On the Build tool bar click the Build tool button or Type F7 Alternatively to build the Tutorial project using a context menu do the following In the Project Explorer right click the Tutorial project node Select Build from the context menu CrossStudio starts compiling the project files but finishes after detecting an error The Output Window shows the Build Log which contains the errors found in the project Out Ba Leo EE Build active project 234 ms 1 emor Building Tutorial in configuration ARM RAM Debug 1 error Compiling fact c E Compiling main c 1 eror c users je develop Am debug am gcc bin cc1 fmessagetength 0 nostdinc isystemc users je develop Am debug amm include D__G C ARM Projects main c In function main invalid use of void expression o ETRE IE He 4 Correcting compilation and linkage errors CrossStudio compiled fact c without errors but main c contains two errors After compilation CrossStudio moves the cursor to the line containing the first reported error As well as this the line is marked in the gutter and highlighted by underlining it red You can change this behaviour using the Environment Options dialog i
196. ers strstr Find first occurrence of a string within a string strtok Break string into tokens Miscellaneous functions memset Set memory to character strerror Return string from error code strlen Calculate length of string memchr Synopsis include lt string h gt void memchr const void s int c size_t n Description memchr locates the first occurrence of c converted to an unsigned char in the initial n characters each interpreted as unsigned char of the object pointed to by s Unlike strchr memchr does not terminate a search when a null character is found in the object pointed to by s Chapter 28 lt string h gt String handling 311 Portability See also memcmp Synopsis Description Portability memcpy Synopsis Description Portability memmove Synopsis Description 312 memchr returns a pointer to the located character or a null pointer if c does not occur in the object memchr conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 strchr page 313 include lt string h gt int memcmp const void s1 const void s2 size_t n memcmp compares the first n characters of the object pointed to by s1 to the first n characters of the object pointed to by s2 memcmp returns an integer greater than equal to or less than zero as the object pointed to by s1 is greater than equal to or less than the object pointed to by s2 memcmp conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90
197. ersion The version information of the firmware running on the currently connected CrossConnect gt Information Current CrossConnect status information Serial Number The serial number of the currently connected CrossConnect device Use Serial Number The serial number of the CrossConnect you want to connect to If multiple CrossConnects are connected to your system this property allows you to specify which one to use If no serial number is specified the first available CrossConnect will be used JTAG properties Adaptive Clocking Specifies whether JTAG adaptive clocking using the RTCK signal should be used This option requires the variable speed variant of the CrossConnect firmware Chapter13 Target interfaces Identify Target Specifies whether the target should be identified on connection Use this setting with caution as setting this to No disables the checks carried out on connection that the JTAG interface is functioning correctly and may make an malfunctioning JTAG connection appear as if it is working JTAG Clock Divider The value to divide the JTAG clock frequency The variable speed variant of the CrossConnect firmware is required if this value is set greater than 1 Loader properties Erase All If set to Yes all of the target s FLASH memory will be erased prior to downloading the application This can be used to speed up download of large programs as it generally quicker to erase a whole device rather than indiv
198. es a project to be built for a variety of hardware descriptions For example a memory map file representing a device with two memory segments called FLASH and SRAM would look something like this in the memory map editor ROOT FLASH 0x40000000 0x1000 SRAM 0x00000000 0x1000 A corresponding section placement file will refer to the memory segments of the memory map file and list the sections that are to be placed in those segments This is done using a memory segment name in the section placement file that matches a memory segment name in the memory map file For example a section placement file that places a section called stack in the SRAM segment and the vectors and text section int the FLASH segment would look like this in the memory map editor 96 ROOT FLASH text vectors SRAM stack Note that the order of section placement within a segment is from the bottom up when viewed in the memory map editor in this example vectors is placed before text The memory map file and section placement file to use for linkage can either be included as a part of the project or alternatively they can be specified theLinker Properties page 367 of the project You can create a new program section using the either the assembler or the compiler For the C C compiler this can be achieved using __attribute__ on declarations For example void foobar void __attribute__ section foo This will allocate foobar in the section called
199. es are applicable to C and assembly code source files that are in aExecutable Library or Object File project type Chapter 36 Property Reference Assembler and Compiler Options piepery Meme Type Save Name Descriptio Additional command line asm_additional options to _options be supplied to the assembler Additional command line is options to Additional Compiler Options String List iri N P a supplied to the C C compiler Additional Assembler Options String List Chapter 36 Compilation Properties 351 Descriptio n Property Name Save Name Specifies the version of the ARM or Thumb instruction set to generate code for The optionsare v4T v5TE and v7M Use v4T for arm_architectu ARM7TD re MI ARM720T and ARM920T based processors Use v5TE for XScale and ARM9E based processors Use v7M for Cortex M3 based processors ARM Architecture Enumeration 352 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Name ARM Core Type Type Enumeration Save Name arm_core_type Descriptio Specifies the version of the ARM processor core to generate code for The options are ARM7TD MI ARM7TD MI S ARM720T ARM920T ARM926E J S Cortex M3 and XScale This option is currently not used for code generation Chapter 36 Compilation Properties 353 Descriptio n Property Name Save Name Specifies the ARM floating point format to generate code for
200. es the Tab key to increase or decrease the indentation level The indentation size can be altered in the editors Language Properties window Changing indentation size To change the indentation size do the following Select the Properties Window Select the Language Properties pane Set the Indent Size property for the required language Chapter 8 Indentation 77 78 The editor can optionally use tab characters to fill whitespace when indenting The use of tabs for filling whitespace can be selected in the editors Language Properties window Selecting tab or space fill when indenting To enable or disable the use of tab characters when indenting do the following Select the Properties Window Select the Language Properties pane Set the Use Tabs property for the required language Note that changing this setting does not add or remove existing tabs from files the change will only effect new indents The editor can provide assistance with source code indentation while inserting text There are three levels of indentation assistance None The indentation of the source code is left to the user Indent This is the default The editor maintains the current indentation level When Return or Enter is pressed the editor automatically moves the cursor to the indentation level of the previous line Smart The editor analyses the source code to compute the appropriate indentation level for the line The number of
201. escribes how to use debugger features to debug your program at the machine level by watching registers and tracing instructions Creating a project To start developing an application you create a new project To create a new project do the following From the File menu click New then New Project The New Project dialog appears This dialog displays the set of project types and project templates We ll create a project to develop our application in C Click the Executable icon in the Templates pane which selects the type of project to add Type Tutorial in the Name edit box which names the project You can use the Location edit box or the Browse button to locate where you want the project to be created Click OK This will create a project for a generic ARM target that has RAM mapped at address 0x00000000 as we are going to run this example on the simulator this is fine ARM hardware however is rarely so accommodating as memory will be mapped at different addresses target specific startup code may be required to initialize peripherals different techniques need to be employed to reset the target and target specific loader applications are required to program FLASH To create a project to run on hardware you should instead select a template from the project type matching your target this will create a project with the memory maps startup code reset script and FLASH loader for your target Once created the pro
202. escribing the register to set and must be one of r0 r1 r2 r3 r4 r5 r6 r7 r8 r9 r10 r11 r12 r13 or sp r14 or Ir r15 or pc cpsr r8_fiq r9_fiq r10_fiq r11_fiq r12_fiq r13_fiq r14_fiq spsr_fiq r13_svc r14_svc spsr_svc r13_abt r14_abt spsr_abt r13_irq r14_irq spsr_irq r13_und r14_und spsr_und Note that this function will only change the CPU register state if the CPU is stopped Targetinterface trst TargetInterface trst TargetInterface trst performs a JTAG TAP reset TargetInterface waitForDebugState TargetInterface waitForDebugState timeout TargetInterface waitForDebugState waits for the target to enter debug state with a timeout of timeout milliseconds If the timeout period expires and exception is thrown which is caught by the debugger Program loading CrossStudio for ARM supports FLASH programming and subsequent debugging by loading a program into the RAM of the target and transmitting it the data to be programmed The use of a target loader is determined by the value of the Loader File Path project property defined for the appropriate configuration of the project The Loader File Path property specifies the location of the loader executable to use if this is defined the loader executable will be downloaded onto the target an run prior to download of the main application In addition to the Loader File Path property the Loader File Type project property must be specified This te
203. ever writing the same messages over and over again To pause the program select Debug gt Break or type Ctrl control period In the next section we ll cover low level debugging at the machine level Low level debugging This section describes how to debug your application at the register and instruction level Debugging at a high level is all very well but there are occasions where you need to look a little more closely into the way that your program executes to track down the causes of difficult to find bugs and CrossStudio provides the tools you need to do just this Chapter2 CrossStudio Tutorial Setting up again What we ll now do is run the sample application but look at how it executes at the machine level If you haven t done so already stop the program executing by typing Shift F5 by selecting Stop Debugging from the Debug menu or clicking the Stop Debugging button on the Debug tool bar Now run the program so that it stops at the first breakpoint again You can see the current processor state in the Register windows To show the first registers window do one of the following From the Debug menu click Debug Windows then Registers 1 or Type Ctrl T R 1 Your registers window will look something like this BJ e 5s io e 2 24 8I Name Value CPU Current Mode ro 0x00000000 rl ox00000000 r2 0x00000000 r3 0x00000000 r4 Oxcdcdcdcd r5 Oxcdcdcdcd r Oxcdcdcdcd
204. ew project Configuration Name Description Compile assemble for ARM instruction set Link ARM version of libraries Load into and run from Flash memory Compile assemble with debug information and with optimization disabled ARM Flash Debug Compile assemble for ARM instruction set Link ARM version of libraries Load into and run from Flash memory Compile assemble without debug information and with optimization enabled ARM Flash Release Compile assemble for ARM instruction set Link ARM version of libraries Load into and run from RAM Compile assemble with debug information and with optimization disabled ARM RAM Debug Compile assemble for ARM instruction set Link ARM version of libraries Load into and run from RAM Compile assemble without debug information and with optimization enabled ARM RAM Release Compile assemble for Thumb instruction set Link Thumb version of libraries Load into and run from Flash memory Compile assemble with debug information and with optimization disabled Thumb Flash Debug Compile assemble for Thumb instruction set Link Thumb version of libraries Load into and run from Flash memory Compile assemble without debug information and with optimization enabled Thumb Flash Release Compile assemble for Thumb instruction set Link Thumb version of libraries Load into and run from RAM Compile assemble with debug information and with optimization disabled Thumb RAM D
205. execute Note the usage of sizeof when passing the stack size to ctl_task_run Chapter 18 C library support 211 212 Chapter 18 Tasks 19 Event sets An event set is a means to synchronise tasks with other tasks and interrupt service routines An event set contains a set of events one per bit which tasks can wait to become set value 1 When a task waits on an event set the events it is waiting for are matched against the current values if they match then the task can still execute If they dont match the task is put on the task list together with details of the event set and the events that the task is waiting for You allocate an event set by declaring it as C variable CTL_EVENT_SET_t el An CTL_EVENT_SET_t is a synonym for an unsigned type Thus when an unsigned is naturally 16 bits an event set will contain 16 events and when it is naturally 32 bits an event set will contain 32 events You can initialise an event set using the ctl_events_init function ctl_events_init amp el 0 Note that initialisation should be done before any tasks can use an event set You can set and clear events of an event set using the ctl_events_set_clear function ctl_events_set_clear amp el 1 0x80 This example will set the bit zero event and clear the bit 15 event If any tasks are waiting on this event set the events they are waiting on will be matched against the new event set value which could cause the task to b
206. eyboard shortcut if it has one Status tips In addition to tool tips CrossStudio provides a longer description in the status bar when you hover over a tool button or when you move over a menu item Whats This For even more detail Whats This help provides a description of tool buttons and menu items in an expanded form Online Manual CrossStudio has links from all windows to the online help system Whats This help To quickly find out what a menu item or tool button does you can use Whats This help To do this From the Help menu click Whats This or type Shift F1 Click on the tool button or menu item of interest CrossStudio will then display a small window containing the name and a brief description of the tool button or menu item Help in the online manual CrossStudio provides an extensive HTML based help system which is available at all times To go to the help information for a particular window or user interface element do the following Focus the appropriate element by clicking it From the Help menu click CrossStudio Help or type F1 You can return to the Welcome page at any time Chapter 12 Help window 125 126 From the View menu click HTML Browser then Home or Type Alt Home Help from the text editor The text editor is linked to the help system in a special way If you place the cursor over a word and press F1 that word is looked up in the help system index and the mos
207. f the input string is empty or consists entirely of white space or if the first non white space character is other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is zero the sequence of characters starting with the first digit is interpreted as an integer constant If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is between 2 and 36 it is used as the base for conversion If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign the value resulting from the conversion is negated A pointer to the final string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form no conversion is performed the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer strtoull returns the converted value if any If no conversion could be performed zero is returned If the correct value is outside the range of representable values LLONG_MAX page 250 or ULLONG_MAX page 252 is returned according to the sign of the value if any and the value of the macro ERANGE is stored in errno page 247 strtoull conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt stdlib h gt char ulltoa unsigned long long val char buf int radix ulltoa converts val to a string in base radix and places the result in buf
208. f the macro errno page 247 is stored in errno page 247 strtod conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 Chapter 28 lt stdlib h gt General utilities 303 304 strtof Synopsis Description Portability strtol Synopsis Description include lt stdlib h gt float strtof const char nptr char endptr strtof converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to a double representation First strtof decomposes the input string into three parts an initial possibly empty sequence of white space characters as specified by isspace page 246 a subject sequence resembling a floating point constant and a final string of one or more unrecognized characters including the terminating null character of the input string strtof then attempts to convert the subject sequence to a floating point number and return the result The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string starting with the first non white space character that is of the expected form The subject sequence contains no characters if the input string is empty or consists entirely of white space or if the first non white space character is other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign followed by a nonempty sequence of decimal digits optionally containing a decimal point character then an optional exponent part If the subject
209. field name The mask definition has _MASK appended to it and the start definition has _BIT appended to it For example given the following definitions in the the file memorymap xml lt RegisterGroup start 0xFFFFF000 name AIC gt lt Register start 0x00 size 4 name AIC_SMRO gt lt BitField size 3 name PRIOR start 0 gt lt BitField size 2 name SRCTYPE start 5 gt lt Register gt The command line mkhdr memorymap xml memorymap h Will generate the following definitions in the file memorymap h define AIC_SMRO volatile unsigned long 0xFFFFF000 tdefine AIC_SMRO_PRIOR_MASK 0x7 define AIC_SMRO_PRIOR_BIT 0 define AIC_SMRO_SRCTYPE_MASK 0x60 define AIC_SMRO_SRCTYPE_BIT 5 These definitions can be used in the following way in a C C program Reading from a register unsigned r AIC_SMRO Writing to a register AIC_SMRO priority lt lt AIC_SMRO_PRIOR_BIT srctype lt lt AIC_SMRO_SRCTYPE_BIT Reading a bitfield unsigned srctype AIC_SMRO amp AIC_SMRO_SRCTYPE MASK gt gt AIC_SMRO_SRCTYPE_BIT Writing a bitfield AIC_SMRO AIC_SMRO amp AIC_SMRO_SRCTYPE_MASK srctype amp AIC_SMRO_SRCTYPE_MASK lt lt AIC_SMRO_SRCTYPE BIT Usage mkhdr inputfile outputfile targetname option Element Description The name of the source CrossWorks Memory eee map editor page 89 file outputfile The name of the file to generated repbaseof
210. file browser for you to choose where to save the file and what to call it Saves the contents of the active editor to disk using a different name CrossStudio opens a file browser for you to choose where to SAVE PIPAS CURA save the file and what to call it After saving the editor is set to edit the newly saved file not the previous file Save file And Saves the contents of the active editor to disk and then closes the Close Ctrl K D editor If it is a new file without a name CrossStudio opens a file browser for you to choose where to save the file and what to call it Saves all edited files to disk For each new file without a name CrossStudio opens a file browser for you to choose where to save the file and what to call it Cancelling a save at any time will return you to CrossStudio without saving the remainder of the files Save All Ctrl Shift S Saves all edited files to disk and then exits CrossStudio For each new file without a name CrossStudio opens a file browser for you to choose where to save the file and what to call it Cancelling a save at any time will return you to CrossStudio without exiting Save All And Exit Alt Shift F4 Steps into the next statement or instruction and enters C functions Page Setup and assembly language subroutines If a breakpoint is hit when stepping the debugger immediately stops at that breakpoint Opens the Print Preview dialog and shows the document as it will Print
211. file format page 340 Describes the XML format CrossStudio uses for project files Project system A solution is a collection of projects and all projects are contained in solutions Organizing your projects into a solution allows you to build all the projects in a solution with a single keystroke load them onto the target ready for debugging with another Projects in a solution can can reside in the same or different directories Project directories are always relative to the directory of the solution file which enables you to move or share project file hierarchies on different computers The Project Explorer organizes your projects and files and provides quick access to the commands that operate on them A tool bar at the top of the window offers quick access to commonly used commands for the item selected in the Project Explorer Projects The projects you create within a solution have a project type which CrossStudio uses to determine how to build the project The project type is selected when you use the New Project dialog The particular set of project types can vary depending upon the variant of CrossWorks you are using however the following project types are standard to most CrossWorks variants Executable a program that can be loaded and executed Externally Built Executable an executable that is not built by CrossWorks Library a group of object files that collected into a single file sometimes called an arc
212. file that defines the symbol is compiled with debugging information turned off type information is not available and the Type column is left blank Showing the Symbol Browser window To display the Symbol Browser window if it is hidden do one of the following From the View menu click Symbol Browser or Type Ctrl Alt y or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Symbol Browser Configuring the Symbol Browser Choosing fields to display Initially the Range and Size columns are shown in the symbol browser You can select which columns to display using the Field Chooser on the Symbol Browser tool bar To select the fields to display in the Symbol Browser do one of the following Click the Field Chooser button on the Symbol Browsertool bar Check the fields that you wish to display and uncheck the fields that you wish to hide or From the Tools menu select Symbol Browser then Fields Chapter 12 Symbol browser 135 136 Check the fields that you wish to display and uncheck the fields that you wish to hide Grouping symbols by section When you group symbols by section each symbol is grouped underneath the section that it is defined in Symbols that are absolute or are not defined within a section are grouped beneath No Section To group symbols by section do the following On the Symbol Browser tool bar click the arrow next t
213. g ee itll Onl MM Sort Descending Increase Line Indent Decrease Line Indent Ctrl K Tab Ctrl K Space Ctrl Shift U Ctrl Alt Shift U Ctrl Ctrl Shift Tab Shift Tab Ctrl K Ctrl J L Ctrl k Ctrl J C Ctrl k Ctrl J R Edit Selection menu commands Menu command Keystroke Ctrl K Tab Convert space characters in the selection to tabs according to the tab settings for the language Untabify Ctrl K Space Convert tab characters in the selection to spaces according to the tab settings for the language Make Uppercase Ctrl Shift U Convert the letters in the selection to uppercase If there is no selection CrossStudio converts the character to the right of the cursor to uppercase and moves the cursor right one character Switch Case Ctrl U Switches the letter case of letters in the selection that is uppercase characters become lowercase and lowercase become uppercase If there is no selection CrossStudio switches the letter case of the character to the right of the cursor and moves the cursor right one character Comment Ctrl Prefixes lines in the selection with language specific comment characters If there is no selectiom CrossStudio comments the cursor line Uncomment Ctrl Shift Removes the prefixed from lines in the selection that contains language specific comment characters If there is no selectiom CrossStudio uncomments the cursor line Increa
214. g Windows then Globals or Type Ctrl Alt G or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Other Windows then Globals Chapter 12 Globals window 113 114 Changing display format When you select a variable in the main part of the display the display format button highlighted on the Globals window tool bar changes to show the item s display format To change the display format of a global variable do one of the following Right click the item to change From the popup menu select the format to display the item in or Click the item to change On the Globals window tool bar select the format to display the item in Modifying global variable values To modify the value of a global variable do one of the following Click the value of the global variable to modify Enter the new value for the global variable Prefix hexadecimal numbers with 0x binary numbers with Ob and octal numbers with 0 Right click the value of the global variable to modify From the popup menu select one of the operations to modify the global variable value Locals window The locals window displays a list of all variables that are in scope of the selected stack frame in the Call Stack Locals window user interface The Locals window is divided into a tool bar and the main data display Chapter 12 CrossStudio Windows Locals tool bar Butt
215. ge Ctrl Left Moves the cursor left one word Ctrl Right Moves the cursor right one word Ctrl Up Moves the cursor to the previous function Ctrl Down Moves the cursor to the next function Ctrl Home Moves the cursor to the start of the document Ctrl End Moves the cursor to the end of the document Alt Up Scrolls the document up by one line Alt Down Scrolls the document down by one line Go To Line To move the cursor to a particular line number do one of the following From the Edit menu click Advanced then Go To Line Enter the line number to move the cursor to or Type Ctrl G Ctrl L Enter the line number to move the cursor to Selecting Text Selecting text with the keyboard You can select text using the keyboard by using Shift with the navigation keys Hold Shift key down while using the Navigation Keys Selecting text with the mouse Move mouse cursor to the point in the document that you want to start selecting Chapter 8 Navigation 69 70 Bookmarks Hold down left mouse button and drag mouse to mark selection Release left mouse button to end selection Matching Delimiters The editor can find the matching partner for delimiter characters such as lt gt To match a delimiter Move cursor to the left of the delimiter character to be matched Select Edit Advanced Match Delimiter menu item or use Ctrl keys To select a delimited range Move curso
216. get specific target script which instructs the debugger on how to reset the target and what to do when the processor stops or starts Files which are stored outside of the projects home directory are shown by a small purple shortcut indicator at the bottom left of the icon as above These folders have nothing to do with directories on disk they are simply a means to group related files together in the project explorer You can create new folders and specify filters based on the file extension so that when you add a new file to the project it will be placed in the folder whose filter matches the file extension Managing files in a project We ll now set up the project with some files that demonstrate features of the CrossStudio IDE For this we will add one pre prepared and one new file to the project Adding an existing file to a project We will add one of the tutorial files to the project To add an existing file to the project do the following From the File menu click Add Existing File or Type Ctrl D or Chapter2 CrossStudio Tutorial In the Project Explorer right click the Tutorial project node Select Add Existing File from the context menu When you ve done this CrossStudio displays a standard file locator dialog Navigate to the CrossStudio installation directory then to the tutorial folder select the Fact aC Lookin Quod l EE lc main c File name fact Files of type je Files ia Cancel
217. gh 9 a through f or A through F isxdigit conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt ctype h gt int tolower int c Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Description Portability toupper Synopsis Description Portability lt errno h gt errno Synopsis Description tolower converts an uppercase letter to a corresponding lowercase letter If the argument c is a character for which isupper is true tolower returns the corresponding lowercase letter otherwise the argument is returned unchanged tolower conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt ctype h gt int toupper int c toupper converts a lowercase letter to a corresponding uppercase letter If the argument c is a character for which islower is true toupper returns the corresponding uppercase letter otherwise the argument is returned unchanged toupper conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Errors The header file lt errno h gt defines macros defines several macros all relating to the reporting of error conditions Macros errno Error number include lt errno h gt int errno errno expands to a modifiable lvalue of type int the value of which is set to a positive error number by several library functions The ISO standard does not specify whether errno is a macro or an identifier declared with external linkage Portable program
218. gt int scanf const char format scanf reads input from the standard input stream under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input sequences and how they are to be converted for assignment using subsequent arguments as pointers to the objects to receive the converted input If there are insufficient arguments for the format the behavior is undefined If the format is exhausted while arguments remain the excess arguments are evaluated but are otherwise ignored scanf returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before any conversion Otherwise scanf returns the number of input items assigned which can be fewer than provided for or even zero in the event of an early matching failure scanf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Formatted input control strings page 285 include lt stdio h gt int snprintf char s size_t n const char format snprintf writes to the string pointed to by s under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments are converted for output Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Portability sprint De See Also f Synopsis scription Portability sscanf See Also Synopsis If n is zero nothing is written and s can be a null pointer Otherwise output characters beyond the n 1st are discarded rather than being written to the array and a null charact
219. haracter is equal to the precision specification If the precision is missing it is taken as 6 if the precision is zero and the flag is not specified no decimal point character appears If a decimal point character appears at least one digit appears before it The value is rounded to the appropriate number of digits A double argument representing an infinity is converted to inf A double argument representing a NaN is converted to nan The F conversion specifier Chapter 28 lt stdio h gt Input output functions 283 284 produces INF or NAN instead of inf or nan respectively Some CrossWorks library variants do not support the f and F conversion specifiers in order to reduce code and data space requirements please ensure that you have selected the correct library in the Printf Floating Point Support property of the project if you use these conversion specifiers e E A double argument representing a floating point number is converted in the style d dddedd where there is one digit which is nonzero if the argument is nonzero before the decimal point character and the number of digits after it is equal to the precision if the precision is missing it is taken as 6 if the precision is zero and the flag is not specified no decimal point character appears The value is rounded to the appropriate number of digits The E conversion specifier produces a num
220. he Windows menu contains a list of all open code editors The code editor supports the language of the source file that it is editing showing code with syntax highlighting and offering smart indenting You can open a code editor in several ways some of which are By double clicking on a file in the Project Explorer or by right clicking on a file and selecting Open from the context menu Using the File gt New or File gt Open commands Right clicking in a source file and selecting a file from the Open Include File menu Elements of the code editor The code editor is divided into several elements which are described here Code Pane The area where you edit your code You can set options that affect the behavior of text in the code pane as it relates to indenting tabbing dragging and dropping of text and so forth For more information see General All Languages Text Editor Options Dialog Box 68 Navigation Margin gutter A gray area on the left side of the code editor where margin indicators such as breakpoints bookmarks and shortcuts are displayed Clicking this area sets a breakpoint on the corresponding line of code You can hide or display the Margin Indicator bar in General Tools Text Editor Options dialog box Horizontal and vertical scroll bars Allows you to scroll the code pane horizontally and vertically so that you can view the code that extends beyond the viewable edges of the code pane You can h
221. he connected target interface Resets the connected target interface oA da Displays the properties of the selected target interface Showing the Targets window To display the Targets window if it is hidden do one of the following From the View or Target menu click Targets or Type Ctrl Alt T or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Targets Managing target connections Connecting a target To connect a target do one of the following In the Targets window double click the target to connect or From the Target menu click the target to connect Chapter 12 CrossStudio Windows or In the Targets window click the target to connect On the Targets window tool bar click the Connect button or In the Targets window right click the target to connect From the popup menu click Connect or In the Targets window click the target to connect Type Ctrl T C Disconnecting a target To disconnect a target do one of the following From the Target menu click Disconnect or On the Targets window tool bar click the Disconnect button or Type Ctrl T D or Right click the connected target in the Targets window From the popup menu click Disconnect Alternatively connecting a different target will automatically disconnect the current target connection
222. he project up to date To show the dependencies for a project click the Options button on the Project Explorer tool bar and ensure that Show Dependencies is checked in the menu Once checked dependent files are shown as sub nodes of the file which depends upon them Chapter 2 Exploring projects 24 In this case main cis dependent upon cross_studio_io hbecause it it includes it with a include directive You can open cross_studio_io h in an editor by double clicking it so having dependencies turned on is an effective way of navigating to and summarising the files that a source file includes Output files Another useful piece of information is knowing the files output files when compiling and linking the application Needless to say CrossStudio can display this information too To turn on output file display click the Options button on the Project Explorer tool bar and ensure that Show Output Filesis checked in the menu Once checked output files are shown in an Output Filesfolder underneath the node that generates them In the above figure we can see that the object files fact o main o and crt0 o are object files produced by compiling their corresponding source files the map file Tutorial map and the linked executable Tutorial el fare produced by the linker As a convenience double clicking an object file or a linked executable file in the Project Explorer will open an editor showing the disassembled contents of the file Disas
223. he squares of x and y sqrtf x x y y without undue overflow or underflow If x and y are the lengths of the sides of a right angled triangle then hypotf computes the length of the hypotenuse If x or y is Infinity or Infinity hypotf returns Infinity If x or y is NaN hypotf returns NaN hypotf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt int isfinite floating type x isfinite determines whether x is a fiinite value zero subnormal or normal and not infinite or NaN The isfinite macro returns a non zero value if and only if its argument has a finite value As the fast math library does not support NaN and infinite values isfinite always returns a non zero value isfinite conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt int isinf floating type x isinf determines whether its argument value is an infinity positive or negative The determination is based on the type of the argument isinf confirms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt int isnan floating type x isnan determines whether its argument value is a NaN The determination is based on the type of the argument isnan confirms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 267 1ldexp Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability ldexp Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library b
224. hiding parameter types To display or hide the type of each parameter in the call stack do the following On the Call Stack tool bar click the Fields button From the dropdown menu check or uncheck Parameter Types Displaying or hiding file names and source line numbers To display or hide the file name and source line number columns of each frame in the call stack do the following On the Call Stack tool bar click the Fields button From the dropdown menu check or uncheck Call Sourrce Location Displaying or hiding call addresses To display or hide the call address of each frame in the call stack do the following Chapter 12 Call stack window 109 110 On the Call Stack tool bar click the Fields button From the dropdown menu check or uncheck Call Address Changing the debugger context You can select the stack frame for the debugger context from the Call Stack window Selecting a specific stack frame To move the debugger context to a specific stack frame do one of the following In the Call Stack window double click the stack frame to move to or In the Call Stack window click the stack frame to move to On the Call Stack window s tool bar click the Switch To Frame button or Inthe Call Stack window right click the stack frame to move to From the popup menu select Switch To Frame The debugger moves the cursor to the statement where the call was made If there is no d
225. hive Object File the result of a single compilation Staging a project that can be used to apply a user defined command for example cp to each file in a project Chapter4 Project management Combining a project that can be used to apply a user defined command when any files in a project have changed Properties and configurations Properties are data that are attached to project nodes They are usually used in the build process for example to define C preprocessor symbols You can have different values of the same property based on a configuration for example you can change the value of a C preprocessor symbol for a release or a debug build Folders Projects can contain folders which are used to group related files together This grouping can be done using the file extension of the file or it can be done by explicitly creating a file within a folder Note that folders do not map onto directories in the file store they are solely used to structure the project explorer display Files The source files of your project can be placed either in folders or directly in the project Ideally files placed in project should be relative to the project directory however there are cases when you might want to refer to a file in an absolute location and this is supported by the project system The project system will allow with a warning duplicate files to be put into a project The project system uses the extension of the fi
226. ide or display the horizontal and vertical scroll bars using the General Tools Text Editor Options dialog box There are several ways to move around code editors Mouse and cursor motion keys Bookmarks The Go To Line command The Navigate Backward and Navigate Forward buttons Navigating with the mouse and keyboard The most common way to navigate text is with the mouse and cursor motion keys Click a location with the mouse Use the arrow keys to move one character at a time or the arrow keys in combination with the Ctrl key to move one word at a time Use the scroll bars or scroll wheel on the mouse to move through the text Use the Home End PageUp and PageDown keys Use Alt PageUp and Alt PageDown to move the insertion point to the top or bottom of the window respectively Use Ctrl Up and Ctrl Down to scroll the view without moving the insertion point The keystrokes most commonly used to navigate around a document are Keystroke Description Moves the cursor up one line Down Moves the cursor down one line Chapter8 Basic editing Left Moves the cursor left one character Right Moves the cursor right one character Home Moves the cursor to the first character on the line Pressing Home a second time moves the cursor to the first column End Moves the cursor to the end of the line PageUp Moves the cursor up one page PageDown Moves the cursor down one pa
227. idual segments If set to No only the areas of FLASH containing the program being downloaded will be erased Erase All Timeout The timeout period for an erase all operation in milliseconds Target properties Debug Interface Type The type of debug interface that the target has Note that the value of this property will be automatically set to a project s ARM Debug Interface property on connection Memory Access Timeout The timeout period for memory accesses in milliseconds Processor Endian Specifies the byte order of the target processor Note that the value of this property will be automatically set to a project s Endian property when a project is downloaded or attached to Processor Stop Time The timeout period in milliseconds to allow when stopping the processor Segger J Link Target interface The Segger J Link target interface provides access to ARM targets via the Segger USB J Link ARM JTAG interface This target interface supports program loading and debugging of both RAM and FLASH based applications Current device properties Device Type The JTAG device ID of the currently connected device Chapter 13 Segger J Link Target interface 149 150 J Link properties Current Speed The JTAG clock frequency the J Link is currently running DLL Compile Time The J Link DLL s compilation date and time DLL Version The J Link DLL s version information Version The J Link s firmware string Fir
228. ies Templates ol Ll d C File cpp C File c Header File h Creates a C source file C Create a new file not linked to a project Add a new file to the current project Name main Location C ARM Projects Browse ae Sa Click OK to add the new file CrossStudio opens an editor with the new file ready for editing Rather than type in the program from scratch we ll add it from a file stored on disk From the Edit menu click Insert File or type Ctrl K Ctrl I Using the file browser navigate to the tutorial directory Chapter2 CrossStudio Tutorial Select the main c file Click OK Your main c file should now look like this Help facte maine f f CrossWorks Tutorial include lt _ cross_studio_io h gt void factorial int void main void int i for i 1 i lt 10 i debug_printf factorial of d is d n i factorial i Next we ll set up some project options Setting project options You have now created a simple project and in this section we will set some options for the project You can set project options on any node of the solution That is you can set options on a solution wide basis on a project wide basis on a project group basis or on an individual file basis For instance options that you set on a solution are inherited by all projects in that solution by all groups in each of those projects and then b
229. iewing and editing target properties see Viewing and editing target properties CrossWorks supports a number of different ARM debug interfaces each target interface can support one or more of these The following table summarises the supported target interfaces and the ARM debug interfaces supported ARM7 ARM7 ARM9 XScal Target Interface ADIv5 DI TDI TDI e CrossConnect Target interface Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes page 148 Macraigor Wiggler 20 and 14 pin Target Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes interface page 146 146 ARM7 ARM7 ARM9 XScal Target Interface DI TDI Segger J Link Target interface Yes Yes page 149 ARM Simulator Target interface Yes Yes page 151 TDI ADIv5 Yes No No Yes Yes Yes The following table summarises the debug facilities available to each ARM debug interface ARM Debug Software Hardware Break on Architecture Breakpoints Breakpoints Exception Unlimited 1 ARM7DI hardware 2 No breakpoint used Unlimited 1 ARM7TDI hardware 2 No breakpoint used Unlimited 1 ARM9TDI hardware 2 Yes breakpoint used Se 4 2 instruction XScale Unlimited and 2 data Yes AD v5 Unlimited TE OE a and 4 data Macraigor Wiggler 20 and 14 pin Target interface The Macraigor Wiggler target interface provides access to ARM targets via Macraigor System s Wiggler for ARM or compatible device This target interface supports program loading and debugging of both RAM and FLASH based
230. if you use this length modifier If a length modifier appears with any conversion specifier other than as specified above the behavior is undefined Note that the C99 length modifiers j z t and L are not supported Conversion specifiers The conversion specifiers and their meanings are a i The argument is converted to signed decimal in the style dddd The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to appear if the value being converted can be represented in fewer digits it is expanded with leading spaces The default precision is one The result of converting a zero value with a precision of zero is no characters Ih Aat Teak ft 0 u x X The unsigned argument is converted to unsigned octal for o unsigned decimal for u or unsigned hexadecimal notation for x or X in the style dddd the letters abcdef are used for x conversion and the letters ABCDEF for x conversion The precision specifies the minimum number of digits to appear if the value being converted can be represented in fewer digits it is expanded with leading spaces The default precision is one The result of converting a zero value with a precision of zero is no characters F A double argument representing a floating point number is converted to decimal notation in the style ddd ddd where the number of digits after the decimal point c
231. ild management system However these systems can become complicated To enable you to understand the implications of changing build settings right clicking a node in the project explorer and selecting Properties brings up a dialog that shows the macros and build steps that apply to that project node Building all projects To build all projects in the solution do one of the following On the Build toolbar click the Build Solution button or Chapter5 Building projects From the Build menu select Build Solution or Type Alt F7 or Right click the solution in the Project Explorer window From the menu click Build Building a single project To build a single project only do one of the following Select the required project in the Project Explorer On the Build tool bar click the Build tool button or Select the required project in the Project Explorer From the the Project menu click Build or Right click on the required project in the Project Explorer window From the menu click Build Compiling a single file To compile a single file do one of the following In the Project Explorer right click the source file to compile From the menu click Compile or In the Project Explorer click the source file to compile From the Build menu click Compile or In the Project Explorer click the source file to compile Ty
232. ill make and depending upon the CPU the stack used for interrupt service routines Running out of stack space is common problem with multi tasking systems and the error behaviour is often misleading It is recommended that you initialise the stack to known values so that you can check the stack with the CrossWorks debugger if problems occur memset tasklStack Oxba sizeof task1Stack Your ctl_task_run function call should look something like this ctl_task_run amp task1Task 12 5 task1Fn 0 task sizeof taskiStack sizeof unsigned task1Stack 0 The first parameter is a pointer to the task structure The second parameter is the priority in this case 12 the task will start executing at The third parameter is a pointer to the function to execute in this case task1Fn The fourth parameter is the value that is supplied to the task function in this case zero The fifth parameter is a null terminated string that names the task for debug purposes The sixth parameter is the size of the stack in words The seventh parameter is the pointer to the stack The last parameter is for systems that have a seperate call stack and is the number of words to reserve for the call stack You can change the priority of a task using the ctl_task_set_priority function call which takes a pointer to a task structure and the new priority as parameters ctl_task_set_priority amp mainTask 0 Example The following example turns main
233. input item or in the case of a n directive the count of input characters is converted to a type appropriate to the conversion specifier If the input item is not a matching sequence the execution of the directive fails this condition is a matching failure Unless assignment suppression was indicated by a the result of the conversion is placed in the object pointed to by the first argument following the format argument that has not already received a conversion result If this object does not have an appropriate type or if the result of the conversion cannot be represented in the object the behavior is undefined Length modifiers The length modifiers and their meanings are E i aT Ful ha E hW Specifies that a following d i o u x X or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to signed char or pointer to unsigned char an A ee ee A Aal faa t W Specifies that a following d i o u x X or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to short int or unsigned short int 2 igt ee ee ee ee Ea E T Specifies that a following d i o u x x or n conversion specifier applies to an argument with type pointer to long int or unsigned long int that a following e E F g or G conversion specifier applies to an
234. int32 TargetInterface peekUint32 address TargetInterface peekUint32 reads a 32 bit unsigned integer from target memory from address and returns it TargetInterface peekWord TargetInterface peekWord address TargetInterface peekWord reads a word as an unsigned integer from target memory from address and returns it Targetinterface pokeByte TargetInterface pokeByte address data TargetInterface pokeByte writes the byte data to address in target memory Targetinterface pokeUint16 TargetInterface pokeUint16 address data TargetInterface pokeUint16 writes data as a 16 bit value to addressin target memory Targetinterface pokeUint32 TargetInterface pokeUint32 address data TargetInterface pokeUint32 writes data as a 32 bit value to addressin target memory TargetInterface pokeWord TargetInterface pokeWord address data TargetInterface pokeWord writes data as a word value to addressin target memory Chapter 14 Target script file 163 Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis 164 Targetinterface pokeBytes TargetInterface pokeBytes TargetInterface pokeBytes address data TargetInterface pokeBytes writes the array data containing 8 bit data to target memory at address Targetinterface peekMultUint16 TargetInterface peekMultUint16 address length TargetInterface peekMultUint16 reads length unsign
235. ion of your project When you exit CrossWorks details of your current session are stored in a session file Session files are text files with the file extension hzs that contain details such as files you have opened in the editor and breakpoints you set in the breakpoint window Creating a project You can create a new solution for each project or alternatively create projects in an existing solution To create a new project in an existing solution do the following From the Project menu click New then New Project to display the New Project wizard Inthe New Project wizard select the type of project you wish to create and where it will be placed Ensure that the Add the project to current solution radio button is checked Click OK to go to next stage of project creation or Cancel to cancel the creation The project name must be unique to the solution and ideally the project directory should be relative to the solution directory The project directory is where the project system will use as the current directory when it builds your project Once complete the project explorer displays the new solution project and files of the project To add another project to the solution repeat the above steps Creating a new project in a new solution To create a new project in a new solution do the following From the File menu click New then New Project to display the New Project dialog Chapter4 Project management
236. is Description Important notes Portability See also setjmp Synopsis Description Portability See also include lt setjmp h gt void longjmp jmp_buf env int val longjmp restores the environment saved by the most recent invocation of setjmp with the corresponding jmp_buf argument If there has been no such invocation or if the function containing the invocation of setjmp has terminated execution in the interim the behavior iof longjmp undefined When the environment is restored all accessible objects have values have state as of the time the longjmp function was called After longjmp is completed program execution continues as if the corresponding invocation of setjmp had just returned the value specified by val Note that longjmp cannot cause setjmp to return the value 0 if val is 0 setjmp returns the value 1 Objects of automatic storage duration that are local to the function containing the invocation of the corresponding setjmp that do not have volatile qualified type and have been changed between the setjmp invocation and longjmp call are indeterminate longjmp conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 setjmp page 277 include lt setjmp h gt int setjmp jmp_buf env setjmp saves its calling environment in the jmp_buf argument env for later use by the longjmp function On return is from a direct invocation setjmp returns the value zero If the return is from a call to
237. is compiled the Preprocessor Definitions property will take all of the values defined at the file project and solution level Note that the properties window will not show the inherited values of an aggregating property solution Preprocessor Definitions SolutionDef projectl Preprocessor Definitions filel Preprocessor Definitions file2 Preprocessor Definitions File1Def project2 Preprocessor Definitions ProjectDef filel Preprocessor Definitions file2 Preprocessor Definitions File2Def In the above example the files will be compiled with these Preprocessor Definitions projectt file1 SolutionDef project1 file2 SolutionDef File1Def project2 file1 SolutionDef ProjectDef project2 file2 SolutionDef ProjectDef File2Def Configurations and property values Property values are defined for a configuration so you can have different values for a property for different builds A given configuration can inherit the property values of other configurations When the project system requires a property value it checks for the existence of the property value in current configuration and then in the set of inherited configurations You can specify the set of inherited configurations using the Configurations dialog Chapter4 Project management There is a special configuration named Common that is always inherited by a configuration The Common configuration enables property values to be set that will apply
238. is used to define a script to execute to reset and configure the target The aim of the reset script is to get the processor into a known state When the script has executed the processor should be reset stopped on the first instruction and configured appropriately As an example the following script demonstrates the reset script for an Evaluator 7T target board with a memory configuration that re maps SRAM to start from 0x00000000 The Evaluator7T_Reset function carries out the standard ARM reset and stops the processor prior to executing the first instruction The Evaluator7T_ResetWithRamAtZero function calls this reset function and then configures the target memory by accessing the configuration registers directly See TargetInterface Object for a description of the TargetInterface object which is used by the reset script to access the target hardware function Evaluator7T_Reset TargetInterface setNSRST 0 TargetInterface setICEBreakerBreakpoint 0 0x00000000 OxFFFFFFFF 0x00000000 OxFFFFFFFF 0x100 OxF7 TargetInterface setNSRST 1 TargetInterface waitForDebugState 1000 TargetInterface trst Chapter 14 Target script file 159 160 function Evaluator7T_ResetWithRamAtZero Evaluator7T_Reset RRR RR RRR EKER ERE KERR EERE KEKE ERK KERR ERE RRR REE ERK RRR ERE KER ke He ke ERE ke Ae ke ke ke ke e ke KER Register settings for the following memory configuration ROMCONO
239. isets Include offsets of registers from the peripheral base nobitfields Do not generate any definitions for bitfields 328 Chapter 31 mkhdr C C header file generator mkpkg package creator To create a package the program mkpkg can be used The set of files to put into the package should be in the desired location in the StudioDir directory The mkpkg command should be run with StudioDir as the working directory and all files to go into the package must be refered to using relative paths A package must have a package description file that is placed in the StudioDir packages directory The package description file name must end with_package xml If a package is to create entries in the new project wizard then it must have a file name project_templates xml For example a package MyNewTarget would supply the following files A Project Templates file format page 341 file called targets MyNewTarget project_templates xml The StudioDir relative files that define the functionality of the package A package description file called packages MyNewTarget_package xml The package file MyNewTarget hzq would be created using the following command line mkpkg c packages MyNewTarget hzq targets MyNewTarget project_templates xm packages MyNewTarget_package xml You can list the contents of the package using the t option mkpkg t packages MyNewTarget hzq You can remove an entry from a package using the d option
240. ith the value zero for the base argument The corresponding argument must be a pointer to signed integer o Matches an optionally signed octal integer whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtol function with the value 18 for the base argument The corresponding argument must be a pointer to signed integer u Matches an optionally signed decimal integer whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtoul function with the value 10 for the base argument The corresponding argument must be a pointer to unsigned integer x Matches an optionally signed hexadecimal integer whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtoul function with the value 16 for the base argument The corresponding argument must be a pointer to unsigned integer e f g Matches an optionally signed floating point number whose format is the same as expected for the subject sequence of the strtod function The corresponding argument shall be a pointer to floating Some CrossWorks library variants do not support the e and F conversion specifiers in order to reduce code and data space requirements please ensure that you have selected the correct library in the Scanf Floating Point Support property of the project if you use these conversion specifiers c Matches a sequence of characters of exactly the number specified by the fie
241. itor Navigation Bookmarks Changing text Using the clipboard Drag and drop editing Undo and redo Indentation File management Find and replace Regular expressions Advanced editor features Code templates Memory map editor Package management Chapter 1 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 95 99 100 102 102 107 111 112 114 116 118 120 122 122 125 127 128 130 131 133 139 145 146 148 149 151 153 154 155 157 158 159 166 167 169 169 170 Linking and Section placement CrossStudio Windows Clipboard ring window Build log window Breakpoints window Call stack window Execution counts window Globals window Locals window Memory window Register windows Threads window Trace window Watch window Help window Output window Project explorer Properties window Source navigator window Symbol browser Targets window Target interfaces Macraigor Wiggler 20 and 14 pin Target interface CrossConnect Target interface Segger J Link Target interface ARM Simulator Target interface ARM Target Support Target startup code Startup code Memory map files Project configurations Target script file Program loading ARM Device Specific Target Support Dialogs Debug file search editor Environment options Chapter 16 Part III Chapter 17 Chapter 18 Chapter 19 Chapter 20 Chapter 21 173 173 175 176 177 179 179 180 182 183 183 185
242. ize The optional size of the program section in bytes a Ox prefixed hexadecimal number Project file format CrossStudio project files are held in text files with the hzp extension We anticipate that you may want to edit project files and perhaps generate them so they are structured using XML syntax to enable simple construction and parsing The first entry of the project file defines the XML document type which is used to validate the file format lt DOCTYPE CrossStudio_Project_File gt The next entry is the solution element there can only be one solution element in a project file This specifies the name of solution displayed in the project explorer and also has a version attribute which defines the file format version of the project file Solutions can contain projects projects can contain folder and files and folders can contain folder and files This hierarchy is reflected in the XML nesting for example lt solution version 1 Name solutionname gt lt project Name projectname gt lt file Name filename gt lt folder Name foldername gt lt file Name filename2 gt lt folder gt lt project gt lt solution gt Chapter 35 File formats Note that each entry has a Name attribute Names of project elements must be unique to the solution names of folder elements must be unique to the project however names of files do not need to unique Each file element must have a file_name attribute that is uniqu
243. ject setup wizard prompts you to set some common options for the project Here you can specify an additional file format to be output when the application is linked and what library support to include if you use printf and scanf You can change these settings after the project is created using the Project Explorer Clicking Next displays the files that will be added to the project Chapter2 CrossStudio Tutorial Select files to add to project Files File name Path D Links to system files ert0 s StudioDir source crt0 s RAM_at_Zero_MemoryMap xml StudioDir targets General RAM_at_Zero_MemoryMap xml sram_placement xml Studio Dir targets sram_placement xml Standard_ARM_Startup s Studio Dir targets General Standard_ARM_Startup s Standard_ARM_Target js Studio Dir targets General Standard_ARM_Target js Hh The Links to system files group shows the links that will be created in the project to CrossStudio system files Project links are fully explained in Project management page 43 and we can ignore these for now Clicking Next displays the configurations that will be added to the project Here you can specify the default configurations that will be added to the project Project configurations are fully explained in Project management page 43 and we can ignore these for now Complete the project creation by clicking Finish The Project Explorer shows the overall structure of your project
244. kes place between objects that overlap strncat returns the value of s1 strncat conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt int strncmp const char sl const char s2 size_t n strncmp compares not more than n characters from the array pointed to by s1 to the array pointed to by s2 Characters that follow a null character are not compared Chapter 28 lt string h gt String handling 315 Portability strncpy Synopsis Description Portability strpbrk Synopsis Description Portability strrchr Synopsis Description 316 strncmp returns an integer greater than equal to or less than zero if the possibly null terminated array pointed to by s1 is greater than equal to or less than the possibly null terminated array pointed to by s2 strncmp conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt char strncpy char s1 const char s2 size_t n strncpy copies not more than n characters from the array pointed to by s2 to the array pointed to by s1 Characters that follow a null character in s1 are not copied The behaviour of strncpy is undefined if copying takes place between objects that overlap If the array pointed to by s2 is a string that is shorter than n characters null characters are appended to the copy in the array pointed to by s1 until n characters in all have been written strncpy returns the value of s
245. l of a float frexp Set exponent of a double frexpf Set exponent of a float Idexp Adjust exponent of a double Idexpf Adjust exponent of a float log Compute natural logarithm of a double logf Compute natural logarithm of a float log10 Compute common logarithm of a double log10f Compute common logarithm of a float Power functions sqrt Compute square root of a double sqrtf Compute square root of a float cbrt Compute cube root of a double cbrtf Compute cube root of a float pow Raise a double to a power powf Raise a float to a power Absolute value functions fabs Compute absolute value of a double fabsf Compute absolute value of a float hypot Compute complex magnitude of two doubles hypotf 254 Chapter 28 Compute complex magnitude of two floats Standard C Library Reference acos Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability acosf Synopsis Remainder functions fmod Compute remainder after division of two doubles fmodf Compute remainder after division of two floats modf Break a double to integer and fractional parts modff Break a float to integer and fractional parts Maximum minimum and positive difference functions fmax Compute maximum of two doubles fmaxf Compute maximum of two floats fmin Com
246. lank ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 isspace page 246 include lt ctype h gt int iscntrl int c iscntrl returns nonzero true if and only if the value of the argument c is a control character Control characters have values 0 through 31 and the single value 127 iscntrl conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference isdigit Synopsis Description Portability isgraph Synopsis Description Portability isupper Synopsis Description Portability isprint Synopsis Description Portability ispunct Synopsis include lt ctype h gt int isdigit int c isdigit returns nonzero true if and only if the value of the argument c is a decimal digit 0 through 9 isdigit conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt ctype h gt int isgraph int c isgraph returns nonzero true if and only if the value of the argument c is any printing character except space isgraph conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt ctype h gt int islower int c islower returns nonzero true if and only if the value of the argument c is an uppercase letter a through z islower conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt ctype h gt int isprint int c isprint returns nonzero true if and only if the value of the argument c is any printing character
247. lays two additional columns Code and Data BBX eda Aa T Project Items Code Data E Solution Tutorial 1 project S Tutorial 1 632 2 560 B Source Files eWay m C Output Files E 2 main c E S System Files RAM_at_Zero_MemoryMap xml E sram_placement xml dsm Standard_ARM_Startup s E Standard_ARM_Target js Output Files The Code column displays the total code space required for the project and the Data column displays the total data space required The code and data sizes for each C and assembly source file are estimates but good estimates nontheless Because the linker removes any unreferenced code and data and performs a number of optimizations the sizes for the linked project may not be the sum of the sizes of each individual file The code and data sizes for the project however are accurate As before your numbers may not match these exactly Dependencies The Project Explorer is very versatile not only can you display the code and data sizes for each element of a project and the project as a whole you can also configure the Project Explorer to show the dependencies for a file As part of the compilation process CrossStudio finds and records the relationships between filesthat is it finds which files are dependent upon other files CrossStudio uses these relationships when it comes to build the project again so that it does the minimum amount of work to bring t
248. ld width one if no field width is present in the directive The corresponding argument must be a pointer to the initial element of a character array large enough to accept the sequence No null character is added s Matches a sequence of non white space characters The corresponding argument must be a pointer to the initial element of a character array large enough to accept the sequence and a terminating null character which will be added automatically Chapter 28 lt stdio h gt Input output functions 287 Matches a nonempty sequence of characters from a set of expected characters the scanset The corresponding argument must be a pointer to the initial element of a character array large enough to accept the sequence and a terminating null character which will be added automatically The conversion specifier includes all subsequent characters in the format string up to and including the matching right bracket The characters between the brackets the scanlist compose the scanset unless the character after the left bracket is a circumflex in which case the scanset contains all characters that do not appear in the scanlist between the circumflex and the right bracket If the conversion specifier begins with or 1 the right bracket character is in the scanlist and the next following right bracket character is the matching right bracket that ends the specification otherwise the first f
249. le construction and parsing The first entry of the project file defines the XML document type which is used to validate the file format Chapter 35 Project Templates file format 341 342 lt DOCTYPE Project_Templates_File gt The next entry is the projects element which is used to group a set of new project entries into an XML hierarchy lt projects gt lt project lt projects gt Each project entry has a project element that contains the class of the project attribute caption the name of the project attribute name its type attribute type anda description attribute description lt project caption ARM Evaluator7T name Executable description An executable for an ARM Evaluator7T type Executable gt The project type can be one of Executable a fully linked executable Library a static library Object file an object file Staging a staging project Combining a combining project Externally Built Executable an externally built executable The configurations that are to be created for the project are defined using the configurationelement The configuration element must havea name attribute lt configuration name ARM RAM Release gt The property values to be created for the project are defined using the property element If you have a defined value then you can specify this using the value attribute and optionally set the property ina defined
250. le to determine the appropriate build action to perform on the file So a file with the extension c will be compiled by a C compiler a file with the extension s or asm will be compiled an assembler a file with the extension cpp or cxx will be compiled by a C compiler a file with the object file extension o or hzo will be linked a file with the library file extension a or hza will be linked a file with the extension xml will be opened and its file type determined by the XML document type other file extensions will not be compiled linked with You can modify this behaviour by setting the File Type property of the file with the Common configuration selected in the properties window which enables files with non standard extensions to be compiled by the project system Chapter 4 Project system 45 46 Solution links You can create links to existing project files from a solution which enables you to create hierarchical builds For example you could have a solution that builds a library together with a stub test driver executable You can then link to this solution by right clicking on the solution node of the project explorer and selecting Add Existing Project to be able to use the library from a project in the current solution Project and session files When you have created a solution it is stored in a project file Project files are text files with the file extension hzp that contain an XML descript
251. le will be added to the project Initially a shared version of this file will be added to the project if you want to modify this file you should select the file in the project explorer and then select Import to copy the file to your project directory The entry point of the C runtime startup code is _start In a typical system this will be called by the Target startup code page 154 code after it has initialized the target The C runtime carries out the following actions Initialize the stacks Copy the contents of the data initialized data section from non volatile memory should it be required Copy the contents of the fast section from non volatile memory to SRAM should it be required Initialize the bss section Initialize the heap Call constructors Jump to the main entry point Call destructors Wait in exit loop Stacks The ARM maintains six separate stacks The position and size of these stacks are specified in the project s section placement or memory map file by the following program sections stack System and User mode stack stack_svc Supervisor mode stack _ stack_irq IRQ mode stack Chapter 14 Startup code 155 156 _ stack_fiq FIQ mode stack stack_abt Abort mode stack stack_und Undefined mode stack The crt0 s startup code references these sections and initializes each of the stack pointer registers to point to the
252. lines before the current cursor position that are analysed for context can be altered The smart indent mode can be configured to either indent open and closing braces or the lines following the braces Changing indentation options To change the indentation mode do the following Select the Properties Window Select the Language Properties pane Set the Indent Mode property for the required language To change whether opening braces are indented in smart indent mode do the following Select the Properties Window Select the Language Properties pane Set the Indent Opening Brace property for the required language To change whether closing braces are indented in smart indent mode do the following Select the Properties Window Select the Language Properties pane Chapter8 Basic editing Set the Indent Closing Brace property for the required language Changing indentation context To change number of previous line used for context in smart indent mode do the following Select the Properties Window Select the Language Properties pane Set the Indent Context Lines property for the required language File management To create a file Select File New New File menu item Opening an existing file To open an existing file do one of the following From the File menu click Open Choose the file to open from the dialog Click Open or Type Ctrl O Choose th
253. lls CrossStudio how to communicate with the loader program The various communication mechanisms available are explained in more detail later The Load File Typeproperty may be set to one of the following LIBMEM RPC Loader Calls to LIBMEM library functions will be made directly using a remote prodedure call mechanism Comms Channel Loader The ARM debug comms channel is used to communicate with the loader Chapter14 ARM Target Support Fast Comms Channel Loader The ARM debug comms channel is used to communicate with the loader This scheme is significantly faster at downloading than Comms Channel Loader because it makes the assumption that the loader program is always ready to read data and therefore does not check the ARM comms channel status before transmitting data This may not be suitable for all targets or loaders If you experience reliability problems downloading and verifying programs using this setting you should revert to the Comms Channel Loadersetting RAM Loader The targets RAM is used to communicate with the loader To write your own loader programs you should use the LIBMEM loader library ARM Device Specific Target Support Chapter 14 ARM Device Specific Target Support 167 168 Chapter14 ARM Target Support 15 Dialogs Debug file search editor When a program is built with debugging enabled the debugging information contains paths describing where the source files that went into the program
254. lt 0 errno is set to EDOM and pow returns HUGE_VAL If x lt 0 and y is not an integer value errno is set to EDOM and pow returns HUGE_VAL If y 0 pow returns 1 If y 1 pow returns x If y NaN pow returns NaN If x NaN and y is anything other than 0 pow returns NaN Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Portability powf Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior If x lt 1 or 1 lt x and y Infinity pow returns Infinity If x lt 1 or 1 lt x and y Infinity pow returns 0 If 1 lt x lt 1and y Infinity pow returns 0 If 1 lt x lt 1and y Infinity pow returns Infinity If x 1 or x 1 and y Infinity or y Infinity pow returns NaN If x 0 and y gt 0 and y lt gt NaN pow returns 0 If x 0 and y gt 0 and y lt gt NaN or y not an odd integer pow returns 0 If x 0 and y lt 0 and y lt gt NaN pow returns Infinity If x 0 and y gt 0 and y lt gt NaN or y not an odd integer pow returns Infinity If x 0 and y is an odd integer pow returns 0 If x Infinity and y gt 0 and y lt gt NaN pow returns Infinity If x Infinity and y lt 0 and y lt gt NaN pow returns 0 If x Infinity pow returns pow 0 y If x lt 0 and x lt gt Infinity and y is a non integer pow returns NaN pow conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float powf
255. m and maximum values LONG_MIN Minimum value of a long LONG_MAX Maximum value of a long ULONG_MAX Maximum value of an unsigned long 248 Chapter 28 Standa rd C Library Reference CHAR_BIT Synopsis Description Portability CHAR_MIN Synopsis Description Portability CHAR_MAX Synopsis Description Portability INT_MIN Synopsis Description Portability Long long integer minimum and maximum values LLONG_MIN Minimum value of a long long LLONG_MAX Maximum value of a long long ULLONG_MAX Maximum value of an unsigned long long include lt limits h gt define CHAR_BIT 8 CHAR_BIT is the number of bits for smallest object that is not a bit field byte CHAR _BIT conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define CHAR_MIN 0 CHAR_MIN is the minimum value for an object of type char CHAR_MIN conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define CHAR_MAX 255 CHAR_MAX is the maximum value for an object of type char CHAR_MAX conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt limits h gt define INT_MIN processor dependent value INT_MIN is the minimum value for an object of type int For processors where an integer is held in 16 bits INT_MIN is 32768 and for processors where an integer is held in 32 bits INT_MIN is 2147483648 INT_MIN conforms to I
256. m in hexadecimal OX Displays the selected item as a signed decimal g Displays the selected item as a character or Unicode character Sets the displayed range in the active memory window to the Be where the selected item is stored l Sorts the registers alphabetically by name a Sorts the registers numerically by address or register number g default Using the register window Both CPU registers and special function registers are shown in the main part of the Registers window When the program stops at a breakpoint or is stepped the Register windows automatically update to show the current values of the registers Items that have changed since they that were previously displayed are highlighted in red Chapter 12 CrossStudio Windows Showing the Registers window To display register window 7 if it is hidden do one of the following From the View menu click Other Windows then Registers n or From the Debug menu click Debug Windows then Registers n or Type Ctrl T R n or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Other Windows then Registers n Displaying CPU registers The values of the CPU registers displayed in the registers window depend up upon the selected context The selected context can be The register state the CPU stopped in The register state when a function call occurred selected using the Call Stack window
257. mented by endDebugAccess The initial processor state is recorded on the first nested call to beginDebugAccessand this state is restored when the final endDebugAccess is called causing the count to return to it initial state Targetinterface delay Synopsis TargetInterface delay milliseconds Description TargetInterface delay waits for milliseconds milliseconds Chapter 14 Target script file 161 162 Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis TargetInterface endDebugAccess TargetInterface endDebugAccess alwaysRun Restore the target run state recorded at the first nested call to beginDebugAccess See beginDebugAccess for more information If alwaysRun is non zero the processor will exit debug state on the last nested call to endDebugAccess Targetinterface eraseBytes TargetInterface eraseBytes address length TargetInterface eraseBytes erases a block of erasable memory addressis the start address of the block to erase and length is the number of bytes to erase TargetInterface executeFunction TargetInterface executeFunction address r0 timeout TargetInterface executeFunction executes a function on the target addressis the address of the function entry point r0 is the value to set register r0 on entry to the function in effect the first parameter to the function and timeout is the timeout value in milliseconds to wai
258. more characters and to match exactly one character The symbols are filtered and redisplayed as you type into the combo box Typing the first few characters of a symbol name is usually enough to narrow the display to the symbol you need One thing to note is that the C compiler prefixes all high level language symbols with an underscore character so the variable extern int u or the Chapter 12 Symbol browser 137 138 function void fn void have low level symbol names _u and _fn The symbol browser uses the low level symbol name when displaying and filtering so you must type the leading underscore to match high level symbols Finding symbols with a common prefix To display symbols that start with a common prefix do the following MRM Type the required prefix into the combo box optionally followed by a n For instamce to display all symbols that start with i2c_ symbols are displayed you don t need to add a trailing type i2c_ and all matching in this case as it is implied Finding symbols with a common suffix To display symbols that end with a common suffix do the following Type into the combo box followed by the required suffix For instamce to display all symbols that end in _data type _data and all matching symbols are displayed in this case the leading is required Jumping to the definition of a symbol Once you have found the symbol you re intereste
259. mware Version The J Link s firmware version J Link DLL File The file path locating the the JLink ARM dll to use The JLinkARM dll is part of the J Link ARM software and documentation pack which comes with J Link and is also available for download from the Segger web site Speed The JTAG clock frequency JTAG properties Identify Target Specifies whether the target should be identified on connection Use this setting with caution as setting this to No disables the checks carried out on connection that the JTAG interface is functioning correctly and may make an malfunctioning JTAG connection appear as if it is working Loader properties Erase All If set to Yes all of the target s FLASH memory will be erased prior to downloading the application This can be used to speed up download of large programs as it generally quicker to erase a whole device rather than individual segments If set to No only the areas of FLASH containing the program being downloaded will be erased Erase All Timeout The timeout period for an erase all operation in milliseconds Target properties Debug Interface Type The type of debug interface that the target has Note that the value of this property will be automatically set to a project s ARM Debug Interface property on connection Memory Access Timeout The timeout period for memory accesses in milliseconds Processor Endian Specifies the byte order of the target processor Note that the
260. n Backreference to nth captured text Examples The following regular expressions can be used with the editor s search and replace operations To use the regular expression mode the Use regular expression check box must be set in the search and replace dialog Once enabled the regular expressions can be used in the Find what search string The Replace with strings can use the n backreference string to reference any captured strings Find what Replace Description with String Search for any length string containing one or u w d more word characters beginning with the character u and ending in the character d A G Search for any lines ending in a semicolon typedef s S Find C type definition and insert the string ee TEST onto the beginning of the type name Chapter8 Basic editing Advanced editor features Code Templates The editor provides the ability to use code templates A code template is a block of frequently used source code that can be inserted automatically by using a particular key sequence A character is used in the template to indicate the required position of the cursor after the template has been expanded To view code templates Select Edit gt Advanced gt View Code Templates menu item Code templates can either be expanded manually or automatically when the Space key is pressed To expand a code template manually Type a key sequence for example the key
261. n and the Build gt Set Active Build Configuration menu display the active configuration You can change the active configuration using either of these elements Assembler A program that translates low level assembly language statements into executable machine code See Assembler Reference Compiler A program that translates high level statement into executable machine code See C Compiler Reference Integrated development environment A program that supports editing managing building and debugging your programs within a single environment Linker A program that combines multiple relocatable object modules and resolves inter module references to produce an executable program See Linker Reference Project explorer A docking indow that contains a visual representation of the project See Project explorer page 128 408 Chapter 39 Glossary
262. n from RAM in ROM based applications The bss section containing zeroed data is empty The ctors containing the global constructor table is empty The data section containing initialized data is empty The data_load section which is the section that the data section image is loaded from is at the same address as data If the dataand data_load section start addresses differ then the startup code will copy the contents of the data_load section to the data section before the program enters main This feature is required for ROM based applications so that data can be initialized in RAM on startup The dtors section containing the global destructor table is empty The heap section is 1024 bytes in length and located at 0x00000678 Note that the size of the heap can be adjusted by modifying the size of the heapsection in the section placement file sram_placement xml in this example The stack section which contains the User System mode stack is 1024 bytes in length and located at 0x00000A78 Note that the sizes of the stacks can be adjusted by modifying the size of the stack sections in the section placement file sram_placement xml in this example The stack_irq section which contains the IRQ mode stack is 256 bytes in length and located at Ox00000E78 The stack_fiq section which contains the FIQ mode stack is 256 bytes in length and located at 0x00000F78 The stack_abt section which contains the Ab
263. n the result When converting no integer suffix such as U L UL LL ULL is allowed If the value of base is zero the expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign followed by an integer constant If the value of base is between 2 and 36 inclusive the expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign followed by a sequence of letters and digits representing an integer with the radix specified by base The letters from a or A through z or Z represent the values 10 through 35 only letters and digits whose ascribed values are less than that of base are permitted If the value of base is 16 the characters 0x or 0X may optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits following the optional sign The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string starting with the first non white space character that is of the expected form The subject sequence contains no characters if the input string is empty or consists entirely of white space or if the first non white space character is other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is zero the sequence of characters starting with the first digit is interpreted as an integer constant If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is between 2 and 36 it is used as the base for conversion If the subject se
264. namic macro Combini ngRelInpu tPaths is defined to be the list of files in the project relative to the project directory Combine Command String Target Interface Properties These properties are applicable to Executable and Externally Built Executable project types Chapter 36 Target Interface Properties 383 Target Options Property Save Name Descriptio target_attach_s Attach Script String cript The script that is executed when the debugger attaches to the target target_reset_sc Reset Script String ript The script that is executed when the target is reset This script is typically responsibl e for resetting the target and configurin g memory target_run_scri Run Script String pt The script that is executed when the target is released into run state This script is typically responsibl e for re enabling caches previously disabled by the stop script 384 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Save Name Descriptio The script that is executed when the target enters debug state This script is typically responsibl e for disabling or flushing caches target_stop_scr Stop Script String pt Chapter 36 Target Interface Properties 385 Descriptio n Property Save Name Specifies the variant of debug interface that the target has The options are ARM7TDI for ARM7TD MI ARM7 TDMI S and ARM720T cores arm_ta
265. nce Portability See Also ltoa Synopsis Description Portability See Also malloc Synopsis Description Portability rand Synopsis Description Portability If val is negative and radix is 10 the string has a leading minus sign for all other values of radix value is considered unsigned and never has a leading minus sign Iltoa is an extension to the standard C library provided by CrossWorks C itoa page 299 ltoa page 301 ultoa page 309 ultoa page 309 utoa page 310 include lt stdlib h gt char ltoa long val char buf int radix Itoa converts val to a string in base radix and places the result in buf Itoa returns buf as the result If radix is greater than 36 the result is undefined If val is negative and radix is 10 the string has a leading minus sign for all other values of radix value is considered unsigned and never has a leading minus sign Itoa is an extension to the standard C library provided by CrossWorks C itoa page 299 Iltoa page 300 ultoa page 309 ultoa page 309 utoa page 310 include lt stdlib h gt void malloc size_t size malloc allocates space for an object whose size is specified by size and whose value is indeterminate malloc returns a null pointer if the space for the object cannot be allocated from free memory if space for the object can be allocated malloc returns a pointer to the start of the allocated space malloc conforms
266. nd Find in Files results Output window user interface The Output window is divided into a tool bar and the log display Output tool bar Button Description Tree view Shows the log as a tree view Flat view Shows the log as a flat view Showing the Output window To display the Output window if it is hidden do one of the following From the View menu click Output or Type Ctrl Alt O or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Output Using the output window Showing a specific log To display a specific log do one of the following On the Output window tool bar click the Output Pane List From the list click the log to display or From the View menu click Logs and then the log to display or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu Chapter 12 Output window 127 128 From the popup menu click Logs and then the log to display Showing the Build Log To display the build log in the output window do one of the following From the Build menu click Show Build Log or Double click the Target Status panel in the status bar Showing the Target Log To display the target log in the output window do the following From the Target menu click Show Target Log Project explorer The Project Explorer organizes your projects and files and provides quick access to the commands that operat
267. nd the current selection down by one line Shift Left Extend the current selection left by one character Shift Right Extend the current selection right by one character Shift Home Extend the current selection to the beginning of the current line Shift End Extend the current selection to the end of the current line Shift tPageUp Extend the current selection up by one page Shift PageDo Extend the current selection down by one wn page Ctrl Shift Left Extend the current selection to the beginning of the previous word Ctrl Shift Rig Extend the current selection to the end of the ht next word Ctrl Shift Ho Extend the current selection to the beginning me of the file Ctrl Shift End Extend the current selection to the end of the file Ctrl Shift Pag Extend the current selection to the top of the eUp window Ctrl Shift Pag Extend the current selection to the end of the eDown window Ctrl Shift Select the text contained within the nearest delimiter pair Ctrl A Select the entire document Ctrl F8 Select the current line Edit f ee Sort the lines contained within the current oveneed selection into ascending order Sort Ascending 5 Chapter 37 Code editor command summary Keystrokes Menu Description Edit Advanced Sort the lines contained within the current Sort selection into descending order Descending Ctrl C 8 Cirli Insert Edit Copy Copy the current selection into the clipb
268. nes a number of types macros and functions of general utility Types div t Structure containing quotient and remainder after division of ints ldiv t Structure containing quotient and remainder after division of longs lldiv t Structure containing quotient and remainder after division of long longs String to number conversions atoi Convert string to int atol Convert string to long atoll Convert string to long long strtol Convert string to long strtoll Convert string to long long strtoul Convert string to unsigned long strtoull Convert string to unsigned long long Number to string conversions itoa Convert int to string ltoa Convert long to string lltoa Convert long long to string utoa Convert unsigned to string ultoa Convert unsigned long to string ultoa Convert unsigned long long to string Integer arithmetic functions div Divide two ints returning quotient and remainder Idiv Divide two longs returning quotient and remainder Ildiv Divide two long longs returning quotient and remainder Chapter 28 lt stdlib h gt General utilities 295 Pseudo random sequence generation functions RAND_MAX Maximum value returned by rand rand Return next random number in sequence srand Set seed of random number sequence Memory allocation functions calloc Allocate space for an array of objects and initialize them to zero free Frees alloca
269. nnot be allocated from free memory if space for the array can be allocated calloc returns a pointer to the start of the allocated space calloc conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt stdlib h gt div_t div int numer int denom div computes numer denom and numer denom in a single operation div returns a structure of type div_t page 298 comprising both the quotient and the remainder The structures contain the members quot the quotient and rem the remainder each of which has the same type as the arguments numer and denom If either part of the result cannot be represented the behavior is undefined div conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 div_t page 298 include lt stdlib h gt typedef struct int quot int rem div_t div_t stores the quotient and remainder returned by div page 298 div_t conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 div page 298 include lt stdlib h gt void free void ptr free causes the space pointed to by ptr to be deallocated that is made available for further allocation If ptr is a null pointer no action occurs Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Notes Portability itoa Synopsis Description Portability See Also ldiv Synopsis Description Portability See also ldiv_t Synopsis If ptr does not match a pointer earlier returned by calloc malloc
270. ns the value in radians of the inverse circular tangent of y divided by x using the signs of x and y to compute the quadrant of the return value The principal value lies in the interval PI 2 PI 2 radians If x y 0 errno page 247 is set to EDOM and atan2 returns HUGE_VAL atan2f x NaN is NaN atan2f NaN x is NaN atan2f 0 anything but NaN is 0 atan2f 0 anything but NaN is atan2f anything but 0 and NaN 0 is 2 atan2f anything but Infinity and NaN Infinity is 0 atan2f anything but Infinity and NaN Infinity is atan2f Infinity Infinity is 4 atan2f Infinity Infinity is 3 4 atan2f Infinity anything but 0 NaN and Infinity is 2 atan2 conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 atan page 258 include lt math h gt float atan2f float y float x atan2f returns the value in radians of the inverse circular tangent of y divided by x using the signs of x and y to compute the quadrant of the return value The principal value lies in the interval PI 2 PI 2 radians Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability See Also atanf Synopsis Description Portability atanh Synopsis Description Fast math library IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability If x y 0 errno page 247 is set to EDOM and atan2f returns HUGE_VALF atan2f x NaN is NaN at
271. nt i for i 1 i lt 10 i w hepug print factorial of 4 is sd n d factorial il wy The status bar also updates to indicate two build errors and shows the first error message Chapter2 Building projects 21 22 O Disconnected 1 Ove ReaD u To correct the error change the return type of factorial from voidto int inits prototype To move the cursor to the line containing the next error type F4 or from the Search menu click Next Location The cursor is now positioned at the debug_printf statement which is missing a terminating semicolonadd the semicolon to the end of the line Using F4 again indicates that we have corrected all errors O Disconnected 2 ove READ in 12 col 1 7 Pressing F4 again wraps around and moves the cursor to the first error and you can use Shift F4 or Previous Location in the Search menu to move back through errors Now that the errors are corrected compile the project again The build log still shows that we have a problem Output R lo EE Build active project 141 ms 1 emor Building Tutorial in configuration ARM RAM Debug 1 error Linking Tutorial eff 1 eror c users je develop Am debug am gec bin d X nostdlib 0x00000000 omagic EL TC ARM Projects ARM RAM Debug Idscript tmp Mz ARM RAM Debug main o text 0x28 In function main Ci undefined ref
272. nt in a section placement file has a name attribute Names should be unique within a hierarchy level Within a Root element there are MemorySegment elements These correspond to memory regions that are defined in a memory map file that will be used in conjunction with the section placement file when linking a program lt Root name Flash Placement gt lt MemorySegment name FLASH gt A MemorySegment contains ProgramSection elements which represent program sections created by the C C compiler and assembler The order of ProgramSection elements within a MemorySegment element represents the order in which the sections will be placed when linking a program The first ProgramSection will be placed first and the last ProgramSection will be placed last lt Root name My Board gt lt MemorySegment name FLASH gt lt ProgramSection name text gt Chapter 35 Section Placement file format 339 340 ProgramSection elements have the following attributes alignment The required alignment of the program section a decimal number inputsections An expression describing the input sections to be placed in this section This is typically the name of the section enclosed in name name load If Yes then the section is loaded If No then the section isn t loaded runin This species the section to copy this section to start The optional start address of the program section a Ox prefixed hexadecimal number s
273. o connect to the source control system do the following From the Project menu click Source Control then Connect This displays a source control system specific dialog that enables you specify which source control database to connect to and to enter passwords etc This dialog will reappear each time you load the solution to provide you with the opportunity to cancel source control connection Mapping files In order to map local files to those in the source control database the project file is taken to be the root of the project hierarchy The first time CrossWorks tries to check the source control status of the project file it will prompt you to specify the location of this file in the source control database This mapping will be stored in the session file so you won t need to specify the mapping each time the project is loaded If you cancel at the prompt to specify the location of a project file in the source control database use Project Source Control Add To Source Control to make CrossWorks prompt again If a project directory is defined for a project file then this will be prepended to the filename in the project when mapping to files in the source control system Note that only relative project directories and filenames are supported Using source control Once you have configured source control in CrossStudio you can use the CrossStudio features to manipulate files in the source control system Adding files to source cont
274. o the Cycle Grouping tool button From the popup menu click Group By Section or From the Tools menu click Symbol Browser then Group By Section The Cycle Grouping tool button icon will change to indicate that the symbol browser is now grouping symbols by section Grouping symbols by type When you group symbols by type each symbol is grouped underneath the type of symbol that it is Each symbol is classified as one of the following An Equate has an absolute value and is not defined as relative to or inside a section A Function is a symbol that is defined by a high level code sequence A Variable is defined by a high level data declaration A Label is a symbol that is defined by an assembly language module Label is also used when high level modules are compiled with debugging information turned off To group symbols by source type do the following On the Symbol Browser tool bar click the arrow next to the Cycle Grouping tool button From the popup menu click Group By Type or From the Tools menu click Symbol Browser then Group By Type The Cycle Grouping tool button icon will change to indicate that the symbol browser is now grouping symbols by type Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows Grouping symbols by source file When you group symbols by source file each symbol is grouped underneath the source file that it is defined in Symbols that are absolute are not defined within a sourc
275. o the default execution context using Show Next Statement Writing threads js The JavaScript program contained in threads js must be have a named function called update which is called when the threads window is refreshed The threads window is updated using the following JavaScript interface Threads newqueue queuename Threads add threadname threadpriority threadstate registers The Threads newqueue function takes a string argument and creates a new top level entry in the threads window Subsequent threads that are added to this window will go under this The Threads add function takes a string argument for the thread name an integer argument for the thread priority a string argument for the current state of the thread and finally an array or null containing the execution context of the thread registers The array containing the registers should contain the entries in the order they are displayed in the CPU registers display typically this will be in register number order e g r0 r1 and so on To generate the thread lists you need to access the debugger from the JavaScript program To do this you can use the JavaScript interface Debug evaluate expression which will evaluate the string argument as a debug expression and return the result The returned result will be an object if you evaluate an expression that denotes a structure or an array If the expression denotes an structure then each field can be acce
276. oard Ctrl X Copy the current selection into the clipboard Edit Cut and remove the selected text from the Shift Delete document Ctrl V Edit Paste Insert the contents of the clipboard into the Shift Insert document at the current caret position Ctrl L Cut the current line or selection Ctrl Shift L Delete the current line or selection Edit omm Empty the current contents of the clipboard Clipboard Edit Ctrl F2 Bookmarks Add or remove a bookmark to the current line Toggle Bookmark Edit F2 Bookmarks Move the caret to the next bookmark Next Bookmark Edit Bookmarks Shift F2 Move the caret to the previous bookmark Previous Bookmark Edit Move the caret to the first bookmark in the Bookmarks d t First Bookmark Pare Edit A Move the caret to the last bookmark in the Bookmarks document Last Bookmark Poa Edit Ctrl Shift F2 Docs Remove all bookmarks from the document Clear All Bookmarks Alt F2 Add a permanent bookmark on the current line Chapter 37 ARM Simulator Properties 401 Keystrokes Menu Description Ctrl F Edit Find Display the find dialog Ctrl H Edit Replace Display the replace dialog F3 Find the next occurrence of the previous search ahead of the current caret position Find the next occurrence of the previous PE search behind the current caret position Ctrl Find the matching delimiter character for the nearest delimiter character on
277. occured 226 Example This example uses a timeout and tests the return result to see if the timeout occured If you want to post a byte and you dont want to block e g from an interrupt service routine you can use the ctl_byte_queue_post_nb function if ctl_byte_queue_post_nb amp m1 45 0 queue is full This example tests the return result to see if the post failed You can receive a byte with an optional timeout using the ctl_byte_queue_receive function void msg ctl_byte_queue_receive amp ml amp msg 0 0 This example receives the oldest byte in the byte queue if ctl_byte_queue_receive amp ml amp msg 1 ctl_get_current_time 1000 0 timeout occured This example uses a timeout and tests the return result to see if the timeout occured If you want to receive a byte and you dont want to block e g from an interrupt service routine you can use the ctl_byte_queue_receive_nb function if ctl_byte_queue_receive_nb amp m1 amp msg 0 queue is empty The following example illustrates usage of a byte queue to implement the producer consumer problem CTL_BYTE_QUEUE_t m1 void queue 20 void task1 void ctl_byte_queue_post isni void i 0 0 i m void task2 void i void msg ctl_byte_queue_receive amp ml amp msg 0 0 as int main void Chapter22 Byte queues ctl_byte_queue_init amp m1 queue 20 Chapter
278. of fixed panels and the other that is used for messages The message area The leftmost part of the status bar is a message area that is used for things such as status tips progress information warnings errors and other notifications The status bar panels You can show or hide the following panels on the status bar Panel Description Displays the connected target interface When connected this panel contains the selected target interface name and if applicable the processor that the target interface is connected to The LED icon flashes green when Target device status programs are running is solid red when stopped at a breakpoint and is yellow when connected but not running a program Double clicking this panel displays the Targets window and ight clicking it brings up the Target menu Displays the number of processor cycles run by the executing program This panel is only visible if the currently connected target supports performance Cycle count panel counters which can report the total number of cycles executed Double clicking this panel resets the cycle counter to zer and right clicking this panel beings up the Cycle Count menu Indicates whether the current editor is in insert or Insert overwrite status overwrite mode If the editor is in overwrite mode the OVR panel is highlighted otherwise it is dimmed Indicates whether the editor is in read only mode If the Read only status editor is editing a read only fil
279. of the binary editor continues to display the original file name after a Save as operation Ctrl Z Edit Undo Undoes the last operation Ctrl Y Edit Redo Redoes the last undone operation Insert Enable or disable overwrite mode When in text input mode the currently selected byte will be replaced with the ASCII character code for the input key e g OF would become 66 when f is pressed When not in text Ctrl T input mode the currently selected byte is replaced with the HEX value of the input keys e g 00 would become OF when f is pressed 00 would become FA if the f then a keys were pressed Edit Advanced Toggle the write permissions of the current Toggle Read file Only Allows the file to be a fixed size or a variable Ctrl E size Extends the file when the last address is Down or Right selected and the file is write enabled the new bytes will be initialised to 00 406 Chapter 38 Binary editor command summary Glossary The following terms are in common use and are used throughout the CrossWorks documentation Active project The project that is currently selected in the Project Explorer The Build tool bar contains a dropdown and the Project gt Set Active Project menu contains an item that display the active project You can change the active project using either of these elements Active configuration The configuration that is currently selected for building The Build too bar contains a dropdow
280. oint Previous Breakpoint Alt Shift F9 Selects the previous breakpoint in the Breakpoint window and moves the cursor to the statement or instruction associated with that breakpoint Debug Windows menu The Debug Windows menu provides commands to activate debugging windows The Debug Windows menu is a submenu of the Debug menu Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary The Debug Windows menu ih Breakpoints Ctrl Alt B call stack Ctrl Alt 5 G Locals Ctrl Alt L El Globals Ctrl Alt G Threads Ctrl alt D Registers1 Ctrl T R 1 EJ Registers2 Ctri T R 2 Registers 3 Ctrl T R 3 E Registers4 Ctri T R 4 G watch 1 Ctrl T W 1 Ge watch 2 Ctrl T W 2 Jp watch 3 Ctrl T W 3 Jp watch 4 Ctrl T W 4 E Memory 1 Ctrl T M 1 E Memory 2 Ctrl T M 2 E Memory 3 Ctrl T M 3 E memory 4 Ctrl T M 4 lig Execution Trace E Execution Counts Debug Windows commands Menu command Keystroke Description Breakpoints Ctrl Alt B Activates the Breakpoints window See Breakpoints window page 102 Call Stack Ctrl Alt4 S oo the Call Stack window See Call stack window page Locals Ctrl Alt L Activates the Locals window See Locals window page 114 Globals Ctrl Alt G Activates the Globals window See Globals window page 112 Threads Ctrl Alt D Activates the Threads window See Threads window page 120 Registers 1 Ctrl T R 1 vu the first Register window See Register windows page
281. oject1 file2 DebugSolutionDef CommonFile1Def DebugFile1 Def CommonSolutionDef DebugSolutionDef project2 file1 ProjectDef project2 file2 ComonSolutionDef DebugSolutionDef ProjectDef File2Def and the files will be compiled with these Preprocessor Definitions when in Release configuration projectt file1 CommonSolutionDef ReleaseSolutionDef CommonSolutionDef ReleaseSolutionDef project1 file2 CommonFile1Def Chapter 4 Project properties 51 52 projectt file1 CommonSolutionDef ReleaseSolutionDef CommonSolutionDef ReleaseSolutionDef project2 file1 ProjectDef roject2 file2 ComonSolutionDef ReleaseSolutionDef PES ProjectDef File2Def Project configurations Project configurations are used to create different software builds for your projects A configuration is used to define different project property values for example the output directory of a compilation can be put into different directories which are dependent upon the configuration By default when you create a solution youll get some default project configurations created Selecting a configuration You can set the configuration that you are building and debugging with using the combo box of the Build tool bar or the Build gt Set Active Build Configuration menu option Creating a configuration You can create your own configurations using Build gt Build Configurations which will show the Configurations dialog The New button will produce a
282. ollowing right bracket character is the one that ends the specification If a character is in the scanlist and is not the first nor the second where the first character is a nor the last character it is treated as a member of the scanset Some CrossWorks library variants do not support the conversion specifier in order to reduce code and data space requirements please ensure that you have selected the correct library in the Scanf Classes Supported property of the project if you use this conversion specifier p Reads a sequence output by the corresponding p formatted output conversion The corresponding argument must be a pointer to a pointer to void w No input is consumed The corresponding argument shall be a pointer to signed integer into which is to be written the number of characters read from the input stream so far by this call to the formatted input function Execution of a en directive does not increment the assignment count returned at the completion of execution of the fscanf function No argument is converted but one is consumed If the conversion specification includes an assignment suppressing character or a field width the behavior is undefined Matches a single character no conversion or assignment occurs Laat oF Note that the C99 width modifier 1 used in conjuction with the c s and conversion specifiers is not supported and
283. on Description X Displays the selected item in binary X Displays the selected item in octal Bing Displays the selected item in decimal Big Displays the selected item in hexadecimal x Displays the selected item as a signed decimal g Displays the selected item as a character or Unicode character Sets the displayed range in the active memory window to the where the selected item is stored Sorts the local variables numerically by address or register al Sorts the local variables alphabetically by name 3 5 number default Using the Locals window The Locals window shows the local variables of the active function when the debugger is stopped The contents of the Locals window changes when you use the Debug Location tool bar items or select a new frame in the Call Stack window When the program stops at a breakpoint or is stepped the Locals window automatically updates to show the active stack frame Items that have changed since they that were previously displayed are highlighted in red Showing the Locals window To display the Locals window if it is hidden do one of the following From the View menu click Other Windows then Locals or From the Debug menu click Debug Windows then Locals or Type Ctrl Alt L or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu Chapter 12 Locals window 115 116 From the popup menu click Other Windows then Locals
284. on into the target Setting a breakpoint CrossStudio will run a program until it hits a breakpoint We ll place a breakpoint on the call to debug_printf in main c To set the breakpoint Move the cursor to the line containing debug_printf and do one of the following On the Build tool bar click the Toggle Breakpoint button K or Type F9 Alternatively you can set a breakpoint without moving the cursor by clicking in the gutter of the line to set the breakpoint on Help main c include lt cross_studio_io h gt int factorial int void main void int i for i 0 i lt 10 i eS debug_printf Factorial of d is sa n i factorial i The gutter displays an icon on lines where the breakpoints are set The Breakpoints window updates to show where each breakpoint is set and whether it s set disabled or invalid you can find more detailed information in the Breakpoints window page 102 section The breakpoints that you set are stored in the session file associated with the project which means that your breakpoints are remembered if you exit and re run CrossStudio Starting the application You can now start the program in one of these ways From the Debug menu click Start Debugging or On the Build tool bar click the Start Debugging button Chapter2 CrossStudio Tutorial Type F5 The workspace will change from the standard Editing workspace to the
285. or and place them onto the clipboard Select Edit Clipboard Copy Lines menu item To copy whole lines from the current editor and append them onto the end of the clipboard Select Edit Clipboard Copy Lines Append menu item To copy bookmarked lines from the current editor place them onto the clipboard Select Edit Clipboard Copy Marked Lines menu item To copy bookmarked lines from the current editor and append them onto the end of the clipboard Select Edit Clipboard Copy Marked Lines Append menu item Cutting text To cut the selected text to the clipboard do one of the following From the Edit menu click Cut or Type Ctrl X or Type Shift Del To cut selected text from the current editor and append them onto the end of the clipboard Select Edit Clipboard Cut Append menu item Chapter8 Basic editing To cut whole lines from the current editor and place them onto the clipboard Select Edit Clipboard Cut Lines menu item To cut whole lines from the current editor and append them onto the end of the clipboard Select Edit Clipboard Cut Lines Append menu item To cut bookmarked lines from the current editor and place them onto the clipboard Select Edit Clipboard Cut Marked Lines menu item To cut bookmarked lines from the current editor and append them onto the end of the clipboard Select Edit Clipboard Cut Marked Lines Append menu item Pasting text
286. ormat of a register do one of the following Right click the item to change From the popup menu select the format to display the item in or Click the item to change On the Registers window tool bar select the format to display the item in Modifying register values To modify the value of a register do one of the following Click the value of the register to modify Enter the new value for the register Prefix hexadecimal numbers with 0x binary numbers with 0b and octal numbers with 0 r Right click the value of the register to modify From the popup menu select one of the operations to modify the register value Modifying the saved register value of a function or thread may not be supported Threads window The threads window displays the set of executing contexts on the target processor structured as a set of queues The executing contexts are supplied to the threads window using a JavaScript program called threads js that must be in the current active project When the JavaScript program executes when the application stops it creates entries in the threads window that contain the name priority and status of the thread together with the saved execution context register state of the thread By double Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows clicking on one of the entries in the threads window the debugger is located to it s saved execution context you can put the debugger back int
287. ort mode stack is 0 bytes in length The stack_sve section which contains the Supervisor mode stack is 0 bytes in length The stack_und section which contains the Undefined mode stack is 0 bytes in length To drill down open the text node by double clicking it CrossStudio displays the individual functions that have been placed in memory and their sizes Here we can see that main is 104 bytes in size and is placed in memory between addresses 0x00000270 and 0x000002D7 inclusive Just as in the Project Explorer you can double click a function and CrossStudio moves the cursor to the line containing the definition of that function so you can easily navigate around your application using the Symbol Browser 26 Chapter2 CrossStudio Tutorial Printing Symbol Browser contents You can print the contents of the Symbol Browser by focusing the Symbol Browser window and selecting Print from the File menu or Print Previewif you want to see what it will look like before printing CrossStudio prints only the columns that you have selected for display and prints items in the same order they are displayed in the Symbol Browser so you can choose which columns to print and how to print symbols by configuring the Symbol Browser display before you print We have touched on only some of the features that the Symbol Browser offers to find out more refer to Symbol browser page 133 where it is described in detail Using the debugger Our sampl
288. pe Ctrl F7 Chapter 5 Building your applications 59 Correcting errors after building The results of a build are displayed in the Build Log in the Output window Errors are highlighted in red and warnings are highlighted in yellow Double clicking an error warning or note will move the cursor to the appropriate source line You can move forward and backward through errors using Search gt Next Location and Search gt Previous Location 60 Chapter5 Building projects Source code control CrossWorks supports team development of applications using source code control At present CrossWorks integrates with Microsoft Visual SourceSafe SourceGear SourceOffSite 3 5 1 and CVS The source code control integration capability provides Connecting to the source control database sometimes called a repository Mapping files in the project system to those in the source code control system Showing the source control status of files and projects Adding and removing files and projects from source control Typical source control operations such as Add to source control Remove from source control and so on Configuring source control You need to configure CrossStudio to use source control in your projects This section describes how to configure CrossStudio and your projects for source control Connecting to the source control system Before you can check files in and out of source code control you must connect to the source control system T
289. port When a target specific executable project is created using the Creating a project page 14 the following default files are added to the project Target_Startup s The Target startup code page 154 code crt0 s The CrossWorks standard Startup code page 155 code Target_MemoryMap xml The Memory map files page 157 file for the board Note that for some target s a general linker placement file may not be suitable In these cases there will be two memory map files one for a Flash build and one for a RAM build flash_placement xml The linker placement file for a Flash build sram_placement xml The linker placement file for a RAM build Target_Target js The Target script file page 159 Initially shared versions of these files are added to the project if you want to modify any these files you should select the file in the project explorer and then click the Import option from the context menu This will copy a writeable version of the file into your project directory and change the path in the project explorer to be that of the local file You will then be able to make changes to the local file without effecting the shared copy of the file The following list describes the typical flow of a C program created using CrossStudio s project templates The processor starts executing at address 0x0000000 which is the reset exception vector The exception vector table can be found in the Target startup code page
290. public protected private 3 Groups objects by type functions classes structures variables im Move the cursor to the statement where the object is defined Move the cursor to the statement where the object is declared If more than one declaration exists an arbitrary one is chosen Manually re parses any changed files in the project Source navigator display The main part of the Source Navigator window an overview of the functions classes and variables of your application CrossStudio displays these icons to the left of each object Icon Description Structure or namespace A C or C structure or a C namespace e C class A C class Private function A C member function that is declared ae private or a function that is declared with static linkage Protected function A C member function that is declared TO protected Chapter 12 Source navigator window 131 132 Icon Description Public function A C member function that is declared public or a function that is declared with extern linkage Private variable A C member variable that is declared ce private or a variable declared with static linkage Protected variable A C member variable that is declared Pe protected Public variable A C member variable that is declared public L or a variable that is declared with extern linkage Showing the Source Navigator window To display the Source Navigator window if it is hid
291. pute minimum of two doubles fminf Compute minimum of two floats Nearest integer functions ceil Compute smallest integer not greater than a double ceilf Compute smallest integer not greater than a float floor Compute largest integer not greater than a double floorf Compute largest integer not greater than a float include lt math h gt double acos double x acos returns the principal value in radians of the inverse circular cosine of x The principal value lies in the interval 0 PI radians If x gt 1 errno is set to EDOM and acos returns HUGE_VAL If x is NaN acos returns x If x gt 1 acos returns NaN with invalid signal acos conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float acosf float x Chapter 28 lt math h gt Mathematics 255 Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math behavior Portability acosh Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability acoshf Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability asin Synopsis 256 acosf returns the principal value in radians of the inverse circular cosine of x The principal value lies in the interval 0 PI radians If x gt 1 errno is set to EDOM and acosf returns HUGE_VAL If x is NaN acosf returns x If x gt 1 acosf returns NaN with invali
292. quence begins with a minus sign the value resulting from the conversion is negated A pointer to the final string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form no conversion is performed the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer strtol returns the converted value if any If no conversion could be performed zero is returned If the correct value is outside the range of representable values LONG_MIN page 250 or LONG_MAxX page 250 is returned according to the sign of the value if any and the value of the macro errno page 247 is stored in errno page 247 strtol conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Chapter 28 lt stdlib h gt General utilities 305 306 strtoll Synopsis Description include lt stdlib h gt long long int strtoll const char nptr char endptr int base strtoll converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to a long int representation First strtoll decomposes the input string into three parts an initial possibly empty sequence of white space characters as specified by isspace page 246 a subject sequence resembling an integer represented in some radix determined by the value of base and a final string of one or more unrecognized characters including the terminating n
293. r 19 Event sets Semaphores A semaphore is a counter which tasks can wait for to be non zero When a semaphore is non zero and a task waits on it then the semaphore value is decremented and the task continues execution When a semaphore is zero and a task waits on it then the task will be suspended until the semaphore is signalled When a semaphore is signalled and no tasks are waiting for it then the semaphore value is incremented When a semaphore is signalled and tasks are waiting then one of the tasks is made runnable You allocate a semaphore by declaring it as a C variable CTL_SEMAPHORE_t s1 An CTL_SEMAPHORE tis a synonym for an unsigned type so the maximum value of the counter is dependent upon the word size of the processor either 16 or 32 bits You can initialise a semaphore using the ctl_semaphore_init function ctl_semaphore_init amp s1 1 Note that initialisation should be done before any tasks can use a semaphore You can signal a semaphore using the ctl_semaphore_signal function ctl_semaphore_signal amp s1 The highest priority task waiting on the semphore pointed at by s1 will be made runnable by this call If no tasks are waiting on the semaphore then the semaphore value is incremented You can wait for a semaphore with an optional timeout using the ctl_semaphore_wait function 218 ctl_semaphore_wait amp s1 0 0 This example will block the task if the semaphore is zero otherwise it will dec
294. r less than zero if the string pointed to by s1 is greater than equal to or less than the string pointed to by s2 strcmp conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt int strcoll const char sl const char s2 strcoll compares the string pointed to by s1 to the string pointed to by s2 strcoll returns an integer greater than equal to or less than zero if the string pointed to by s1 is greater than equal to or less than the string pointed to by s2 strcoll is not affected by the locale as CrossWorks C provides no locale capability strcoll is provided for compaibility only and is not required in a freestanding implementation according to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt char strcepy char s1 const char s2 strcpy copies the string pointed to by s2 including the terminating null character into the array pointed to by s1 The behaviour of strcpy is undefined if copying takes place between objects that overlap strcpy returns the value of s1 strcpy conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt string h gt size_t strcespn const char s1 const char s2 strespn computes the length of the maximum initial segment of the string pointed to by s1 which consists entirely of characters not from the string pointed to by s2 strespn returns the length of the segment strcspn conforms to ISO IEC 9899 19
295. r replaces the last entry you pasted from the clipboard ring so that you end up with only the last one you selected The item you stop on then becomes the current item Move to another location or cancel the selection You can use Ctrl Shift V to paste the current item again or cycle the clipboard ring to a new item Clicking an item in the clipboard ring makes it the current item Pasting a specific item into a document To paste an item on the clipboard ring directly into the current document do one of the following Move the cursor to the position where you want to paste the item into the document Display the dropdown menu of the item to paste by clicking the arrow to its right From the menu click Paste or Make the item you want to paste the current item by clicking it Move the cursor to the position where you want to paste the item into the document Type Ctrl Shift V Pasting all items into a document To paste all items on the clipboard ring into the current document move the cursor to the position where you want to paste the items into the document and do one of the following From the Edit menu click Clipboard Ring then Paste All or On the Clipboard Ring tool bar click the Paste All button or Type Ctrl R Ctrl V Removing a specific item from the clipboard ring To remove an item from the clipboard ring do the following Chapter 12 Clipboard ring window 101
296. r to the left of the delimiter character to be matched Use Ctrl Shift keys To edit a document elsewhere and then return to your current location add a bookmark The bookmarks presented in this section are temporary bookmarks and their positions are not saved when the file is closed nor when the solution is closed Adding a bookmark To add a temporary bookmark move to the line you want to bookmark and do one of the following On the Text Edit tool bar click the Toggle Bookmark button or From the Edit menu click Bookmarks then Toggle Bookmark or Type Ctrl F2 A temporary bookmark symbol appears next to the line in the indicator margin which shows that the bookmark has been set Moving through bookmarks To navigate forward through temporary bookmarks do one of the following On the Text Edit tool bar click the Next Bookmark button Chapter8 Basic editing or From the Edit menu click Bookmarks then Next Bookmark or Type F2 The editor moves the cursor to the next bookmark set in the document If there is no following bookmark the cursor is moved to the first bookmark in the document To navigate backward through temporary bookmarks do one of the following On the Text Edit tool bar click the Previous Bookmark button or From the Edit menu click Bookmarks then Previous Bookmark or Type Shift F2 The editor moves the cursor to the previous
297. r void argument points to the initial lowest addressed character of the array If an array is accessed beyond the end of an object the behavior is undefined Where an argument declared as size_t n specifies the length of an array for a function n can have the value zero on a call to that function Unless explicitly stated otherwise in the description of a particular function pointer arguments must have valid values on a call with a zero size On such a call a function that locates a character finds no occurrence a function that compares two character sequences returns zero and a function that copies characters copies zero characters Copying functions memcpy Copy memory memmove Safely copy overlapping memory strcpy Copy string Chapter28 Standard C Library Reference strncpy Copy string up to a maximum length Concatenation functions strcat Convert string to int strncat Convert string to long Comparison functions memcmp Compare memory stremp Compare strings strncmp Compare strings up to a maximum length strcoll Collate strings Search functions memchr Search memory for a character strchr Find first occurrence of character within string strespn Compute size of string not prefixed by a set of characters strpbrk Find first occurrence of characters within string strrchr Find last occurrence of character within string strspn Compute size of string prefixed by a set of charact
298. rams to a target using the Targets window To download a program to the currently selected target do the following In the Targets window right click the selected target From the popup menu click Download File From the Download File menu select the type of file to download In the Open File dialog select the executable file to download and click Open to download the file CrossStudio supports the following file formats when downloading a program Binary Intel Hex Motorola S record CrossWorks native object file Texas Instruments text file Verifying downloaded programs You can verify a target s contents against a arbitrary programs held on disk using the Targets window To verify a target s contents against a program do the following In the Targets window right click the selected target Chapter 12 Targets window 143 144 From the popup menu click Verify File From the Verify File menu select the type of file to verify Inthe Open File dialog select the executable file to verify and click Open to verify the file CrossStudio supports the same file types for verification as it does for downloading described above Erasing target memory Usually erasing target memory is done automatically CrossStudio downloads a program but you can erase a target s memory manually To completely erase target memory do the following In the Targets window right click the target to e
299. rase From the popup menu click Erase All To erase part of target memory do the following In the Targets window right click the target to erase From the popup menu click Erase Range Target definition file The target interface information in the targets window is stored in an XML file called the target definition file To change the target definition file used by the targets window do the following From the Tools menu click Options Inthe Environment Options select the Target section Edit the Target definition file entry to change the path to the target definition file Click OK to apply the change the targets window should load the new target definition file Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows 13 Target interfaces A target interface is a mechanism for communicating with and controlling a target A target maybe be a physical hardware device or a simulator CrossStudio has a targets window for viewing and manipulating target interfaces For more information on the targets window see Targets window page 139 Before a target interface can be used it must be connected CrossStudio permits connection to only one target at a time For more information on connecting to target interfaces see Connecting to a target All target interfaces have a set of properties The properties provide information on the connected target and allow the target interface to be configured For more information on v
300. reakpoint to edit From the popup menu click Edit Breakpoint Edit the breakpoint in the Breakpoint dialog Enabling or disabling a breakpoint To toggle the enable state of a breakpoint do one of the following In the Breakpoints window right click the breakpoint to enable or disable From the popup menu click Enable Disable Breakpoint or In the Breakpoints window click the breakpoint to enable or disable Type Ctrl F9 Chaining breakpoints You can chain breakpoints together using the Chain Breakpoint From dialog When a breakpoint is chained from another breakpoint it will not be hit until the breakpoint it has been chained from has been hit Note that when a breakpoint is chained to another breakpoint then that breakpoint will not stop your application executing it is there simply to activate the breakpoint actually breakpoints it is chained to Chained breakpoints have the breakpoint they are chained from displayed as child nodes in the tree display you can remove the chain with the right click context menu Note that when you delete or disable a breakpoint that other breakpoints are chained from then those breakpoints are always activated The chain will also remain in case you wish to reset it Managing breakpoint groups Breakpoints are divided into breakpoint groups You can use breakpoint groups to specify sets of breakpoints that are applicable to a particular project in the solution or for a partic
301. rement the semaphore and continue execution if ctl_semaphore_wait amp s1l 1 ctl _get_current_time 1000 0 timeout occured This example uses a timeout and tests the return result to see if the timeout occured Task synchronisation in an interrupt service routine The following example illustrates synchronising a task with a function called from an interrupt service routine CTL_SEMAPHORE_t s1 void ISRfn do work ctl_semaphore_signal amp s1 void task1 void p while 1 ctl_semaphore_wait amp s1 0 0 Resource serialisation The following example illustrates resource serialisation of two tasks CTL_SEMAPHORE_t s1 1 void task1 void for ctl_semaphore_wait amp s1 0 0 resource has now been acquired ctl_semaphore_signal amp s1 resource has now been released void task2 void for ctl_semaphore_wait amp s1 resource has now been acquired Chapter 20 Semaphores ctl_semaphore_signal amp s1 resource has now been released int main void ctl_semaphore_init ssl 1 Note that s1 is initialised to one without this neither task would acquire the resource Chapter 20 C library support 219 220 Chapter 20 Semaphores Message queues A message queue is a structure that enables tasks to post and receive messages A message is a generic void pointer and as such can be used to send
302. returns Infinity If val lt 0 sqrt returns NaN with invalid signal If val is NaN sqrt returns that NaN with invalid signal for signaling NaN Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Portability tan Synopsis Description Fast math library behaviour IEC 60559 math library behaviour Portability tanf Synopsis Description Fast math library special cases IEC 60559 math library special cases Portability tanh Synopsis Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability sqrtf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 except in the case of domain errors include lt math h gt double tan double x tan returns the radian circular tangent of x If x gt 1049 errno page 247 is set to EDOM and tan returns HUGE_VAL If x is NaN tan returns x If x is Infinity tan returns NaN with invalid signal tan conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float tanf float x tanf returns the radian circular tangent of x If x gt 1049 errno is set to EDOM and tanf returns HUGE_VALF If x is NaN tanf returns x If x is Infinity tanf returns NaN with invalid signal tanf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double tanh double x tanh calculates the hyperbolic tangent of x If x is NaN tanh returns NaN tanh conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 an
303. rget project property group is used to define a script that is executed when the target enters run state This can be when the application is run for the first time or when the Debug Go operation has been carried out after the application has hit a breakpoint or been stopped using the Debug Break operation The aim of the run script is to carry out any target specific operations after the debugger has finished accessing target memory This can be useful to re enable caches previously disabled by the stop script See TargetInterface Object for a description of the TargetInterface object which is used by the run script to access the target hardware TargetInterface Object The TargetInterface object is used to access the currently connected target interface The following section describes the TargetInterface object s member functions TargetInterface beginDebugAccess Synopsis TargetInterface beginDebugAccess Description Put target into debug state if it is not already in order to carry out a number of debug operations The idea behind beginDebugAccess and endDebugAccessis to minimize the number of times the target enters and exits debug state when carrying out a number of debug operations Target interface functions that require the target to be in debug state such as peek and poke also use beginDebugAccessand endDebugAccess to get the target into the correct state A nesting count is maintained incremented by beginDebugAccess and decre
304. rget_de ARM9ITDI ARM Debug Interface Enumeration bug_interface_t for ype ARM920T and ARM9E cores XScale for XScale XSC1 cores XScale7Bit IR for XScale XSC2 cores and ADIVv5 for Cortex M3 cores 386 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Save Name Descriptio Some debug interfaces require a debug handler or monitor to be download ed along arm_target_de with the Debug Handler Load Address String bug_handler_l applicatio oad_address nin order to debug the target This property specifies the address to load the debug handler Chapter 36 Target Interface Properties 387 Descriptio Property Save Name Some debug interfaces require a debug handler or monitor to be download ed along with the applicatio n in order to debug the target This property specifies the file path to the debug handler to use it should be left blank if no debug handler is required arm_target_de Debug Handler File Path Filename bug_handler_fi le_path 388 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Save Name Descriptio Specifies the number of bits to pad the JTAG data register after the data for the ARM processor being targeted As the width of the BYPASS register is normally 1 bit this value is usually equal to the number of devices in the scan chain after the device being targeted arm_linker_jta JTAG Data Bits After Integer ery Chapter 3
305. rol To add a file to the source control system so that it can be controlled checked in checked out and so on do the following In the Project Explorer right click the file to add to source control From the menu click Source Control then Add To Source Control Checking files out To check a file out of the source control system do the following In the Project Explorer right click the file to check out From the menu click Source Control then Check Out or In the Project Explorer click the file to check out From the Project menu click Source Control then Check Out Chapter6 Source code control or In the Project Explorer click the file to check out On the Source Control tool bar click the Check Out button Checking files in To check a file into the source control system do the following In the Project Explorer right click the file to check in From the menu click Source Control then Check In or In the Project Explorer click the file to check out From the Project menu click Source Control then Check In or In the Project Explorer click the file to check out On the Source Control tool bar click the Check In button Undoing check outs To under a check out and return a file on disk to its previous checked in state do the following In the Project Explorer right click the file to undo the check out of From the menu click Sourc
306. roperty You may have a solution that contains several projects that are dependent upon each Typically you might have several executable project and some library projects The Project gt Dependencies dialog specifies the dependencies between projects and to see the affect those dependencies have on the solution build order Note that dependencies can be set on a per configuration basis but the default is for dependencies to be defined in the Common configuration You will also notice that new folders titled Dependencies has appeared in the project explorer These folder contains the list of newly generated files and the files that they where generated from These files can be decoded and displayed in the editor by right clicking on the file and seeing if it supports the View operation If you have the symbols window displayed then it will be updated with the symbol and section information of all executable files that have been built in the solution When CrossStudio builds projects it uses the values set in the properties window To generalise your builds you can define macro values that are substituted when the project properties are used These macro values can be defined globally at the solution and project level and can be defined on a per configuration basis You can view and update the macro values using Project gt Macros The combination of configurations properties with inheritance dependencies and macros provides a very powerful bu
307. rty value Unique properties A unique property has one value When a build is done the value of a unique property is the first one defined in the project hierarchy For example the Treat Warnings As Errors property could be set to Yes at the solution level which would then be applicable to every file in the solution that is compiled assembled and linked You can then selectively define property values for other project items For a example particular source file may have warnings that you decide are allowable so you set the Treat Warnings As Errors to No for this particular file Note that when the properties window displays a project property it will be shown in bold if it has been defined for unique properties The inherited or default value will be shown if it hasnt been defined solution Treat Warnings As Errors Yes project1 Treat Warnings As Errors Yes filel Treat Warnings As Errors Yes file2 Treat Warnings As Errors No Chapter 4 Project properties 50 project2 Treat Warnings As Errors No filel Treat Warnings As Errors No file2 Treat Warnings As Errors Yes In the above example the files will be compiled with these values for Treat Warnings As Errors projectt file1 Yes project1 file2 No project2 file1 No project2 file2 Yes Aggregating properties An aggregating property collects all of the values that are defined for it in the project hierarchy For example when a C file
308. ry From the Tools menu click Remove Package Select the package file from the file chooser dialog You will be prompted if any files that are to be removed have been modified 94 When the package has been removed the installed packages page will be displayed Viewing installed packages From the Tools menu click View Packages The set of installed packages will be displayed in the web browser Select one of the html links to see the contents of the package Chapter10 Package management Linking and Section placement Executable programs consists of a number of program sections Typically there will be program sections for code initialised data and zero d data There will often be more than one code section and these will require placement at specific addresses in memory To describe how the program sections of your program are positioned in memory the CrossWorks project system uses a Memory Map file format page 337 and a Section Placement file format page 339 These files are both xml files and can be edited either with the text editor or with the built in memory map editor The memory map file specifies the start address and size of memory segments of the target The section placement file specifies where to place program sections in the memory segments of the target Seperating the memory map from the section placement scheme enables a single hardware description to be shared across projects and also enabl
309. s To define a project macro Select Macros from the Project menu Chapter4 Project management Click on the Project tab Select the solution or project the macro should apply to Set the macro using the syntax name replacement text Alternatively you can set the project macros from the properties window Select the appropriate solution project in the Project Explorer In the properties window select the Macros property in the General Options group Click on the the ellipsis button on the right Set the macro using the syntax name replacement text Build macros The following macro values are defined by the project system for a build of a given project node LETeo Description ProjectDir The project directory ProjectName The project name Configuration The selected build configuration SolutionDir The directory containing the solution file SolutionName The solution name InputFileName The name of an input file relative to its project directory InputName The name of an input file relative to its project directory without its extension InputExt The extension of an input file The macro expanded value of the Intermediate IntDir f Directory property OutDir The macro expanded value of the Output Directory property The default file extension for an executable file EXE including the dot LIB The default file extension for a library file including the
310. s are numerous and can be specific to a particular product build you should consider this help to be the definitive help on the property You can organise the property display so that it is divided into categories or alternatively display it as a flat list that is sorted alphabetically The combo box enables you to change the properties yourself and explains which properties you are looking at Some properties have actions associated with them you can find these by right clicking on the property key Most properties that represent filenames can be opened this way When the properties window is displaying project properties youll find that some properties are displayed in bold This means that the property value hasnt been inherited If you wish to inherit rather than define such a property then on the right click context menu youll find an action that enables you to inherit the property Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows Source navigator window One of the best ways to find your way around your source code is using the Source Navigator The source navigator parses the active project s source code and organizes classes functions and variables in various ways Source navigator user interface The Source Navigator window is divided into a tool bar and the main breakpoint display Source Navigator tool bar Button Description al Sorts the objects alphabetically pA Sorts the objects by type Fa Sorts the objects by access
311. s reprocessor Undefinitions String List undefinitio s Specifies the system include path This c_system_inclu property de_directories will have macro expansion applied to it System Include Directories String List Chapter 36 Compilation Properties 359 Descriptio n Property Save Name If set to Yes no standard preprocess or definitions will be defined c_undefine_all Boolean _preprocessor_ definitions Undefine All Preprocessor Definitions Specifies the user include path This c_user_include property _directories will have macro expansion applied to it User Include Directories String List 360 Chapter 36 Property Reference Section Options Property Type Code Section Name String Save Name default_code_s ection Descriptio Specifies the default section name to use for the program code section Constant Section Name String default_const_s ection Specifies the default section name to use for the read only constant section Data Section Name String default_data_s ection Specifies the default section name to use for the initialised writable data section Vector Section Name String default_vector_ section Specifies the default section name to use for the interrupt vector section Chapter 36 Compilation Properties 361 Descriptio Property Save Name Specifies the default section name to default_
312. s c followed by b for the comment block template Select Edit gt Advanced gt Expand Template or type Ctrl J to expand the template To expand the template automatically Ensure the Expand Templates On Space editor property is enabled Type a key sequence for example the keys c followed by b for the comment block template Now type Space key to expand the template Editing Macros The editor has a number of built in macros for carrying out common editing actions To declare a type Select Edit gt Editing Macros gt Declare Or Cast To menu item for required type To cast to a type Select text in the editor containing expression to cast Select Edit gt Editing Macros gt Declare Or Cast To menu item for required type cast Chapter 8 Advanced editor features 85 86 To insert a qualifier Select Edit gt Editing Macros gt Insert menu item for required qualifier Tab Characters The editor can either use tab characters or only use space characters to fill whitespace The use of tabs or spaces when indenting can be specified in the editors language properties The editor can also add or remove tabs characters in blocks of selected text To replace spaces with tab characters in selected text Select text Select Edit gt Advanced gt Tabify Selection menu item To replace tab characters with spaces in selected text Select text Select Edit gt Advanced gt Untabify Selection
313. s divided into the following areas Title bar Displays the name of the current file being edited and the active workspace Menu bar Dropdown menus for editing building and debugging your program Toolbars Frequently used actions are quickly accessible on toolbars below the menu bar Editing area A tabbed or MDI view of multiple editors and the HTML viewer Docked windows CrossStudio has many windows which can be docked to the left of to the right of or below the editing area You can configure which windows are visible when editing and debugging The figure shows the project explorer targets window and output window Status bar At the bottom of the window the status bar contains useful information about the current editor build status and debugging environment 36 The title bar CrossStudio s title bar displays the name of the active editor tab if in Tabbed Document Workspace mode or the active MDI window if in Multiple Document Workspace mode Title bar format The first item shown in the title bar is CrossStudio s name Because CrossStudio targets different processors the name of the target processor family is also shown so you can distinguish between instances of CrossStudio when debugging multi processor or multi core systems The file name of the active editor follows CrossStudio s name you can configure the exact presentation of the file name this as described below After the file name the title bar di
314. s must not make assumptions about the implementation of errno The value of errno is zero at program startup but is never set to zero by any library function The value of errno may be set to a nonzero value by a library function and this effect is documented in each functio that does so Chapter 28 lt errno h gt Errors 247 The header file lt errno h gt defines the macros EDOM EILSEQ and ERANGE which expand to integer constant expressions with type int distinct positive values and which are suitable for use in if preprocessing directives Portability errno conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 lt limits h gt Integer numerical limits The header file lt limits h gt defines macros that expand to various limits and parameters of the standard integer types Type sizes CHAR _BIT Number of bits in a char Character minimum and maximum values CHAR_MIN Minimum value of a char CHAR_MAX Maximum value of a char SCHAR_MIN Minimum value of a signed char SCHAR_MAX Maximum value of a signed char UCHAR_MAX Maximum value of an unsigned char Short minimum and maximum values SHRT_MIN Minimum value of a short SHRT_MAX Maximum value of a short USHRT_MAX Maximum value of an unsigned short Integer minimum and maximum values INT_MIN Minimum value of an int INT_MAX Maximum value of an int UINT_MAX Maximum value of an unsigned int Long integer minimu
315. s that are being used in the build if you use the echo option and you can also see why commands are being executed using the verbose option You can see what commands will be executed without executing them using the show option CrossBuild Options batch Do a batch build Specify the configuration to build in If the name config name configuration can t be found crossbuild will list the set of configurations that are available clean Remove all the output files of the build process D macro value Define a macro value for the build process echo Show the command lines as they are executed Specify the name of the project to build If crossbuild project name can t find the specified project then a list of project names is shown rebuild Always execute the build commands show Show the command lines but don t execute them Specify the name of the solution to build If crossbuild solution name can t find the specified solution then a list of solution names is shown verbose Show build information 322 Chapter 29 CrossBuild CrossLoad CrossLoad is a command line program that allows you to download and verify applications without using CrossStudio This tool can be used for production purposes but is not designed to be used for development crossload options files Options targettarget Specify the target interface to use Use the listtargets option to displ
316. s to appear for the a i 0 u x and xX conversions the number of digits to appear after the decimal point character for e E and F conversions the maximum number of significant digits for the g and G conversions or the maximum number of bytes to be written for s conversions The precision takes the form of a period followed either by an asterisk or by an optional decimal integer if only the period is specified the precision is taken as zero If a precision appears with any other conversion specifier the behavior is undefined An optional length modifier that specifies the size of the argument A conversion specifier character that specifies the type of conversion to be applied As noted above a field width or precision or both may be indicated by an asterisk In this case an int argument supplies the field width or precision The arguments specifying field width or precision or both must appear in that order before the argument if any to be converted A negative field width argument is taken as a flag followed by a positive field width A negative precision argument is taken as if the precision were omitted Chapter 28 lt stdio h gt Input output functions 281 282 Some CrossWorks library variants do not support width and precision specifiers in order to reduce code and data space requirements please ensure that you have
317. se Line Indent Tab Increases the line indent of the selection If there is no selection the cursor is moved to the next tab stop by inserting spaces or a tab character according to the tab settings for the document Decrease Line Indent Shift Tab Decreases the line indent of the selection If there is no selection the cursor is moved to the previous tab stop Chapter 16 Edit Selection menu 181 182 Menu command Keystroke Description Aligns all text in the selection to the leftmost non blank character in Align Left Ctrl K Ctrl J L the selection F Centers all text in the selection between the leftmost and rightmost Align Center ee Cah non blank characters in the selection Align Right Ctrl K Ctrl4 R Aligns all text in the selection to the rightmost non blank character in the selection Sort Ascending Sorts the selection into ascending lexicographic order Sort Descending Sorts the selection into decending lexicographic order Bookmarks menu The Bookmarks menu provides commands to drop and find temporary bookmarks Toggle The Bookmarks menu e Toggle Bookmark x Next Bookmark 2 Previous Bookmark Eirst Bookmark Last Bookmark xz Clear All Bookmarks Ctrl F2 F2 Shift F2 Ctrl K F2 Ctrl K Shift F2 Ctrl Shift F2 Bookmarks menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description Ctrl F2 Inserts or removes a bookmark on the cursor line Bookmark Moves th
318. sed lt stdio h gt Input output functions page 280 Describes the formatted input and output functions lt stdio h gt Input output functions page 280 Describes the general utility functions provided by the C library lt string h gt String handling page 310 Describes the string handling functions provided by the C library lt assert h gt Diagnostics The header file lt assert h gt defines the assert macro under control of the NDEBUG macro which the library does not define Macros assert page 242 Assert that a condition is true assert Synopsis include lt assert h gt void assert expression Description assert allows you to place assertions and diagnostic tests into programs If NDEBUG is defined as a macro name at the point in the source file where lt assert h gt is included the assert macro is defined as define assert ignore void 0 If NDEBUG is not defined as a macro name at the point in the source file where lt assert h gt is included the assert macro expands to a void expression that calls __assert When such an assert is executed and expression is false assert calls the __assert function with information about the particular call that failed the text of the argument the name of the source file and the source line number These are the stringized expression and the values of the preprocessing macros __FILE__ and LINE_ The prototype for __assert is extern void _
319. selected the correct library in the Printf Width Precision Support property of the project if you use these Flag characters The flag characters and their meanings are The result of the conversion is left justified within the field The default if this flag is not specified is that the result of the conversion is left justified within the field The result of a signed conversion always begins with a plus or minus sign The default if this flag is not specified is that it begins with a sign only when a negative value is converted space If the first character of a signed conversion is not a sign or if a signed conversion results in no characters a space is prefixed to the result If the space and flags both appear the space flag is ignored The result is converted to an alternative form For o conversion it increases the precision if and only if necessary to force the first digit of the result to be a zero if the value and precision are both zero a single 0 is printed For x or xX conversion a nonzero result has 0x or 0X prefixed to it For e E F g and conversions the result of converting a floating point number always contains a decimal point character even if no digits follow it Normally a decimal point character appears in the result of these conversions only if a digit follows it For g and
320. sembling a project or file You can disassemble a project either by double clicking the corresponding file as described above or you can use the Disassemble tool to do it To disassemble a project or file do one of the following Click the appropriate project or file in the Project Explorer view On the Project Explorer tool bar click the Disassemble tool button z or Right click the appropriate project or file in the Project Explorer view From the popup menu click the Disassemble CrossStudio opens a new read only editor and places a disassembled listing into it If you change your project and rebuild it causing a change in the object or executable file the disassembly updates to keep the display up to date with the file on disk Using Symbol Browser features Whilst a map file produced by the linker is traditionally the best way and in some cases the only way to see how your application is laid out in memory CrossStudio provides a much better way to examine and navigate your application the Symbol Browser You can use the Symbol Browser to navigate your application see which data objects and functions have been linked into your application what their sizes are which section they are in and where they are placed in memory Chapter2 CrossStudio Tutorial Displaying the Symbol Browser To display the Symbol Browser window if it is hidden do one of the following From the View menu click Symbol Browser or
321. ser for its location the results are stored in the debug source file map The debug source file map is simply a mapping between the original file name and its new location When a file cannot be found at its original location or in the debug search paths the debug source file map is checked to see if a new location for the file has been recorded or if the user has specified that the file does not exist Each project session maintains its own source file map the map is not shared by all projects To view the debug source file map From the Debug menu click Edit Search Paths To remove individual entries from the debug source file map From the Debug menu click Edit Search Paths Right click on the mapping you want to delete From the context menu click Delete Mapping To remove all entries from the debug source file map From the Debug menu click Edit Search Paths Select Delete All Mappings from the context menu Environment options Environment General Window menu contains Specifies the maximum number of open windows to be listed in the Window menu Most recently used project list contains Specifies the maximum number of project files to be listed in the File gt Recent Projects menu Most recently used files list contains Specifies the maximum number of files to be listed in the File gt Recent Files menu Use large icons in toolbars Enables large icons in tool bars Show status bar Enables display
322. ses the information in memory map files to enable register display and memory display The memory map editor supports the following node types Root The top most node of the memory map Memory Segment A range of addresses that represents a memory region in the target Program Section Represents a program section of your application 90 Register Group Represents an area of memory that contains a group of related registers Register Represents a memory mapped register Bit Field Part of a memory mapped register The following statements hold regarding the creation and movement of nodes within a memory Memory segments can be within the Root segment Program sections must be within a memory segment Register groups can be within the Root or within a memory segment Registers can be within memory segments or register groups Bit Fields can be within registers All nodes have mandatory and optional properties associated with them All nodes have a mandatory Name property This name should be unique within the memory map Memory segment and register group properties Start Address A hexadecimal number stating where the memory begins lowest address Start Address Symbol The name of a linker symbol to generate that has the value of the Start Address Size A hexadecimal number that defines the size in bytes of the memory segment Size Symbol The name of a linker symbol to generate that has the value of the
323. so be easily modified to support other ARM 7 targets see ARM Target Support page 153 for more information GNU Compiler Collection CrossWorks for ARM comes with a pre built version of the GNU Compiler Collectio GCC C and C compiler assembler linker and other tools to enable you to immediately begin developing applications for ARM CrossWorks C Library CrossWorks for ARM has it s own royalty free ANSI and ISO C compliant C library that has been specifically designed for use within embedded systems CrossStudio IDE CrossStudio for ARM is a streamlined integrated development environment IDE for building testing and deploying ARM applications CrossStudio provides Source Code Editor A powerful source code editor with multi level undo and redo makes editing your code a breeze Project System A complete project system organises your source code and build rules Build System With a single key press you can build all your applications in a solution ready for them to be loaded onto a developer card or into the debugger ARM Hardware Debug With the Macgraigor Wiggler attached you can use the integrated debugger to step through and diagnose problems in your software on your target board Chapter1 Introduction Integrated Debugger The debugger will help you to quickly find problems in your ARM and Thumb applications ARM Flash Programming and Debug You can download your programs directly into Flash and debug
324. splay the instructions of the application you can step out to get back to source code or continue to debug at the instruction code level There are may be cases in which the debugger cannot display the instructions in these cases you will informed of this with a dialog and you should step out Chapter 2 Using the debugger 29 30 Inspecting data Being able to control execution isn t very helpful if you can t look at the values of variables registers and peripherals Hovering the mouse pointer over a variable will show its value as a data tip Help main c fact c f CrossWorks Tutorial jint factorial int h gt if in lt 1 q0 L return 1 You can configure CrossStudio to display data tips in a variety of formats at the same time using the Environment Options dialog The Call Stack window shows the function calls that have been made but have not yet finished i e the active set of functions To display the Call Window select Debug gt Debug Windows gt Call Stack or type Ctrl Alt S You can find out about the call stack window in the Call stack window page 107 section Program output The tutorial application uses the function debug_printf to output a string to the Debug Console in the Output Window The Debug Console appears automatically whenever something is written to it pressing F5 to continue program execution and you will notice that the Debug Console appears In fact the program runs for
325. splays status information on CrossStudio s state building CrossStudio is building a solution building a project or compiling a file run An application is running under control of the CrossStudio s inbuilt debugger break The debugger is stopped at a breakpoint autostep The debugger is single stepping the application without user interaction this is called autostepping The Target Status panel in the status bar also shows CrossStudio s state see The status bar page 38 Configuring the title bar You can configure whether the full path of the file or just its file name is shown in the title bar Displaying the full file path in the title bar To display the full file path in the title bar do the following From the Tools menu click Options Inthe Appearance group check Show full path in title bar Displaying only the file name in the title bar To display only the file name in the title bar do the following From the Tools menu click Options Inthe Appearance group uncheck Show full path in title bar Chapter3 Overview The menu bar The menu bar conatins dropdown menus for editing building and debugging your program You can navigate menu items using the keyboard or using the mouse You ll find a complete description of each menu and its contents in CrossStudio menu summary page 173 Navigating menus using the mouse To navigate menus using the mouse do the follo
326. ssed using the JavaScript array notation for example i j Debug evaluate complex e i eza Ty Because JavaScript is a dynamic language you can write the above in a more natural fashion fel i J Debug evaluate complex enis Gude You can access arbitrary memory locations using C style casts for example v Debug evaluate unsigned 0x200 and similarly you can cast to user defined types Chapter 12 Threads window 121 122 v Debug evaluate Complex 0x200 Note that you should ensure that the JavaScript program will terminate as if it goes into an endless loop then the debugger and consequently CrossStudio will become unresponsive and you will need to kill CrossStudio using a task manager Trace window The trace window displays historical information on the instructions executed by the target The type and number of the trace entries depends upon the target that is connected when gathering trace information Some targets may trace all instructions others may trace jump instructions and some may trace modifications to variables You ll find the trace capabilities of your target on the right click context menu Each entry in the trace window has a unique number and the lower the number the earlier the trace You can click on the header to show earliest to latest or the latest to earliest trace entries If a trace entry can have source code located to it then double clicking on the
327. st char nptr atol converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to a long int representation atol does not affect the value of errno on an error If the value of the result cannot be represented the behavior is undefined Except for the behavior on error atol is equivalent to strtol nptr char NULL 10 atol returns the converted value atol conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 strtol page 304 include lt stdlib h gt long int atoll const char nptr atoll converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to a long long int representation atoll does not affect the value of errno on an error If the value of the result cannot be represented the behavior is undefined Except for the behavior on error atoll is equivalent to strtoll nptr char NULL 10 atoll returns the converted value atoll conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 strtoll page 306 include lt stdlib h gt void calloc size_t nmemb size_t size Chapter 28 lt stdlib h gt General utilities 297 Description Portability div Synopsis Description Portability See also div_t Synopsis Description Portability See also free Synopsis Description 298 calloc allocates space for an array of nmemb objects each of whose size is size The space is initialized to all zero bits calloc returns a null pointer if the space for the array of object ca
328. stdarg h gt Variable arguments lt stdio h gt Input output functions lt stdlib h gt General utilities lt string h gt String handling Command Line Tools CrossBuild CrossLoad mkhdr C C header file generator mkpkg package creator GCC Online Documentation BINUTILS Online Documentation vi Part VI Chapter 35 Chapter 36 Chapter 37 Chapter 38 Chapter 39 337 337 339 340 341 345 345 350 362 365 366 367 379 383 397 399 405 407 Appendices File formats Memory Map file format Section Placement file format Project file format Project Templates file format Property Reference Build Properties Compilation Properties External Build Project Properties Folder Properties Library Properties Linker Properties Staging And Combining Project Properties Target Interface Properties ARM Simulator Properties Code editor command summary Binary editor command summary Glossary Chapter 1 Part Preface Introduction This guide is divided into a number of sections Introduction page 3 Covers installing CrossWorks on your machine and verifying that it operates correctly followed by a brief guide to the operation of the CrossStudio integrated development environment debugger and other software supplied in the CrossWorks package CrossStudio Tutorial page 13 Describes how to get started with CrossStudio and runs through all the steps from creating a project
329. stream using putchar under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments are converted for output Before calling vprintf arg must be initialized by the va_start macro and possibly subsequent va_arg calls vprintf does not invoke the va_end macro vprintf returns number of characters transmitted or a negative value if an output or encoding error occurred Notes wprintf is equivalent to printf with the variable argument list replaced by arg Portability wprintf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 SeeAlso Formatted output control strings page 281 vscan t Synopsis include lt stdio h gt int vscanf const char format va_list arg Description vscanf reads input from the standard input stream under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies the admissible input sequences and how they are to be converted for assignment using subsequent arguments as pointers to the objects to receive the converted input Before calling vscanf arg must be initialized by the va_start macro and possibly subsequent va_arg calls vscanf does not invoke the va_end macro If there are insufficient arguments for the format the behavior is undefined 292 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Notes Portability See Also vsnprintft Synopsis Description Notes Portability See Also vsprintft Synopsis vscanf returns the value of the macro EOF if an input failure occurs before an
330. supported file types vary between systems to display a list of the file types supported by CrossLoad use the listfiletypes option crossload listfiletypes Chapter 30 CrossLoad This command will produce a list of the supported file types for example hzx CrossStudio Executable File bin Binary File ihex Intel Hex File hex Hex File tihex TI Hex File srec Motorola S Record File CrossLoad will attempt to determine the type of any load file given to it if it cannot do this you may specify the file type using the filetype option crossload target usb solution MySolution hzp project MyProject config Release ExternalApp txt filetype tihex It is possible with some targets to carry out a download without the need to specify a CrossStudio project In this case all you need to specify is the target interface and the load file For example the following command line will download myapp s19 using a USB CrossConnect crossload target usb myapp s19 Each target interface has a range of configurable properties that allow you to customize the default behaviour To produce a list of the target properties and their current value use the listprops option crossload target parport listprops This command will produce a list of the parport target interfaces properties a description of what the properties are and their current value Name JTAG Clock Divider Description The amount to divide the JTAG clock frequency Value
331. t Memory Simulation Parameter Chapter 36 Property Reference String arm_simulator _memory_simu lation_paramet er A string to pass to the memory simulation file when it is connected to Code editor command summary The following table summarizes the keystrokes and corresponding menu items for code editor commands Keystrokes Menu Description Up Move the caret one line up Down Move the caret one line down Left Move the caret one character to the left Right Move the caret one character to the right Home Move the caret to the start of the current line End Move the caret to the end of the current line PageUp Move the caret on page up PageDown Move the caret one page down Ctrl Up Scroll the document down one line Ctrl Down Scroll the document up one line Ctrl Left Move the caret to the start of the previous word Ctrl Right Move the caret to the start of the next word Ctrl Home Move the caret to the start of the document Ctrl End Move the caret to the end of the document Ctrl PageUp Move the caret to the top of the window 400 Keystrokes Menu Description ee Move the caret to the bottom of the window Insert a new line and move the caret to an Enter e F Re appropriate position on the next line dependant on the indent settings ShifttUp Extend the current selection up by one line Shift Down Exte
332. t likely page displayed in the HTML browser its a great way to quickly find the reference help pages for functions provided in the library Using the Contents window The Contents view provides a list of all the topics and sub topics within the help system The highlighted entry indicates the current help topic Other topics can be selected and the help viewer will update accordingly To move to the next topic From the Help menu click Next Topic Click the Next Topic tool button on the Contents window toolbar To move to the previous topic From the Help menu click Previous Topic or Click the Previous Topic tool button on the Contents window toolbar Using the Search window Using the Search window you can search for multiple words or phrases When the search button is pressed the matching pages are listed in order of relevance When you select a topic in the Search window the corresponding help topic is shown in the HTML browser Using the Index window The index view allows single keywords to be located Keywords can either be typed or selected from the list As the selected keyword changes the topic with the highest number of hits is displayed Other topics can be selected and the help viewer will update accordingly Chapter 12 CrossStudio Windows Output window The Output window contains logs and transcripts from various systems within CrossStudio Most notably it contains the Build Log Target Log a
333. t for the function to complete TargetInterface getRegister TargetInterface getRegister register TargetInterface getRegister gets the value of a CPU register Note that the set of register values are only updated when the CPU stops register is a string specifying the register to get and must be one of r0 r1 r2 13 r4 r5 r6 r7 r8 r9 r10 r11 r12 r13 r14 r15 sp lr pc cpsr r8_fiq r9_fiq r10_fiq r11_fiq r12_fiq r13_fiq r14_fiq spsr_fiq r13_svc r14_svc spsr_svc r13_abt r14_abt spsr_abt r13_irq r14_irq spsr_irq r13_und r14_und spsr_und TargetInterface getRegister returns the register s value Targetlnterface peekByte TargetInterface peekByte address TargetInterface peekByte reads a byte of target memory from addressand returns it Targetinterface peekBytes TargetInterface peekBytes address length Chapter14 ARM Target Support Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description Synopsis Description TargetInterface peekBytes reads a block of bytes from target memory starting at gt address for length bytes and returns the result as an array containing the bytes read Targetinterface peekUint16 TargetInterface peekUint16 address TargetInterface peekUint16 reads a 16 bit unsigned integer from target memory from address and returns it Targetinterface peekU
334. t of target interface names and descriptions usb USB CrossConnect parport Parallel Port Interface sim Simulator Use the target option followed by the target interface name to specify which target interface to use crossload target usb CrossLoad is normally used to download and or verify projects created and built with CrossStudio To do this you need to specify the target interface you want to use the CrossStudio solution file the project name and the build configuration The following command line will download and verify the debug version of the project MyProject contained within the MySolution hzp solution file using a USB CrossConnect crossload target usb solution MySolution hzp project MyProject config Debug In some cases it is useful to download a program that might not have been created using CrossStudio using the settings from an existing CrossStudio project You might want to do this if your existing project describes specific loaders or scripts that are required in order to download the application To do this you simply need to add the name of the file you want to download to the command line For example the following command line will download the HEX file ExternalApp hex using the release settings of the project MyProject using a USB CrossConnect crossload target usb solution MySolution hzp project MyProject config Release ExternalApp hex CrossLoad is able to download and verify a range of file types The
335. ted Boolean Specifies the largest integer type supported by the printf function group Options are int char short and integer support long char short integer and long support long long char short integer long and long long support linker_printf_f Printf Integer Support Enumeration ait level 368 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Printf Width Precision Supported Type Boolean Save Name linker_printf_ width_precisio n_supported Descriptio Enables support for width and precision in the printf function group Scanf Classes Supported Boolean linker_scanf_ch aracter_group_ matching_enab led Enables support for J and character class matching in the scanf functions Scanf Floating Point Supported Boolean linker_scanf_fp _enabled Specifies whether the version of the scanf that supports floating point numbers should be linked into the applicatio n Chapter 36 Linker Properties 369 Descriptio n Property Save Name Specifies the largest integer type supported by the scanf function group Options are int char short and integer support long char short integer and long support long long char short integer long and long long support linker_scanf_f Scanf Integer Support Enumeration mt level 370 Chapter 36 Property Reference Linker Options Property Type Sa
336. ted memory for reuse malloc Allocate space for a single object realloc Resizes allocated memory space or allocates memory space atof Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt int atof const char nptr Description atof converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to an int representation atof does not affect the value of errno on an error If the value of the result cannot be represented the behavior is undefined Except for the behavior on error atof is equivalent to strtod nptr char NULL atoi returns the converted value Portability atoi conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 SeeAlso strtol page 303 atoi Synopsis include lt stdlib h gt int atoi const char nptr Description atoi converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to an int representation atoi does not affect the value of errno on an error If the value of the result cannot be represented the behavior is undefined Except for the behavior on error atoi is equivalent to int strtol nptr char NULL 10 atoi returns the converted value 296 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Portability See Also atol Synopsis Description Portability See Also atoll Synopsis Description Portability See Also calloc Synopsis atoi conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 strtol page 304 include lt stdlib h gt long int atol con
337. ter any printing character except space isupper Is character a lowercase letter isprint Is character printable ispunct Is character a punctuation mark isspace Is character a whitespace character isupper Is character an uppercase letter isxdigit Is character a hexadecimal letter Conversion functions tolower Convert uppercase character to lowercase toupper Convert lowercase character to uppercase Chapter 28 lt ctype h gt Character handling 243 isalnum Synopsis Description Portability See also isalpha Synopsis Description Portability See also isblank Synopsis Description Portability See also iscntrl Synopsis Description Portability 244 include lt ctype h gt int isalnum int c isalnum returns nonzero true if and only if isalpha or isdigit return true for value of the argument c isalnum conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 isalpha page 244 isdigit page 245 include lt ctype h gt int isalpha int c isalpha returns nonzero true if and only if isupper or islower return true for value of the argument c isalpha conforms to ISO TEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO TEC 9899 1999 C99 isupper page 246 isupper page 245 include lt ctype h gt int isblank int c isblank returns nonzero true if and only if the value of the argument c is either a space character or the horizontal tab character t isb
338. the Watch window Each expression appears as a row in the display Each row contains the expression and its value If the value of an expression is structured for example an array then you can open the structure see its contents The display is updated each time the debugger locates to source code So it will update each time your program stops on a breakpoint or single step and whenever you traverse the call stack Items that have changed since they that were previously displayed are highlighted in red Showing the Watch window To display watch window n if it is hidden do one of the following From the View menu click Other Windows then Watch n or From the Debug menu click Debug Windows then Watch n or Type Ctrl T W n or Chapter 12 Watch window 123 124 Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Other Windows then Watch n Adding or changing items to watch You can add a new expression to be watched by clicking and typing into the last entry in the watch window You can change the expression that is watched by clicking the expression entry and editing its contents Changing display format When you select a variable in the main part of the display the display format button highlighted on the Watch window tool bar changes to show the item s display format To change the display format of a local variable do one of the following Right click the
339. the longjmp function the setjmp macro returns a nonzero value determined by the call to longjmp The ISO standard does not specify whether setjmp is a macro or an identifier declared with external linkage If a macro definition is suppressed in order to access an actual function or a program defines an external identifier with the name setjmp the behavior of setjmp is undefined setjmp conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 longjmp page 277 Chapter 28 lt setjmp h gt Non local jumps 277 278 lt stdarg h gt Variable arguments va_arg Synopsis Description Examples The header file lt stdarg h gt defines a number of macros to access variable parameter lists Functions va_end Start access to variable arguments va_arg Get variable argument value va_end Finish access to variable arguments va_copy Copy va_arg structure include lt stdarg h gt type va_arg va_list ap type va_arg expands to an expression that has the specified type and the value of the type argument The ap parameter must have been initialized by va_start or va_copy without an intervening invocation of va_end You can create a pointer to a va_list and pass that pointer to another function in which case the original function may make further use of the original list after the other function returns Each invocation of the va_arg macro modifies ap so that the values of successive arguments are returned in turn
340. them seamlessly from within the IDE Integrated Help system The built in help system provides context sensitive help and a complete reference to the CrossStudio IDE and tools What we don t tell you This documentation does not attempt to teach the C or assembly language programming rather you should seek out one of the many introductory texts available And similarly the documentation doesn t cover the ARM architecture or microcontroller application development in any great depth We also assume that you re fairly familiar with the operating system of the host computer being used For Microsoft Windows development environment we recommend Windows 2000 or Windows XP but you can use Windows NT 4 Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me if you wish C programming guides Kernighan B W and Ritchie D M The C Programming Language 2nd edition 1988 Prentice Hall Englewood Cliffs NJ USA ISBN 0 13 110362 8 The original C bible updated to cover the essentials of ANCI C 1990 version Harbison S P and Steele G L A C Reference Manual second edition 1987 Prentice Hall Englewood Cliffs NJ USA ISBN 0 13 109802 0 Anice reference guide to C including a useful amount of information on ANSI C Written by Guy Steele a noted language expert ANSI C reference ISO IEC 9899 1990 C Standard and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C Standard The standard is available from your national standards body or directly from ISO at www iso ch
341. ties Some properties are read only and provide information on the target others are modifiable and allow the target interface to be configured Target interface properties can be viewed and edited using CrossStudio s property system To view or edit target properties do the following Select a target Select the Properties option from the target s context menu Restoring default target definitions The targets window provides the facility to restore the target definitions to the default set Restoring the default target definitions will undo any of the changes you have made to the targets and their properties and therefore should be used with care To restore the default target definitions do the following Select Restore Default Targets from the targets window context menu Click Yes when prompted if you want to restore the default targets Chapter12 CrossStudio Windows Controlling target connections Resetting the target Reset of the target is typically handled automatically by the system when you start debugging However the target may be manually reset using the Targets window To reset the connected target do one of the following On the Targets window tool bar click the Reset button or From the Target menu click Reset or Type Ctrl T S Downloading programs Program download is handled automatically by CrossStudio when you start debugging However you can download arbitrary prog
342. tine calls a CTL function which checks for rescheduling and the next task ready to run is of a higher priority then the current task Preemptive task switching can also occur when an interrupt service routine calls a CTL function which checks for rescheduling time slicing is enabled the time slice period has been exceeded and the next task ready to run is of the same priority as the current task There is one executing task and there must always be a task ready to execute i e the task list must have a runnable task queued on it Typically there will always be an idle task that loops and perhaps puts the CPU into a power save mode A task on the task list is either runnable or waiting for something e g timeout When a task switch occurs global interrupts will be enabled So you can safely call the tasking library functions with interrupts disabled Task synchronization and resource allocation The CrossWorks tasking library provides several mechanisms to synchronize execution of tasks and to serialise resource allocation Event Sets An event set is a word sized variable which tasks can wait for specific bits events to be set to 1 You can wait for any specified events in an event set or for all of the specified events You can also specify that the events the task are waiting on are automatically cleared set to 0 when the task has completed its wait Counting Semaphores A counting semaphore is a word size variable which
343. tion From the Tools menu click License Manager Click the Activate Product button Type in or paste the returned activation key into the dialog and click OK As CrossWorks is licensed per developer you can install the software on any computer that you use such as a desktop laptop and laboratory computer but on each of these you must go through activation using your issued product key Text conventions Throughout the documentation text printed in this typeface represents verbatim communication with the computer for example pieces of C text commands to the operating system or responses from the computer In examples text printed in this typeface is not to be used verbatim it represents a class of items one of which should be used For example this is the format of one kind of compilation command hcl source file This means that the command consists of Chapter 1 Text conventions The word hel typed exactly like that A source file not the text source file but an item of the source file class for example myprog c Whenever commands to and responses from the computer are mixed in the same example the commands i e the items which you enter will be presented in this typeface For example here is a dialogue with the computer using the format of the compilation command given above c crossworks examples gt hel v myprog c CrossWorks MSP430 Compiler Driver Release 1 0 0 Copyright c 1997 20
344. tions This provides a single point of change for definitions that are common to configurations A particular property can be overridden in a particular configuration to provide configuration specific settings When a solution is created two configurations are generated Debug and Release and you can create additional configurations using Build gt Build Configurations Before you build ensure that the appropriate configuration is set using Project gt Set Active Build Configuration or alternatively the configuration box in the build tool bar You should also ensure that the appropriate build properties are set in the properties window 58 Building your applications When CrossStudio builds your application it tries to avoid building files that have not changed since they were last built It does this by comparing the modification dates of the generated files with the modification dates of the dependent files together with the modification dates of the properties that pertain to the build If you are copying files then sometimes the modification dates may not be updated when the file is copied in this instance it is wise to use the Rebuild command rather than the Build command You can see the build rationale CrossStudio is using by setting the Environment Properties gt Build Settings gt Show Build Information property and the build commands themselves by setting the Environment Properties gt Build Settings gt Echo Build Command p
345. tivates the Output window See Output window page 127 Properties CtrltAlt W Activates the Properties window See Properties window page Window 130 Favorites Ctrl Alt V Activates the Favorites window See Favorites Window Terminal Ctrl Alt M Activates the Terminal Emulator window See Terminal Emulator Emulator Window Debug Console Ctrl Alt D Activates the Debug Console window Javascript Ctrl Alt J Activates the JavaScript Console window Console Symbol Browser Cirl Alt Y Activates the Symbol Browser window See Symbol browser page 133 Clipboard Ring Ctrl Alt C Activates the Clipboard Ring window Other Windows Displays the Other Windows menu HTML Browser Displays the HTML Browser menu 184 Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary Menu command Keystroke Description Logs Displays the Logs menu Status Bar Displays the Status Bar menu Outlining Displays the Outlining menu Full Screen Alt Shift Return Activates the Full Screen workspace Other Windows menu The Other Windows menu provides commands to activate additional windows in CrossStudio The Other Windows menu im Breakpoints Ctrl Alt B call stack Ctri Alt 5 G Locals Ctri Alt L Gl Globals Ctri Alt G Threads Ctri Alt D Registers 1 Ctrl T R 1 Registers2 Ctrl T R 2 Registers3 Ctrl T R 3 Registers4 Ctrl T R 4 Watch 1 Ctrl T W 1 Watch 2 Ctrl T W 2 Watch 3 Ctrl T W 3 Watch 4 Ctrl T W 4 Memory 1 Ctrl T M 1
346. to all configurations that you create You can select theCommon configuration using the Configurations combo box of the properties window If you are modifying a property value of your project its almost certain that you want each configuration to inherit these values so ensure that the Common configuration has been selected If the property is unique then it will use the one defined for the particular configuration If the property isnt defined for this configuration then it uses an arbitrary one from the set of inherited configurations If the property still isnt defined it uses the value for the Common configuration If it still isnt defined then it tries the to find the value in the next level of the project hierarchy solution Common Preprocessor Definitions CommonSolutionDef solution Debug Preprocessor Definitions DebugSolutionDef solution Release Preprocessor Definitions ReleaseSolutionDef project1 Preprocessor Definitions filel Preprocessor Definitions file2 Common Preprocessor Definitions CommonFile1Def file2 Debug Preprocessor Definitions DebugFile1Def project2 Common Preprocessor Definitions ProjectDef filel Preprocessor Definitions file2 Common Preprocessor Definitions File2Def In the above example the files will be compiled with these Preprocessor Definitions when in Debug configuration project1 file1 CommonSolutionDef DebugSolutionDef CommonSolutionDef pr
347. to debugging it on hardware CrossStudio Reference page 11 Contains information on how to use the CrossStudio development environment to manage your projects build and debug your applications Tasking Library Tutorial page 203 Contains documentation on using the CrossWorks tasking library to write multi threaded applications ARM Library Reference Contains documentation for the functions that are specific to the ARM Standard C Library Reference page 241 Contains documentation for the functions in the standard C library supplied in the package ARM Target Support page 153 Contains a description of system files used for startup and debugging of ARM applications Target interfaces page 145 Contains a description of the support for programming ARM microcontrollers What is CrossWorks CrossWorks for ARM is a complete C development system for ARM 7 microprocessors It comprises of the ARM GCC C compiler the CrossWorks C Library and the CrossStudio integrated development environment In order to use CrossWorks for ARM you will need Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 or Windows XP A Macgraigor Wiggler for ARM WNPJ ARM 20 WNPJ ARM 14 or compatible parallel port to JTAG interface An ARM 7 target board with 20 or 14 pin JTAG connector CrossWorks for ARM provides support for several ARM based microcontrollers out of the box in the form of examples and target configurations CrossWorks can al
348. to enable drag and drop editing or uncheck it to disable drag and drop editing Undo and redo The editor has an undo facility to undo previous editing actions The redo feature can be used to re apply previously undone editing actions Undoing one edit To undo one editing action do one of the following From the Edit menu click Undo or On the Standard toolbar click the Undo tool button or Type Ctrl Z or Alt Backspace Undoing multiple edits To undo multiple editing actions do the following On the Standard toolbar click the arrow next to the Undo tool button From the menu select the editing operations to undo Undoing all edits To undo all edits do one of the following Chapter8 Basic editing Indentation From the Edit menu click Advanced then Undo All or Type Ctrl K Ctrl Z Redoing one edit To redo one editing action do one of the following From the Edit menu click Redo or On the Standard toolbar click the Redo tool button or Type Ctrl Y or Alt Shift Backspace Redoing multiple edits To redo multiple editing actions do the following On the Standard toolbar click the arrow next to the Redo tool button From the menu select the editing operations to redo Redoing all edits To redo all edits do one of the following From the Edit menu click Advanced then Redo All or Type Ctrl K Ctrl Y The editor us
349. tring of one or more unrecognized characters including the terminating null character of the input string strtod then attempts to convert the subject sequence to a floating point number and return the result The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string starting with the first non white space character that is of the expected form The subject sequence contains no characters if the input string is empty or consists entirely of white space or if the first non white space character is other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit The expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign followed by anonempty sequence of decimal digits optionally containing a decimal point character then an optional exponent part If the subject sequence begins with a minus sign the value resulting from the conversion is negated A pointer to the final string is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer If the subject sequence is empty or does not have the expected form no conversion is performed the value of nptr is stored in the object pointed to by endptr provided that endptr is not a null pointer strtod returns the converted value if any If no conversion could be performed zero is returned If the correct value is outside the range of representable values HUGE_VAL is returned according to the sign of the value if any and the value o
350. trl T M 2 Activates the second Memory window See Memory window page 116 Memory 3 Ctrl T M 3 o the third Memory window See Memory window page Memory 4 Ctrl T M 4 oo the fourth Memory window See Memory window page i Activates the Execution Trace window See Trace window page Execution Trace 122 Execution Activates the Execution Counts window See Execution counts Counts window page 111 Browser menu The Browser menu provides commands nagivate through the browser history Chapter 16 CrossStudio menu summary The Browser menu e Show Browser Ctri Alt H Back Ctrl alt Left Forward Ctrl Alt Right fa Home Ctrl Alt Home No History Text Size gt Browser commands Menu command Keystroke Description Show Browser Ctrl Alt H Activates the Browser window Back Ctrl Alt Left Displays the previous page in the browser history Forward Ctrl Alt Right Displays the following page in the browser history Home Ctrl Alt Home Displays the home page Text Size Displays the Browser Text Size menu Toolbars menu The Toolbars menu provides commands to display or hide CrossStudio tool bars The Toolbars menu Standard Y Text Edit Build Debug Debug Location M Macro Recording v HTML Browser Iv Source Control x File Comparison Customize Toolbar menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description Standard Displays the Standard tool bar Chapter 16 Toolbars menu
351. tudio integrated development environment In this section Overview page 35 Contains an overview of CrossStudio and its layout Project management page 43 Describes how to manage files and projects in CrossStudio Building projects page 57 Describes how to build projects and correct errors in them Source code control page 61 Describes how to set up your source code control provider so that it works seamlessly with CrossStudio Debug expressions page 65 Describes the type and form of expression that CrossStudio can evaluate when debugging an application Basic editing page 67 Describes CrossStudio s integrated code editor and how to get the most from it Memory map editor page 89 Describes how to edit memory map files that guide section placement Linking and Section placement page 95 Describes how your project is partitioned and placed into the target device s memory A a a N N N aF am 2 O AJ D mi D a D A D CrossStudio Windows page 99 CrossStudio Windows page 99 Describes each of CrossStudio s window individually CrossStudio menu summary page 173 Summarizes each of the menus presented in CrossStudio CrossStudio Tutorial CrossStudio allows you to organize your collection of projects into a workspace or solution We provide a number of project templates for popular evaluation and demonstration boards with the product which you can use as a
352. turns a pointer to the new object which may have the same value as a pointer to the old object or a null pointer if the new object could not be allocated If ptr does not match a pointer earlier returned by calloc malloc or realloc or if the space has been deallocated by a call to free or realloc the behaviour is undefined realloc conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt stdlib h gt void srand unsigned int seed srand uses the argument seed as a seed for a new sequence of pseudo random numbers to be returned by subsequent calls to rand If srand is called with the same seed value the same sequence of pseudo random numbers is generated If rand is called before any calls to srand have been made a sequence is generated as if srand is first called with a seed value of 1 Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Portability See Also strtol Synopsis Description Portability srand conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 rand page 301 RAND_MAX page 302 include lt stdlib h gt double strtod const char nptr char endptr strtod converts the initial portion of the string pointed to by nptr to a double representation First strtod decomposes the input string into three parts an initial possibly empty sequence of white space characters as specified by isspace page 246 a subject sequence resembling a floating point constant and a final s
353. udioDi rRelativeO utputFileP ath are defined stage_package_ Package Member Name String member dane Specifies that the output file stage_set_read will have only its permission s set to read only Set Readonly Boolean 380 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Save Name Descriptio Specifies the command be used to do the staging operation This property will have macro expansion applied to it The dynamic macro StageOut putFilePat h is defined to the value of the output file path property The dynamic macro StudioDi rRelativeO utputFileP ath is defined to value of the output file path property relative to the StudioDi r stage_comman Stage Command String Chapter 36 Staging And Combining Project Properties 381 Combining Options These properties are applicable to Combining project types Property Type Save Name Descriptio Specifies the name of the file the combine command combine_outp will create ut_filepath This property will have macro expansion applied to it Output File Path String Specifies that the output file combine_set_re will have adonly its permission s set to read only Set Readonly Boolean 382 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Save Name Descriptio Specifies the command be used to do the combining operation This property will have macro expansion combine_com applied to mand it The dy
354. ular debug scenario Initially there is a single breakpoint group named Default to which all new breakpoints are added Creating a new breakpoint group To create a new breakpoint group do one of the following From the Breakpoints window tool bar click the New Breakpoint Group button or Chapter 12 Breakpoints window 105 106 From the Debug menu click Breakpoints then New Breakpoint Group or Right click anywhere in the Breakpoints window From the popup menu click New Breakpoint Group In the New Breakpoint Group Dialog enter the name of the breakpoint group Selecting a new active breakpoint group When you create a breakpoint it is added to the active breakpoint group To make a group the active group do the following In the Breakpoints window click the breakpoint group to make active From the popup menu click Set as Active Group Deleting a breakpoint group To delete a breakpoint group do the following Inthe Breakpoints window right click the breakpoint group to delete From the popup menu click the Delete Breakpointt Group button Enabling all breakpoints in a breakpoint group You can enable all breakpoints within a group as a whole To enable all breakpoints in a group do the following In the Breakpoints window right click the breakpoint group to enable From the popup menu click Enable Breakpoint Group Disabling all breakpoints in a breakpoint group You c
355. ull character of the input string strtoll then attempts to convert the subject sequence to an integer and return the result When converting no integer suffix such as U L UL LL ULL is allowed If the value of base is zero the expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign followed by an integer constant If the value of base is between 2 and 36 inclusive the expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign followed by a sequence of letters and digits representing an integer with the radix specified by base The letters from a or A through z or Z represent the values 10 through 35 only letters and digits whose ascribed values are less than that of base are permitted If the value of base is 16 the characters 0x or 0X may optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits following the optional sign The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string starting with the first non white space character that is of the expected form The subject sequence contains no characters if the input string is empty or consists entirely of white space or if the first non white space character is other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is zero the sequence of characters starting with the first digit is interpreted as an integer constant If the subject sequence has the exp
356. ulltoa returns buf as the result If radix is greater than 36 the result is undefined ulltoa is an extension to the standard C library provided by CrossWorks C itoa page 299 ltoa page 301 Iltoa page 300 ultoa page 309 utoa page 310 include lt stdlib h gt char ultoa unsigned long val char buf int radix Chapter 28 lt stdlib h gt General utilities 309 310 Description Portability See Also utoa Synopsis Description Portability See Also ultoa converts val to a string in base radix and places the result in buf ultoa returns buf as the result If radix is greater than 36 the result is undefined ultoa is an extension to the standard C library provided by CrossWorks C itoa page 299 ltoa page 301 lltoa page 300 ultoa page 309 utoa page 310 include lt stdlib h gt char utoa unsigned val char buf int radix utoa converts val to a string in base radix and places the result in buf utoa returns buf as the result If radix is greater than 36 the result is undefined utoa is an extension to the standard C library provided by CrossWorks C itoa page 299 ltoa page 301 Iltoa page 300 ultoa page 309 ultoa page 309 lt string h gt String handling The header file lt string h gt defines functions that operate on arrays that are interpreted as null terminated strings Various methods are used for determining the lengths of the arrays but in all cases a char o
357. ument will Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference have been promoted according to the integer promotions but its value is converted to short int or unsigned short int before printing or that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a short int argument T AET toy steer tour T Specifies that a following d i o u x or X conversion specifier applies to a long int or unsigned long int argument that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a long int argument or has no effect on a following e E F g or G conversion specifier Some CrossWorks library variants do not support the 1 length modifier in order to reduce code and data space requirements please ensure that you have selected the correct library in the Printf Integer Support property of the project if you use this length modifier EREE a a Aat 11 Specifies that a following d i 0 u x or X conversion specifier applies to a long long int or unsigned long long int argument that a following n conversion specifier applies to a pointer to a long long int argument Some CrossWorks library variants do not support the 11 length modifier in order to reduce code and data space requirements please ensure that you have selected the correct library in the Printf Integer Support property of the project
358. ure Select target ARM architecture v3 ARM7 v4T ARM7TDMI v5T ARMSTDMI v5TE ARMSE ee ae Notice that when you change between Debug and Release configurations the code generation options change This dialog shows which options are used when building a project or anything in a project in a given configuration Because we have set the target processor in the Common configuration both Debug and Release configurations will use this setting We could however set the processor type to be different in Debug and Release configurations allowing us to develop on a processor with a large amount of code memory and hardware emulation support but elect to deploy on a smaller more cost effective variant Now click OK to accept the changes made to the project Using the Properties Window If you click on the project node the Properties Window will show the properties of the projectthese have all been inherited from the solution If you modify a property when the project node is selected then youll find that its value is highlighted because you have overridden the property value that was inherited from the solution You can restore the inherited value of a property by right clicking the property and selecting Use Inherited Value from the menu Next we ll build the project Chapter2 CrossStudio Tutorial Building projects Now that the project is created and set up it s time to build it Unfortunately there are some deliberate
359. ursor Delete Deletes one character to the right of the cursor Ctrl Backspace Deletes one word to the left of the cursor Ctrl Delete Deletes one word to the right of the cursor Deleting characters To delete characters or a words in a line do the following Place the cursor immediately before the word or letter you want to delete Press the Delete key as many times as needed to delete the characters or words or Place your cursor at the end of the letter or word you want to delete Press the Backspace key as many times as needed to delete the characters or words Note You can double click a word and then press Delete or Backspace to delete it Deleting lines or paragraphs To delete text which spans more than a few characters do the following Highlight the text you want to delete by selecting it You can select text by holding down the left mouse button and dragging over the text or by using the Shift key with the either the arrow keys or the Home End Page Up Page Down keys Press Delete or Backspace Chapter 8 Changing text 73 74 Using the clipboard Copying text To copy the selected text to the clipboard do one of the following From the Edit menu select Copy or Type Ctrl C or Type Ctrl Ins To append the selected text to the clipboard do the following From the Edit menu click Clipboard then Copy Append To copy whole lines from the current edit
360. uts the selected text to the clipboard If no text is selected copies Repy the current line to the clipboard Ctrl Insert Ctrl V Paste or Pastes the clipboard into the document Shift Insert Deletes the selection If no text is selected deletes the character to Delete Delete the right of the cursor Clipboard Displays the Clipboard menu Clipboard Ring Displays the Clipboard Ring menu Select All Ctrl A Selects all text or items in the document Insert File Ctrl K Ctrl I Inserts a file into the document at the cursor position Expand Template Ctrl4 J Forces expansion of a template Editing Macros Displays the Editing Macros menu Selection Displays the Edit Selection menu See Edit Selection menu page 180 Bookmarks Displays the Bookmarks menu Format Displays the Formatting menu Advanced Displays the Advanced Editing menu Clipboard menu The Clipboard menu provides commands to edit files using the clipboard Chapter 16 Clipboard menu 177 The Clipboard menu Y cut Append Ctrl Shift X Cut Lines Num Cut Lines Append Shift Num Cut Marked Lines Cut Marked Lines Append ee Copy Append Ctrl Shift C Copy Lines Num Copy Lines Append Shift Nurm Copy Marked Lines Copy Marked Lines Append Paste To New Document Alt Shift V R Clear Clipboard Clipboard menu commands Menu command Keystroke Description Cuts the selected text and appends it to the clipboard If no text is fat Append SARDE
361. value of base and a final string of one or more unrecognized characters including the terminating null character of the input string strtoul then attempts to convert the subject sequence to an integer and return the result When converting no integer suffix such as U L UL LL ULL is allowed If the value of base is zero the expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign followed by an integer constant If the value of base is between 2 and 36 inclusive the expected form of the subject sequence is an optional plus or minus sign followed by a sequence of letters and digits representing an integer with the radix specified by base The letters from a or A through z or Z represent the values 10 through 35 only letters and digits whose ascribed values are less than that of base are permitted If the value of base is 16 the characters 0x or 0X may optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits following the optional sign The subject sequence is defined as the longest initial subsequence of the input string starting with the first non white space character that is of the expected form The subject sequence contains no characters if the input string is empty or consists entirely of white space or if the first non white space character is other than a sign or a permissible letter or digit If the subject sequence has the expected form and the value of base is zero the sequence of characters st
362. ve Name Descriptio Additional object and library files to be supplied to the linker_addition linker al_files This property will have macro expansion applied to it Additional command line linker_addition options to al_options be supplied to the linker Additional Input Files String List Additional Linker Options String List Chapter 36 Linker Properties 371 Descriptio n Property Save Name Specifies the format of an additional output file to be generated Options are None no additional linker_output_f output ormat file bin a binary output file hex an Intel hex output file srec a Motorola S Record output file Additional Output Format Enumeration Specifies that the linker should check arm_library_ch whether Check For Memory Segment Boolean eck_memory_s program Overflow egment_overfl sections fit ow into the memory segments they have been placed in 372 Chapter 36 Property Reference Property Type Save Name Descriptio Specifies the entry point of the program This may bea symbol or an absolute address gcc_entry_poin Entry Point String t Specifies the name of the output file produced by the linker This property will have macro expansion applied to it Note that the save name is the same build_output_f as the ile_name Library File Name property If this property is used at the solution node level it will be
363. vice routine The following example illustrates synchronising a task with functions called from two interrupt service routines CTL_EVENT_SET_t el CTL_TASK_s t1 void ISRfn1 void do work and then Chapter 19 Event sets ctl_events_set_clear amp el 1 0 void ISRfn2 void do work and then ctl_events_set_clear amp el 2 0 void task1 void p f r 3 unsigned e e ctl_events_wait CTL_EVENT_WAIT_ANY_EVENTS_AUTO_CLEAR amp el 1 2 0 0 if e amp 1 ISRfn1 completed else if e amp 2 ISRfn2 completed Resource serialisation The following example illustrates resource serialisation of two tasks CTL_EVENT_SET_t el void task1 void for ctl_events_wait CTL_EVENT_WAIT_ANY_EVENTS_AUTO_CLEAR amp el 1 resource has now been acquired ctl_events_set_clear amp el 1 0 resource has now been released void task2 void for ctl_events_wait CTL_EVENT_WAIT_ANY_ EVENTS _AUTO_CLEAR amp el 1 resource has now been acquired ctl_events_set_clear amp el 1 0 resource has now been released void main void Chapter 19 C library support 0 0 215 ctl_events_init amp el 1 Note that e1 is initialised with the event set without this neither task would acquire the resource 216 Chapte
364. w the status of existing breakpoints Chain breakpoints together Breakpoints are stored in the session file so they will be remembered each time you work on a particular project When running in the debugger you can set breakpoints on assembly code addresses These low level breakpoints appear in the breakpoint window for the duration of the debug run but are not saved when you stop debugging When a breakpoint is hit then the matched breakpoint will be highlighted in the breakpoint window Breakpoints window layout The Breakpoints window is divided into a tool bar and the main breakpoint display The Breakpoint tool bar ius c fa Description Creates a new breakpoint using the New Breakpoint dialog Toggles the selected breakpoint between enabled and disabled states Removes the selected breakpoint Moves the cursor to the statement that the selected breakpoint is set at Deletes all breakpoints Disables all breakpoints Seehe ac Enables all breakpoints Creates a new breakpoint group and makes it active The Breakpoints window display The main part of the Breakpoints window displays the breakpoints that have been set and what state they are in You can organize breakpoints into folders called breakpoint groups Chapter 12 Breakpoints window 103 CrossStudio displays these icons to the left of each breakpoint Icon Description Enabled breakpoint An enabled breakpoint
365. will stop your it program running when the breakpoint condition is met Disabled breakpoint A disabled breakpoint will not stop the D program when execution passes through it Invalid breakpoint An invalid breakpoint is one where the breakpoint cannot be set for example there is no executable code H associated with the source code line where the breakpoint is set or the processor does not have enough hardware breakpoints Chained breakpoint The breakpoint is linked to its parent and B is enabled when its parent is hit Showing the Breakpoints window To display the Breakpoints window if it is hidden do one of the following From the View menu click Other Windows then Breakpoints or From the Debug menu click Debug Windows then Breakpoints or Type Ctrl Alt B or On the Debug tool bar click the Breakpoints icon or Right click the tool bar area to display the View menu From the popup menu click Other Windows then Breakpoints Managing single breakpoints You can manage breakpoints in the Breakpoint window Deleting a breakpoint To delete a breakpoint do the following In the Breakpoints window click the breakpoint to delete From the Breakpoints window tool bar click the Delete Breakpoint button 104 Chapter 12 CrossStudio Windows Editing a breakpoint To edit the properties of a breakpoint do the following In the Breakpoints window right click the b
366. window tool bar Right click the main memory display From the popup memu select Save As then select the format from the submenu Exporting memory To export the current state of memory to a binary editor do the following Selects the start address and number of bytes to save by editing the Start Address and Size fields in the memory window tool bar Right click the main memory display From the popup memu select Export to Binary Editor Note that subsequent modifications in the binary editor will not modify memory in the target Chapter 12 Memory window 117 118 Register windows The register windows can show the values of both CPU registers and the processor s special function or peripheral registers Because microcontrollers are becoming very highly integrated it s not unusual for them to have hundreds of special function registers or peripheral registers so CrossStudio provides four register windows You can configure each register window to display one or more register groups for the processor being debugged Register window user interface The Registers window is divided into a tool bar and the main data display Register tool bar Button Description Displays the CPU special function register and periheral register groups X Displays the selected item in binary Xa Displays the selected item in octal Bing Displays the selected item in decimal Big Displays the selected ite
367. wing Click the required menu title in the menu bar the menu appears Click the required menu item in the dropdown menu or Click and hold the mouse on the required menu title in the menu bar the menu appears Drag the mouse to the required menu item on the dropdown menu Release the mouse Navigating menus using the keyboard To navigate menus using the keyboard do the following Tap the Alt key which focuses the menu bar Use the Left and Right keys to navigate to the required menu Use the Up or Down key to activate the requied menu Type Alt or Esc to cancel menu selection at any time Each menu on the menu bar has one letter underlined its shortcut so to activate the menu using the keyboard Whilst holding down the Alt key type the menu s shortcut Once the menu has dropped down you can navigate it using the cursor keys Use Up and Down to move up and down the menu Use Esc to cancel a dropdown menu Use Right or Enter to open a submenu Use Left or Esc to close a submenu and return to the parent menu Type the underlined letter in a menu item to activate that menu item Type Enter to activate the selected menu item Chapter 3 The menu bar 37 The status bar At the bottom of the window the status bar contains useful information about the current editor build status and debugging environment The status bar is divided into two regions one that contains a set
368. wley co uk By return you will receive an activation key To activate CrossWorks for evaluation do the following Run the CrossStudio application From the Tools menu click License Manager Click the Activate Product button Type in or paste the returned activation key into the dialog and click OK If you need more time to evaluate CrossWorks simply request a new evaluation key when the issued one expires or is about to expire Chapter1 Introduction After purchasing CrossWorks When you purchase CrossStudio either directly from ourselves or through a distributor you will be issued a Product Key which uniquely identifies your purchase To permanently activate your software follow these instructions Install CrossWorks on your computer using the CrossWorks installer and accept the license agreement Run the CrossStudio application From the Tools menu click License Manager Ifyou have a default mailer click the By Mail button underneath the text If you have a product key Using e mail send the registration key to the e mail address license rowley co uk If you do have a default mailer click the Manually button underneath the text If you have a product key CrossStudio copies a registration key onto the clipboard Send the registration key to the e mail address license rowley co uk By return you will receive an activation key To activate CrossWorks Run the CrossStudio applica
369. xp conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float frexp float x int exp frexpf breaks a floating point number into a normalized fraction and an integral power of 2 frexpf stores power of two in the int object pointed to by exp and returns the value x such that x has a magnitude in the interval 1 2 1 or zero and value equals x 2exp If x is zero both parts of the result are zero If x is Infinity or NaN frexpf returns x and stores zero into the int object pointed to by exp frexpf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt double hypot double x double y hypot compute the square root of the sum of the squares of x and y sqrt x x y y without undue overflow or underflow If x and y are the lengths of the sides of a right angled triangle then hypot computes the length of the hypotenuse If x or y is Infinity or Infinity hypot returns Infinity If x or y is NaN hypot returns NaN hypot conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 include lt math h gt float hypotf float x float y Chapter 28 Standard C Library Reference Description IEC 60559 math library behavior Portability isfinite Synopsis Description Fast math library behavior Portability isinft Synopsis Description Portability isnan Synopsis Description Portability hypotf compute the square root of the sum of t
370. y conversion Otherwise vscanf returns the number of input items assigned which can be fewer than provided for or even zero in the event of an early matching failure vscanf is equivalent to scanf with the variable argument list replaced by arg vscanf conforms to ISO IEC 9899 1990 C90 and ISO IEC 9899 1999 C99 Formatted input control strings page 285 include lt stdio h gt int vsnprintf char s size_t n const char format va_list arg vsnprintf writes to the string pointed to by s under control of the string pointed to by format that specifies how subsequent arguments are converted for output Before calling vsnprintf arg must be initialized by the va_start macro and possibly subsequent va_arg calls vsnprintf does not invoke the va_end macro If nis zero nothing is written and s can be a null pointer Otherwise output characters beyond the n 1st are discarded rather than being written to the array and a null character is written at the end of the characters actually written into the array A null character is written at the end of the conversion it is not counted as part of the returned value If there are insufficient arguments for the format the behavior is undefined If the format is exhausted while arguments remain the excess arguments are evaluated but are otherwise ignored If copying takes place between objects that overlap the behavior is undefined vsnprintf returns the number of characters that would
371. y all files in each of those groups If you set an option further down in the hierarchy that setting will be inherited by nodes that are children of or grandchildren of that node The way that options are inherited provides a very powerful way to customize and manage your projects Changing the ARM architecture In this instance we will set up the targeted ARM architecture to be v5T As we will be running the example on the simulator it doesn t matter which architecture we target as the simulator will simulate the architecture specified in the project To change the targeted ARM architecture Right click the Tutorial project in the Project Explorer and select Properties from the menuthe Project Options dialog appears Click the Configuration dropdown and change to the Common configuration Chapter 2 Setting project options 19 20 Click the Compiler tab to display the code generation options Click the ARM Architecture option and change this from v4T to v5T The dialog box will now look like this aixi Configuration Target Asse Build Com Linker Section Printf Prepr J Common hd Additional Compiler Options TA ARM Architecture a ARM THUMB interworking Yes E Solution Tutorial 1 project Enable Exception Support No l E Tutorial Enable RTTI Spport No Endian Little Enforce ANSI Checking No Instruction Set ARM Long Calls No Optimization Level None ARM Architect
372. y is enabled Type a key sequence for example the keys c followed by b for the comment block template Now type Space key to expand the template Chapter8 Basic editing Memory map editor Memory map files are tree structured descriptions of the target memory map Memory map files are used by the compiler to ensure correct placement of program sections Memory map files are used by the debugger so that it knows which memory addresses are valid on the target and which program sections to load You can also use the memory files to direct the debugger to display memory mapped peripherals Usually you dont need to modify memory map files they will be set up for the particular targets that CrossStudio supports but it is useful to view them with the memory map editor You can open memory map files using File gt Open and selecting the XML file that contains the memory map or alternatively using the View Memory Map option on the context menu of the Project Explorer The memory map editor provides a tree structured view of the memory space of a target The memory map consists of a set of different node types that are arranged in a hierarchy These nodes have properties that can be modified using the properties window when the node is selected These properties and the placement of nodes within the memory map are used as input to the program building process so that the linker knows where sections should be placed Additionally the debugger u
373. zeroed use for the _section zero initialised writable data section Zeroed Section Name String External Build Project Properties These properties are applicable to Externally Built Executable project types 362 Chapter 36 Property Reference External Build Options Property Type Save Name Descriptio The command line that will build the external_build_ executable command The first entry must be the full path to an executable program The command line that will clean the external_clean_ executable command The first entry must be the full path to an executable program The name of the externally built executable external_build_ file This filename property will have macro expansion applied to it Build Command String Clean Command String Executable File String Chapter 36 External Build Project Properties 363 Descriptio n The address to load the file at This is required if the load external_load_ address address isn t contained in the executable file for example a binary file Property Save Name Load Address String The type of the executable file The options are detect based upon the file extension of the load file elf an ELF external_load_f executable ile_type bin a plain binary file ihex an Intel hex file hex a hex file tihex a TI hex file and srec a Motorola S Record file Load File Type Enumeration

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

USER MANUAL  KitchenAid W10213162A User's Manual  取扱説明書 保存用  Philips Wall light 33161/43/76  Samsung 721S Užívateľská príručka  SOLO 400 B SOLO 800 B SOLO 1600 B SOLO 3200  Proline®Plus pipette  Low Air Loss Mattress Replacement System - PHC  Gorenje RB60299OX  HWE350 Owners Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file